Furuno - GMDSS-TCE-D PDF

TCE-59060-D
(J58-19110-0)
System settings list
GMDSS Equipment
FS-1562 FELCOM 10
FS-75/2550 FELCOM 11
FS-5000/8000 FELCOM 12
DSC-5 FELCOM 80
DSC-6 FELCOM81
DSC-8V FELCOM82
DSC-60 REMOTE STATION
AA-50 NX-500
DP-5 IB-581
DP-6 IB-582
FM-7000
FM-7500
FM-8000
FM-8500
FM-8700
DMC-5
(0208, NAYO)
Instructions for Canceling Distress Alert
Procedure Sample message
VHF DSC
All Stations, All Stations, All Stations
1. Switch off transmitter (transmitter and This is NAME, CALLSIGN,
DSC terminal) immediately. DSC NUMBER, POSITION.
2. Switch equipment on and set to Ch 16.
3. Make broadcast to "All Stations" giving Cancel my distress alert of
your vessel's name, callsign and DSC DATE, TIME, UTC.
number, and cancel the false distress =Master, NAME, CALLSIGN.
alert. DSC NUMBER, DATE, TIME UTC.
MF DSC
All Stations, All Stations, All Stations
1. Switch off equipment (transmitter and This is NAME, CALLSIGN,
DSC terminal) immediately. DSC NUMBER, POSITION.
2. Switch equipment on and tune for
Radiotelephony transmission on Cancel my distress alert of
2182 kHz. DATE, TIME, UTC
3. Make broadcast to "All Stations" giving =Master, NAME, CALLSIGN.
the vessel's name, callsign and DSC DSC NUMBER, DATE, TIME UTC.
number, and cancel the false distress
alert.
HF DSC
Same as for MF but the alert must be cancelled on all the frequency bands on which it
was transmitted. Hence, the transmitter should be tuned consecutively to the
radiotelephony distress frequencies in the 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 MHz bands, as necessary.
Inmarsat C
NAME, CALLSIGN, IDENTITY NUMBER,
Notify the appropriate RCC to cancel the POSITION,
alert by sending a distress priority message Cancel my Iinmarsat-C
via the same CES through which the false distress alert of DATE, TIME, UTC
distress alert was sent. =Master +
EPIRB
If for any reason, an EPIRB is activated accidentally, the ship should contact the nearest
coast station or an appropriate coast earth station or RCC and cancel the distress alert.
* Notwithstanding the above, a ship may use any means available to inform the
appropriate authorities that a false distress alert has been transmitted and should be
cancelled.
* No action will normally be taken against any ship or mariner for reporting and
canceling a false distress alert. However, in view of the serious consequences of false
alert, and the strict ban on their transmission, Governments may prosecute in cases of
repeated violations.
GMDSS equipment key points
Equipment Menu (Item) Pass word/key point Note
[SELECT] “PRG” Ignore ID ON System settings
[SETUP] [4]:XMITR [SETUP] “I”, enter to Selection of VHF or
Re-enter the MMSI “652111” MF/HF
DSC-5 [SETUP] [5]:SCAN Set the RX SCAN To canceling SCAN
frequency as “99999.9”. frequency
[SETUP] [1]:Position [SELECT] [1]; To canceling manual
Set the UTC as “9999”. position data.
[SELECT] [9] :System [SELECT] [9] “P”, enter System settings
[SELECT] [!]:dimmer to For test
“652111”.
[SELECT] [0]:SCAN Set the RX SCAN To canceling SCAN
DSC-6 frequency as “99999.9”. frequency
[SELECT] [1]:Position [SELECT] [1]; To canceling manual
[SELECT] [9] “MMSI” EEROM clear Ver-1.05 and after
(Re-enter the MMSI) (NMI SW ON)
[SELECT] [9]:System [SELECT] [9] “P”, System settings
[SELECT] [!]:dimmer enter to “652111”. For test
[SELECT] [8]:Receiver Selection of VHF or
DSC-8V
CH70
[SETUP] “System” [SETUP] “Protection”,
System settings
enter to “652111”.
Re-enter the MMSI EEROM clear
(NMI SW ON), enter to
DSC-60
“652111”
Confirmation of present Version [3]:TEST, press [1] key
number five times while pressing
[#FILE] key.
[SELECT] [9] :System [SELECT] [9] “P”, System settings
FM-8500 Set the UTC as “9999”. position data.
[SELECT] [9] “MMSI” EEROM clear
(Re-enter the MMSI) (NMI SW ON) DSC Ver-03 and later.
[SELECT] [9] “private”
[SELECT] [9] :System [SELECT] [9] “P”, System settings
FM-8700 Set the UTC as “9999”. position data.
[SELECT] [9] “MMSI” EEROM clear
(Re-enter the MMSI) (NMI SW ON)
[SELECT] [9] “private”
i
System settings; Jumper connection and
(CH preset, Mode selection, etc) press S17 on PANEL
board.
FM-7000 ATIS setting JP-1: SUB-CPU board.
CH70 setting JP-2: SUB-CPU board.
Setting to connect DSC JP-2: PANEL board
JP-2: SUB-CPU board.
FM-7500 Refer to DSC-5 and FM-7000
Turn the power on while
pressing and holding the
FM-8000 System settings menu.
[CH16] key, enter to
“652111”.
[RCL] key, select the
System settings menu.
system CH 9999, then
press the [RCL] “1562”
and [ENT] key.
CH 1 to 200
Channel presetting To erase CH;
[RCL] [0] [ENT]
FS-1562 System CH 9998 “0”.
[ENT]+[8]:HI power
Power adjustment [ENT]+[9]:LOW power
[ENT]+[7]:TUNE power
Set the RF gain VR
Self test (Transceiver unit) pressing and holding the
maximum.
[TX] key.
Self test (LCD/key/Ver) pressing and holding the
[ENT] key.
[RCL] key, select the
System settings menu.
system CH 9999, then
press the [CH] “75” and
[ENT] key.
Each band; 0,1,2,4,6 ---25
Channel presetting To erase CH;
[Freq.] [0] [ENT]
FS-75/2550 System CH 9998 “0”.
[ENT]+[8]:HI power
Power adjustment [ENT]+[9]:LOW power
[ENT]+[7]:TUNE power
Set the RF gain VR
Self test (Transceiver unit) pressing and holding the
maximum.
[CURSOL] key.
Self test (LCD/key/Ver) pressing and holding the
[ENT] key.
ii
Turn on No.2 of the dip To conform System
SW S2 in the ATU, then settings [RCL] 9999
AT-1560 Self test
press the TUNE SW in the [ENT].
ATU.
[STO] “system setting To conform user CH
System settings menu. item No.” [ENT] “ setting setting [RCL] 9998
No.” [ENT]. [ENT].
To preset;
[STO] “CH No.” [ENT]
[ENT].
Channel presetting
To eras;
[STO] “CH No.” [ENT]
FS- [0] [ENT].
5000/8000 FULL power;
[STO] [FULL] adjust to
power by [FULL] or
[UP] key.
Power adjustment
LOW power
[STO] [LOW] adjust to
power by [FULL] or
[UP] key.
BFO setting [STO] [BFO] To keep ”1700Hz”.
Re-enter AAB;
[F5] 6: AAB Type “ANSWER CODE”
(Type Cap. letter)
Re-enter IDs;
DP-5 [F5] 7, 8, 9, 0: IDs Type “ID CODE”
(Type Cap. letter)
[F6]:Terminal Changing system settings
Type “DP5”
[F8]:System
(Type Cap. letter)
Re-enter AAB;
[F5] 5: AAB Type “ANSWER CODE”
(Type Cap. letter)
Re-enter IDs;
[F5] 6, 7, 8, 9: IDs Type “ID CODE”
(Type Cap. letter)
Changing system settings
Type “DP6”
[F6]: System (Type Cap. letter)
DP-6
Quit to application softwear. [Fn ]+ [F2] + [Alt] Ver 16 or later

Terminal program update. B:\>install
B:\>
Type “nbdpinst”,
Main program up date.
press [F1],
type “nbdp.exe”.
[Fn ]+ [F1], type “DP6”.
Printer and Language settings.
(Type Cap. letter)
iii
FELCOM 10 None
Terminal program update. B:\> IB-581
FELCOM 11
Type “ibinst”.
Quit to application softwear. [Fn ]+ [Alt] + [F2]
Terminal program update. B:\>
Type “ibinst”.
FELCOM 12
CPU-2 program updata. B:\>
Type “upf12”,
Turn on the power.
Confirm to terminal program [Fn ] + [Alt] + [F1]
version.
Re-enter AAB;
[F4] [3] [7]:AAB [Alt]+[Ctrl],
type “ANSWER”
Job No.:
[F4] [6] [6]: commissioning menu FURUNOSERVICE IMN and OID/DID
Pass word: FELCOM80
“S2-#8 ON” on the CPU 2
board.
[F4] [6][7]: manual control menu Job No.:
FURUNOMANUAL
Pass word: 2582
Maintenance code
*91#
“Status monitor & log print”
FELCOM 80
Maintenance code
*96#
“Status monitor
Maintenance code
*90#
“Self test”
Maintenance code
*70xx#
“ADJ to Rx level (Fax by voice No.1 telephone
(xx:50 to 82 default 70)
CH)”
Maintenance code
*79xx#
“ADJ to Tx level (Fax by voice
(xx:22 to 42 default 30)
CH)”
Maintenance code
Return to default settings; *60#
(All setup item from No.1 TEL)
iv
Re-enter AAB;
[F4] [3] [8]:AAB [Alt]+[Ctrl],
type “ANSWER”
Job No.:
[F4] [6] [6]: commissioning menu FURUNOSERVICE OID/DID
Pass word: FELCOM81
“S1-#8 ON” on the CPU 2
board.
[F4] [6][7]: manual control menu Job No.:
FURUNOMANUAL
Pass word: 3504
Maintenance code *91#
“Status monitor & log print”
“Status monitor
FELCOM 81
Maintenance code *90# No.1 telephone
“Self test”
Maintenance code *70xx#
“ADJ to Rx level (Fax by voice (xx:50 to 82 default 70)
CH)”
Maintenance code *99ab#
Each telephone
“Echo cancel”
Maintenance code *79xx#
“ADJ to Tx level (Fax by voice (xx:22 to 42 default 30)
CH)”
No.1 telephone
Return to default settings;
(All setup item from No.1 TEL)
B:\>
Terminal program update.
Type “ibinst”.
PFX-50 All memory clear [1][3][*], power on
FC622SL1 [STO] [#][*][STO]
Setting “Pb”
WG: TEL
FC755D1: DIP SW-#1 “ON”
Setting “Pb”
TEL
v
Content
Content
A. MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone

Section A1. FS-1562-15/25
1. Connection...................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings............................................................................................... 2
2.1 Procedure ........................................................................................ 2
2.2 System channel list (Ver-09) ............................................................ 3
2.4 System settings descriptions ........................................................... 6
2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation ...................... 7
3. Channel Programming .................................................................................... 8
4. Power Data Setting ....................................................................................... 10
5. Self test ......................................................................................................... 12
5.1 Transceiver unit .............................................................................. 12
5.2 Antenna coupler unit...................................................................... 13
Section A2. FS-75/2550

1. Connection...................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings............................................................................................... 2
2.1 Procedure ........................................................................................ 2
2.3 System settings descriptions ........................................................... 5
2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation ...................... 6
3. Channel Programming .................................................................................... 7
4. Power Data Setting ......................................................................................... 9
5. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 11
5.2 Antenna coupler unit ...................................................................... 12
1
Content

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2
2.1System Channel List......................................................................... 2
2.2 Confirmation of settings.................................................................... 6
2.3 System channel description ............................................................. 7
2.4 Default setting for each country...................................................... 12
3. Jumper settings ............................................................................................ 13
3.1For NAV data format selecting, CIF or NMEA ................................. 13
3.2When using C.Loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500 .............. 13
4. User (Preset) Channel Programming............................................................ 15
5. Power Adjustment......................................................................................... 16
6. Self test......................................................................................................... 21
6.2 Antenna Coupler unit ..................................................................... 22
B. DSC Terminal
Section B1. DSC-5
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. Changing System Settings and MMSI number ............................................... 3
2.1 Changing system settings ................................................................ 3
2.2 Settings List...................................................................................... 5
3. Jumper wire settings....................................................................................... 8
4. Self test........................................................................................................... 9
5. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ................................................... 10
6. DSC Frequency table.................................................................................... 12
7. Menu tree ..................................................................................................... 13
8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone .................. 17
9. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone ...................... 18
2
Content
Section B2. DSC-6/6A

1. Connector on Rear Panel ............................................................................... 1
2. Typical Configurations (Type-1)....................................................................... 1
3. System settings .............................................................................................. 3
3.1 Initial settings.................................................................................... 3
3.2 Changing System settings................................................................ 4
4. System settings list ......................................................................................... 5
5. Jumper setting ................................................................................................ 7
6. Changing ID (MMSI) number.......................................................................... 8
7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ..................................................... 9
8. Self test......................................................................................................... 11
9. DSC Frequency table.................................................................................... 12
10. Menu list ..................................................................................................... 13
11. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone ................ 15
Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. Changing system settings............................................................................... 2
4. Jumper wire setting......................................................................................... 4
5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM ...................................................... 5
6. Self test........................................................................................................... 7
7. Menu List: [SELECT] ...................................................................................... 8
8. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone ...................... 10
3
Content
Section B4. DSC-60

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System setup list ............................................................................................ 2
2.1 Setup menu: [#/SETUP] ................................................................... 2
2.2 System menu description ................................................................. 4
3. Setting DIP Switches ...................................................................................... 6
3.1 Outline of the settings on CONTROL/MODEM board ...................... 6
3.2 Setting for the connection with FS-75/1562/5000 and DP-6............. 7
3.3 Setting for the connection with navigational aids .............................. 8
3.4 Setting for the connection with DMC, IC-302 and PC....................... 9
4. Setting the receiver board............................................................................. 10
5. How to enter MMSI ....................................................................................... 11
6. Self test......................................................................................................... 12
7. Setup menu list ............................................................................................. 13
8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone .................. 18
9. How to update system program .................................................................... 19
9.1 Over view....................................................................................... 19
9.2 Updating MAIN program with IB-581 ............................................. 20
9.3 Updating MODEM program with IB-581......................................... 21
C. MF/HF Watch Receiver

Section C1. AA-50
1. Over view........................................................................................................ 1
2. Connection ..................................................................................................... 2
3. Jumper setting ................................................................................................ 2
4. Self test........................................................................................................... 3
4
Content
D. NBDP
Section D1. DP-5
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. Setting list ....................................................................................................... 2
3. Initial settings.................................................................................................. 5
3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry ................................................ 5
3.2 Terminal settings (F6)....................................................................... 6
3.3 System settings (F8) ....................................................................... 9
3.4 Manual Reception (F3-6) .............................................................. 12
3.5 NAV data format selection (CIF/NMEA) ........................................ 12
4. Changing AAB, ID code, Terminal and System settings ............................... 13
4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code....................................... 13
4.2 Changing F6 and F8 settings ......................................................... 14
5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM .................................................... 15
5.1 S-RAM clear .................................................................................. 15
5.2 EEROM clear ................................................................................. 16
Section D2. DP-6

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. Settings list ..................................................................................................... 2
3. Initial settings.................................................................................................. 3
3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry ................................................ 3
3.2 System settings (F6) ....................................................................... 4
3.3 Manual Reception (F3-6) ................................................................ 6
3.4 Printer and Language setting ........................................................... 6
4. Changing AAB, ID code and System settings................................................. 7
4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code......................................... 7
4.2 Changing F6: System settings.......................................................... 8
5. Self Test .......................................................................................................... 9
6. How to Update Programs.............................................................................. 10
6.1Terminal Program ........................................................................... 10
6.2Main: Main Unit Program ................................................................ 12
5
Content
E. VHF Radiotelephone
Section E1. FM-7000
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System Settings.............................................................................................. 2
2.1 System setting Jumper Connections ................................................ 2
2.2 Disabling/enabling ATIS
(Jumper Connection on SUB-CPU Board) ....................................... 9
2.3 Disabling/enabling USA CH2/3/4.................................................... 10
2.4 Setting to connect DSC terminal (FM-7000) ................................. 11
3. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 12
3.1Tx Power Adjustment ...................................................................... 12
3.2 Frequency Adjustment ................................................................... 12
4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 13
5. Private Channel List...................................................................................... 17
Section E2. FM-7500

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. Settings........................................................................................................... 1
Section E3. FM-8000

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System Settings.............................................................................................. 1
2.1 Changing System setting ................................................................. 1
2.2 Channel Preset (CH0 to CH255 available) ....................................... 5
3. Adjustment...................................................................................................... 8
3.1Tx Power Adjustment ........................................................................ 8
3.2 Frequency Adjustment ..................................................................... 8
4. Self test........................................................................................................... 9
5. Private Channel List...................................................................................... 13
6
Content
Section E4. FM-8500

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2
2.1 Initial Settings................................................................................... 2
2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) .............................. 5
4. Jumper Setting................................................................................................ 8
5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode .......................................................... 9
6. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 11
6.1 TX Power Adjustment ..................................................................... 11
6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment .............................................................. 12
8. Self test......................................................................................................... 15
9. Private Channel list....................................................................................... 18
10. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone .................... 21
Section E5. FM-8700

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2
2.1 Initial Settings................................................................................... 2
2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) .............................. 5
4. Jumper settings .............................................................................................. 8
5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode .......................................................... 9
6. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 11
6.1 TX Power Adjustment ..................................................................... 11
6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment .............................................................. 13
8. Self test......................................................................................................... 16
9. Private Channel list....................................................................................... 19
10. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone .................... 22
7
Content
F. Distress Message Controller

Section F1. DMC-5
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1
3. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ..................................................... 3
4. Self test........................................................................................................... 5
G. INMARSAT C
Section G1. FELCOM 10
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1
2.1 System setup: [F5]............................................................................ 1
2.2 Terminal setup: [F6] .......................................................................... 2
2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]........................................................ 2
3. Jumper wire setting......................................................................................... 3
3.1 EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting ....................................... 3
3.2 For Data Format (NMEA/CIF) ......................................................... 4
4. System status monitor .................................................................................... 5
5. S-RAM Clear .................................................................................................. 7
6. Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 8
7. FURUNO Information (FQ5-93-025:New Version CPU Board) ..................... 9
8
Content

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1
2.1 System setup: [F5]............................................................................ 1
2.2 Terminal: [F6].................................................................................... 2
2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]........................................................ 2
3. Dip switch setting............................................................................................ 3
5. FURUNO Information...................................................................................... 6
FQ5-96-003: On Shortening the Antenna Cable .................................... 6
FQ5-95-012: Shortening the Antenna Cable/Modification of
Power Amplifier ...................................................................................... 7
6. MES ID ........................................................................................................... 8
7. S-RAM Clear (IC-511) .................................................................................... 8
8. Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 9
9. How to up date the Terminal (IB-581) program ............................................. 10

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1
2.1 System: [F8] ..................................................................................... 1
2.2 Updating a Distress Alert: [F8].......................................................... 2
3. Dip switch setting............................................................................................ 3
5. MES ID ........................................................................................................... 6
6. Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 7
7. How to update the Terminal and CPU-2 program ........................................... 8
7.1Terminal ............................................................................................ 8
7.2 CPU-2 .............................................................................................. 9
9
Content
H. INMARSAT B
Section H1. FELCOM 80
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
3. Setting procedure ........................................................................................... 5
3.1 DIP switch setting (Antenna unit: IB-180) ......................................... 5
3.2 Tx IF output level setting (Communication unit: IB-280) ................... 6
3.3 Gyro Converter setting (Communication unit: IB-280) .................... 7
3.4 Setting of Telephone ....................................................................... 16
3.5 Printer: PP-510 Setting (Ver 1650098100) ................................... 16
3.6 FAX settings: PFX-50 ..................................................................... 17
3.7 Terminal settings ............................................................................ 22
4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 25
5. How to update Terminal Program.................................................................. 29

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
3. Setting procedure ........................................................................................... 4
3.1 Adjustment of limit switch (Antenna unit: IB-181) ............................. 4
3.2 Tx RF output Level setting (Communication unit: IB-281)................. 4
3.3 Setting of Telephone ......................................................................... 5
3.4 FAX settings: PFX-50 ....................................................................... 6
3.5 Terminal settings ............................................................................ 11
4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 16
4.1 IB-581............................................................................................. 16
4.2 Description of Status Monitor Display............................................. 17
5. How to update the Terminal program ............................................................ 20
Reference) How to use HSD Checker .............................................................. 21
10
Content

1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2
2.1 Heading alignment ........................................................................... 2
2.2 Telephone setting ............................................................................. 3
2.3 Fax setting (PFX-50) ........................................................................ 4
2.4 Gyro setting ..................................................................................... 6
2.5 Setup NAV data input circuit .......................................................... 10
2.6 Entering answer back code (only for class-1)................................. 11
2.7 OID/DID setting.............................................................................. 12
2.8 HSD set up .................................................................................... 19
2.9 About password ............................................................................. 20
2.10 Returning settings to factory defaults........................................... 22
3. Self-test ........................................................................................................ 23
3.1 Using handset ................................................................................ 23
3.2 Using terminal unit ......................................................................... 24
3.3 Reading program number............................................................... 25
3.4 Distress alert test (FUNC683) ........................................................ 26
3.5 Status monitor ................................................................................ 28
3.6 Using two-digit code service (Loopback test) ................................. 36
3.7 9.6k Data test ................................................................................. 37
3.8 HSD test......................................................................................... 38
3.9 LED status...................................................................................... 40
3.10 How to check angular rate sensor................................................ 45
3.11 How to check rotary joint ............................................................. 45
3.12 Error Messages at the Terminal Unit............................................ 46
4. Program Update ........................................................................................... 51
4.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 52
4.2 Upgrading SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE,
and TERM programs ...................................................................... 53
4.3 Upgrading handset program .......................................................... 55
4.4 Upgrading terminal program .......................................................... 57
5. Menu tree ..................................................................................................... 58
5.1 Menu on handset ........................................................................... 58
5.2 Menu on terminal unit (Class1) ...................................................... 61
11
Content
I. REMOTE STATION
1. Over view........................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Remote port specifications............................................................... 3
2. RB-700
2.1 Priority settings................................................................................. 8
2.2 Jumper settings ................................................................................ 9
2.3 Confirmation of jumper settings...................................................... 10
2.4 Speaker and handset volume ......................................................... 10
3. RB-500
3.1 Jumper settings .............................................................................. 11
3.2 Confirmation of jumper settings...................................................... 12
3.3 Speaker and handset volume ......................................................... 12
3.4 Connection ..................................................................................... 13
4. DB-500
4.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 15
4.2 FS-5000/8000................................................................................. 16
4.3 RB-500/700 Connection ................................................................. 18
4.4 FS-1562 and DSC/DP Connection ................................................. 20
4.5 Interconnection diagrams ............................................................... 21
5. Jumper settings on MAIN Board ................................................................... 24
J. NAVTEX RECEIVER
Section J1. NX-500
1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1
2. Slide switch settings ....................................................................................... 2
3. System settings .............................................................................................. 3
4. FURUNO Information (FQ5-93-006)............................................................... 4
5. Self test........................................................................................................... 6
6. Station List...................................................................................................... 8
12
Content
K. TERMINAL UNIT
Section K1. IB-581
1. How to Quit Programs .................................................................................... 1
2. Changing the Terminal Software ..................................................................... 2
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 2
2.2 A method to change the terminal program by formatting A-drive ........ 2
3. Installing PC-DOS .......................................................................................... 4
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 4
3.2 Outline of the Procedure ..................................................................... 4
3.3 Until PC-DOS Starts ........................................................................... 5
3.4 Backup the System Files (PC-DOS: Ver.6.3)....................................... 7
3.5 Changing BIOS (Basic Input Output System) settings ........................ 8
3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector ....................................... 10
3.7 Installing System Files ...................................................................... 11
4. How to erase password ................................................................................ 13
5. AR-B1378-F2 (New type CPU card) ............................................................. 14
5.1 How to install PC-DOS...................................................................... 15
5.2 Changing BIOS settings.................................................................... 16
Section K2. IB-582

1. DOS installation.............................................................................................. 1
1.1 How to copy DOS program ................................................................. 1
1.2 Dos installation.................................................................................... 2
2. Erasing password ........................................................................................... 4
3. BIOS default ................................................................................................... 5
4. Layout and hardware settings......................................................................... 8
13
Content
Appendix
AP1. Cable specifications
1.1 Cable Specifications ..................................................................................... 1
1.2 How to calculate voltage drop in power cable............................................... 6
1.3 Coaxial Cable Specifications ........................................................................ 9
1.4 How to attach the antenna cable connector ............................................... 11
1.5 Installation of Pre-amp unit and coaxial cable ............................................ 13
AP2. Power consumption

2.1 Power consumption list................................................................................. 1
2.2 Reserve Source of Energy (By class NK)..................................................... 3
2.3 Sample of Battery calculation table .............................................................. 4
2.4 Specifications of Rectifier and Battery charger............................................. 5
AP3. NMEA
3.1 List of NMEA sentences ............................................................................... 1
3.2 Sentences formatters ................................................................................... 3
AP4. Program ROM

4.1 Communication Equipment ROM List........................................................... 1
4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed..................... 9
4.3 FURUNO Information ................................................................................. 11
Schematic diagram
05P0407D ..................................................................................................... a
05P0407E ..................................................................................................... b
05P0407F ......................................................................................................c
05P0407G..................................................................................................... d
05P0407........................................................................................................ e
14
Section A1. FS-1562-15/25
1. Connection
AT-1560-15
AT-1560-25
A1-1
FS-1562
2. System settings
2.1 Procedure
1. While pressing and holding down the [RCL] key, turn the power on. You get the
following display.
System Channel
9951
Setting No.
3
MEMO
2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder.
3. Press the [RCL] [1] [5] [6] [2] and [ENT] keys in this order.
(1562 is the password.)
4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.
5. Press the [RCL] key, enter a setting number, and press the [ENT] key.
6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 .To restore normal operation, turn the power off, and on again.
A1-2
FS-1562
2.2 System channel list (Ver-09)
Ver-09
Setting Default
System
Function Hol-
Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Std Italy Other
land
*9900 Country of Delivery Std Italy Holland Other 0 1 2 3
*9901 User Channel Clear Press [RCL] [1] [ENT] key to clear
TX Frequency Marine
*9902 Free Marine ROM 1 2 3 0
Selection Free
RX Frequency Marine
*9903 Free Marine ROM 0 0 0 0
Selection Free
*9904 TLX Usage TX/RX RX Disable 0 0 0 0
Wide Narrow
*9905 TLX RX Bandwidth 1 1 1 1
(2.4kHz) (0.4kHz)
*9906 TX Delay Time 5 to 50m sec 10m sec
Power Reduction on
*9907 Enable Disable 0 0 1 0
2182kHz
2182kHz Ver 09
*9908 AM Usage TX/RX RX Disable RX+2182 1 1 1 1
only
*9909 LSB Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2 2 2 2
*9910 FAX Usage RX Disable 1 1 1 1
Emission Mode on H3E
*9911 H3E USB J3E FIX 3 3 3 3 Ver 09
2182kHz FIX
*9912 Alarm TX Time 45 sec No limit Disable 0 0 0 0 Ver 09
Test Alarm
*9913 Disable Enable 1 1 1 1
Transmission
*9914 Test Alarm Frequency 1605.0 – 29999.9kHz 2191kHz
*9915 TX TUNE Enable Disable Auto 0 0 0 0
Remote Control
*9916 MIF TBUS 0 0 0 0
Format
EM Mode with TX Auto
*9917 Key ON from external (No SSB H3E TLX 0 0 0 0
equipment change)
9918 Key Response Beep OFF ON 1 1 1 1
9919 Noise Blanker OFF ON 1 1 1 1
9920 AGC OFF ON MODE 2 2 2 2
Clarifier Change
*9921 ±150Hz ±100Hz 0 0 0 0
Width
*9922 IA/RF Meter IA RF 0 0 0 0
*9923 ITU Channel Std USA Std+MF 2 2 2 2
Channel/Frequency
*9924 Channel Frequency 1 1 1 1
Display
Ver-09:Changed from Ver-09
A1-3
FS-1562
Setting Default
System
Function Hol-
Channel 0 1 2 3 4 Std Italy Other
land
Default setting of Press [RCL] [1] [ENT] key to restore to default
*9925
Power Data setting
*9926 Tuning Circuit for RX Enable Disable 1 1 1 1
Priority setting on RB-500 Ver 07
Ver07 *9928 FS-1562 0 0 0 0
2182kHz (Remote)
Scan Stop Signal SQ
9951 S : 1 to 10 S=3 S=3 S=3 S=3
Level Level
While
9952 Scan Stop Time 1 – 99 sec 2sec 2sec 2sec 2sec
receiving
9953 Sweep Width 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 100k 100k 100k 100k
Sweep Step
9954 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 1.00k 1.00k 1.00k 1.00k
Frequency
Voice + Voice or
9955 Squelch Operation Voice S-Level 3 3 3 3
S-Level S-Level
9956 Squelch Level S : 0 to 10 S=5 S=5 S=5 S=5
1000 1000 1000 1000
9957 Squelch Delay Time 500 to 4000m sec
ms m ms ms
Squelch Activating 1000 1000 1000 1000
9958 500 to 2000Hz
Frequency Hz Hz Hz Hz
Squelch Activation
frequency when No 1300Hz
9959 1 1 1 1
2-tone alarm change (Open)
2182kHz is received
150W 250W
Selection of output 250W
*9997 AT-1560 AT-1560 0 0 0 0
power AT-5000
-15 -25
User CH Memory &
*9998 Enable Disable 1 1 1 1
Power ADJ
*9999 Password Enter Password:1562 to access (*) mark channel
Ver-07:Changed from Ver-07

Confirm the following system settings for GMDSS.
9904 (TLX Usage) 0:TX/RX default
9905 (TLX RX band width) 1:Narrow default
9906 (TX Delay Time) 10 m sec default
9908 (AM Usage) 1:RX default
9911 (EM on 2182kHz) 3:J3E FIX default
9915 (TX Tune) 0:Enable default
9916 (Remote control format) 0:MIF default
9917 (EM with TX key ON) 0:Auto (No change) default
9997 (Selection of out put power) 0:FS-1562-15 2:FS-1562-25
9928 (Priority setting) 1:Remote (When DSC-60 is connected.)
A1-4
FS-1562
Add.
Add.
Add.
: Different “setting” between Ver-3 and Ver-9.
A1-5
FS-1562
2.4 System settings descriptions
A1-6
FS-1562
2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation
1. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, turn on the power. All LCD segment
appear.
2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key.
3. Press keys one by one. When the key is pressed, the corresponding number or letter
appears at the upper right of LCD. See table below.
All LCD segments reappear several seconds after the 2 key is pressed.
A1-7
FS-1562
3. Channel Programming
System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”.
The FS-1562 can store up to 200 user channels, number 1 to 200.
Procedure
1. While pressing and holding down the [RCL] key, turn the power on.
2. Select the system channel 9999 by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.
3. Press the [RCL] [1] [5] [6] [2] and [ENT] keys in this order. (Password)
4. Select the system channel 9998.
5. Press the [RCL] [0] and [ENT] keys to enable channel programming.
6. Select an RX channel to be programmed, by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.
Operating the FREQ/CH encoder changes the display as below.
7. Select emission mode with the [MODE] key.

8. To enter an RX frequency, press the [RCL] key and enter a frequency with the
number keys, then press the [ENT] key.
9. Select a TX channel of the same channel as RX with the FREQ/CH encoder.
10. Enter a TX frequency as follows.
Simplex
Press the [ENT] key. The same frequency entered at step 8 is stored.
Duplex
Press the [RCL] key, enter a frequency with the numeral keys, then press the
[ENT] key.
A1-8
FS-1562
11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10.

12. Set the system channel 9998 to “1” (user channel memory: disable).
13. Turn the power off to store channel programmed.
To erase a user channel

1. Select an RX channel to erase with the FREQ/CH encoder.
2. Press the [RCL] [0] [ENT] keys in this order.
3. Rotate the FREQ/CH encoder clockwise by one turn to select a TX channel of the
same channel as RX.
4. Press the [RCL] [0] [ENT] keys in this order.
To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.
A1-9
FS-1562
4. Power Date Setting

1. Turn the power on.
2. Select a channel (Frequency). Referring to next page; Power data setting table.
3. Press the TX TUNE key. “TUNE” appears and the coupler starts tuning. When the
tuning is completed successfully, “TUNE OK” appears.
4. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, press the [8] ,[9] or [7] key
for HI, LOW, and TUNE respectively.
[ENT] + [8] HI Power
[ENT] + [9] LOW Power
[ENT] + [7] TUNE Power

Normally this adjustment factory adjusted is
not necessary. The tune power set on a
channel can be used on all channel.
Power data appears

FS-1562-15 FS-1562-25
Power data
Default Range of adjustment Default Range of adjustment
High power 220 (LOW data+1) to 255 120 (LOW data+1) to 150
Low power 40 HI data – 1 35 HI data – 1
Tune power 20 0 to 60 0 0 to 10
5. Set the power data by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. (Observe the readout on power
meter, If connected, while pressing the PTT switch and whistling or speaking into the
handset.)
6. Press the [ENT] key to register power data. Power data disappears from the LCD.
7. To set another channel, repeat steps 2 top 6.
A1-10
FS-1562
Power data setting table
Note)
Power data for user channel is commonly used for all class of emission.
The table below shows output power calculated from power data when 50 ohms dummy
load is connected to the transceiver unit. Reference only.
Condition; 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset).

Power data 255 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 10 0
Output 150W 180 178 153 132 112 92 76 61 48 34 23 18 15 8 8

Power 250W
150:
320 260 200 160 115 80 50 35 25
345
A1-11
FS-1562
5. Self test
5.1 Transceiver unit
Condition:
TLX mode
13.5MHz
AGC ON
Condition:
TLX mode
Tone 1700Hz
3 MHz
PA OFF
Condition:
TLX mode
Tone 1700Hz
3 MHz 20W/Full power
When the CPU is detected unlock signal from SYN circuit, frequency indication
blinking.
A1-12
FS-1562
5.2 Antenna coupler unit
The CPU and the relays which select capacitors and coil for tuning can be checked.
Procedure
1. Open the antenna coupler cover.
2. Open the shield cover inside the coupler.
3. Turn on No.2 of the DIP switch S2.
4. Press the TUNE switch in the antenna coupler.
5. The 24 LEDs (CR1 to CR24) light one by one 1 second each.
6. Turn off No.2 of the DIP switch S2.
7. Close the covers.
If CPU error is detected, CR1 light for ROM error, CR2 for RAM error, CR3 for A/D
converter error. (ROM/RAM/AD converter incorporated in the CPU.)
A1-13
1. Connection
FS-75 (150W)
AT-1560-15
AT-1560-25
FS-2550 (250W)
AT-1560-25
A2-1
FS-75/2550
2. System settings
2.1 Procedure
1. While pressing and holding down the [CH] key, turn the power on. You get
the following display.
System Channel
9951
Setting No.
3
MEMO
2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder.
入力)
入力 keys in this order.
3. Press the [CH] [7] [5] and [ENT](入力
(75 is the password.)
4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.
5. Press the [CH] key, enter a setting number to be set, and press the [ENT] key.
6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 .To restore normal operation, turn the power off, and on again.
A2-2
FS-75/2550
Ver-09
System Setting Default
Function
Channel 0 1 2 3 4 SSB GMDSS
*9900 Country of Delivery SSB GMDSS 0 1
*9901 User Channel Clear Press [CH] [1] [ENT] key to clear
Note-1 TX Frequency Marine
*9902 Free Marine ROM 3 3
Selection Free
Note-1 RX Frequency Marine
*9903 Free Marine ROM 0 0
Selection Free
*9904 TLX Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2 0
Wide Narrow
*9905 TLX RX Bandwidth 1 1
(2.4kHz) (0.4kHz)
Note-2
*9906 TX Delay Time 5 to 50m sec 10m sec
Power Reduction on
*9907 Enable Disable 0 0
2182kHz
Note-3 2182kHz Ver 09
*9908 AM Usage TX/RX RX Disable RX+2182kHz 1 1
only
*9909 LSB Usage TX/RX RX Disable 2 2
*9910 FAX Usage RX Disable 1 1
Emission Mode on
*9911 USB J3E FIX 3 3 Ver 09
2182kHz
*9912 Alarm TX Time 45 sec Disable 0 0 Ver 09
Note-5
*9915 TX TUNE Enable Disable Auto 0 0
EM Mode with TX Auto
Note-7 Key ON from
*9917 (No SSB H3E TLX 0 0
external equipment change)
9918 Key Response Beep OFF ON 1 1
9919 Noise Blanker OFF ON 1 1
9920 AGC OFF ON MODE 1 1
*9922 IA/RF Meter IA RF 0 0
*9923 ITU Channel Std USA Std+MF 0 0
Default setting of Note-11
*9925 Press [CH] [1] [ENT] key to restore to default setting
Power Data
Note-8
*9926 Tuning Circuit for RX Enable Disable 1 1
Recall of 27MHz CH
*9927 Disable Enable 0 0
frequencies
Priority setting on FS-75/2 RB-500
*9928 0 0 Ver 07
2182kHz 550 (Remote)
Ver 07: Changed from Ver 07

Ver 09: Changed from Ver09
A2-3
FS-75/2550
System Setting Default

Function
Channel 0 1 2 3 4 SSB GMDSS
Scan Stop Signal SQ
9951 S : 1 to 10 S=3 S=3
Level Level
While
9952 Scan Stop Time 1 – 99 sec 0 0
receiving
9953 Sweep Width 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 100k 100k
Sweep Step
9954 0.01 to 29999.99kHz 1.00k 1.00k
Frequency
Voice + Voice or
9955 Squelch Operation Voice S-Level 3 3
S-Level S-Level
9956 Squelch Level S : 0 to 10 S=5 S=5
Note-9
9957 Squelch Delay Time 500 to 4000m sec 1000ms 1000m
Squelch Activating
9958 500 to 2000Hz 1000Hz 1000Hz
Frequency
Squelch Activation
frequency when No 1300Hz
9959 0 0
2-tone alarm change (Open)
2182kHz is received
Check meter on
9960 Individual All 1 1
display
150W 250W
Note-10 Selection of output 250W
*9997 AT-1560 AT-1560 0 0
power AT-5000
-15 -25
User CH Memory &
*9998 Enable Disable 1 1
Power ADJ
*9999 Password Enter Password:75 to access (*) mark channel
Conform the following system setting for GMDSS.

9904 (TLX Usage) 0:TX/RX GMDSS default
9905 (TLX RX band width) 1:Narrow SSB/GMDSS default
9906 (TX Delay Time) 10 m sec SSB/GMDSS default
9908 (AM Usage) 1:RX SSB/GMDSS default
9911 (EM on 2182kHz) 3:J3E FIX SSB/GMDSS default
9915 (TX Tune) 0:Enable SSB/GMDSS default
9917 (EM with TX key ON) 0:Auto(No change) SSB/GMDSS default
9997 (Selection of output power)
0:FS-75 2:FS-2550 (AT-1560-25 installed)
9928 (Priority setting) 1 (When DSC-60 is connected.)
A2-4
FS-75/2550
2.3 System settings descriptions
Not use
Not use
A2-5
FS-75/2550
2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation
1. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, turn on the power. All LCD segment
appear.
2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key.
3. Press keys one by one. When the key is pressed, the corresponding number or letter
appears at the upper right of the LCD. See table below.
Ex.) The 2 key is pressed.
Key indication
111 - - - - - 1
0158100
ROM Version No.
All LCD segments reappear several seconds after the 2 key is pressed.
Cursor
Key 1 2 3
Indication 0 1 2 3
Key 4 5 6 Freq.
Indication 4 5 6 7
Key 7 8 9 CH
Indication 8 9 A b
ALARM ENT
Key 2182 0
Indication C d E F
A2-6
FS-75/2550
3. Channel Programming
The FS-75/2550 can store up to 200 user channels, See the table below.
Band(MHz) Channel
0 1-10
1 1-10
2 1-10
3 1-10
4 1-20
6 1-20
8 1-20
12 1-20
16 1-20
18 1-20
22 1-20
25 1-20
Procedure
1. While pressing and holding down the [CH] key, turn the power on.
2. Select the system channel 9999 by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.
3. Press the [CH] [7] [5] and [ENT] keys in this order. (Password)
4. Select the system channel 9998.
5. Press the [CH] [0] and [ENT] keys to enable channel programming.
6. Select an RX channel to be programmed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.
Operating the FREQ/CH encoder changes the display as below.
Band
Channel
0 - 01
Frequency
R 0.00
MEMO
J3E
9999 0-01 R 0-01 T ------ 25-20 R
9998 ------ 9900 25-20 T
7. Select the emission mode with the [MODE] key.

8. To enter an RX frequency, press the [Freq] key and enter a frequency with the
number keys, then press the [ENT] key.
9. Select a TX channel of the same channel as RX with the FREQ/CH encoder.
A2-7
FS-75/2550
10. Enter a TX frequency as follows.

Simplex
Press the [ENT] key. The same frequency entered at step 8 is stored.
Duplex
Press the [Freq] key, enter a frequency with the numeral keys, then press
the [ENT] key.
11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10.

12. Set the system channel 9998 to “1” (user channel memory: disable).
13. Turn the power off to store channels programmed.
To erase a user channel

1. Select an RX channel to be erased with the FREQ/CH encoder.
2. Press the [Freq] [0] [ENT] keys in this order.
3. Rotate the FREQ/CH encoder clockwise by one turn to select a TX channel of the
same channel as RX.
4. Press the [Freq] [0] [ENT] keys in this order.
To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.
A2-8
FS-75/2550
4. Power Date Setting

2. Select a channel (Frequency). Referring to next page; Power data setting table.
3. Press the TX TUNE key. “TUNE” appears and the coupler starts tuning. When the
tuning is completed successfully, “TUNE OK” appears.
4. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, press the [8] , [9] or [7] key
for HI, LOW, and TUNE respectively.
[ENT] + [8] HI Power
[ENT] + [9] LOW Power
[ENT] + [7] TUNE Power

Normally this adjustment factory adjusted is
not necessary. The tune power set on a
channel can be used on all channel.
FS-75 FS-2550
Power data
Default Range of adjustment Default Range of adjustment
High power 220 (LOW data+1) to 255 120 (LOW data+1) to 150
Low power 40 HI data – 1 35 HI data – 1
Tune power 20 0 to 60 0 0 to 10
5. Set the power data by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. (Observe the readout on power
meter, if connected, while pressing the PTT switch and whistling or speaking into the
handset. Or press [0]:tone key, then while pressing the PTT switch.)
6. Press the [ENT] key to register power data. Power data disappears from the LCD.
7. To set another channel, repeat steps 2 to 6.
A2-9
FS-75/2550
Power data setting table
Note)
Power data for user channel is commonly used for all classes of emission.
The table below shows output power calculated from power data when 50 ohms dummy
load is connected to the transceiver unit. Reference only.
Condition) 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset)

Power data 255 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 10 0
Output 150W 180 178 153 132 112 92 76 61 48 34 23 18 15 8 8

Power 150:
250W 345 320 260 200 160 115 80 50 35 25
A2-10
FS-75/2550
5. Self Test
This test checks the transceiver for proper operation. It should be conducted regularly to
ensure proper operation. Before starting the test, set the RF GAIN control knob to
maximum (fully clockwise).
Procedure
1. While pressing and holding down the [CURSOR] key, turn on the power. All LCD
segments appear.
2. Release the hand from the [CURSOR] key. The FS-75/2550 starts self-test and the
display shows the following indications in order.
Condition:
TLX mode
13.5MHz
AGC ON
Condition:
TLX mode
Tone 1700Hz
3 MHz
PA OFF
Condition:
TLX mode
Tone 1700Hz
3 MHz 20W/Full power
When the CPU is detected unlock signal from SYN circuit, frequency indication
blinking.
A2-11
FS-75/2550
5.2 Antenna coupler unit
The CPU and the relays which select capacitors and coil for tuning can be checked.
Procedure
1. Open the antenna coupler cover.
2. Open the shield cover inside the coupler.
3. Turn on No.2 of the DIP switch S2.
4. Press the TUNE switch in the antenna coupler.
5. The 24 LEDs (CR1 to CR24) light one by one for 1 second each.
6. Turn off No.2 of the DIP switch S2.
7. Close the covers.
If CPU error is detected, CR1 lights for ROM error, CR2 for RAM error, CR3 for A/D
converter error. (ROM/RAM/AD converter incorporated in the CPU.)
A2-12
1. Connection
The below installation is the connected for FS-5000.
Note) FS-8000
Transceiver unit : FS-8000T
Control unit : FS-5000C
AC/DC Power supply : PR-850A x 2sets
A3-1
FS-5000/8000
2. System settings
Change the specifications with the following key sequence.
1. Press [STO] key.

2. Enter item number (system setting No.), and press [ENT] key.
3. Setting number desired, and press [ENT] key.
Ex)
[STO] [9] [9] [0] [1] [ENT] [0] [ENT]
Reference;
A power supply is only connected with the controller unit (FS-5000C), while pressing and
holding the [ENT] key, turn on the power. Controller working individually. and system
settings of FS-5000 can be done.
2.1 System Channel List

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item.
Ver-21
Channel System setting No.
Function
No.
0 1 2 3 4
9900 Model FS-5000 FS-2500 FS-1600 FS-8000
9901 TX freq. Selection Free Limited ROM Marine
9902 N.C.
Output power of transceiver unit
9903 400W 150W 50W
on MF band
9904 Class of emission on 2182kHz AM SSB SSB FIX
TX tune Auto (Tuning
9905 Enable Disable is done when
setting TX freq.)
9906 Scan of TX channel Enable Disable
9907 Time display format Japan USA Europe
9908 Second unit display Enable Disable
9909 Display of class of emission NOR(SSB) ITU(J3E)
Numerical display of check meter
9910 Disable Enable
data
9911 Test alarm RX TX
9912 Test alarm freq. 2191kHz (Selectable)
9913 TX delay time 30ms (Selectable:5-99ms) Note) FS-8000:10ms
9914 Alarm sending time 45sec (Selectable:1-9999s)
9915 Check meter items Full Short
Keyboard lock
9916 OFF Lock Intercom
(controlled by [*]key)
A3-2
FS-5000/8000
Channel Setting No.

Function
No.
0 1 2 3 4
9917 50 ohm BK. relay ON/OFF ON (Fixed)
9918 Time adj. (Clock) Auto Manual
9919 Control unit priority NO 1 (Local) 2 (Remote)
9920 Beep sound ON/OFF OFF ON (Fixed)
9921 Beep sound level 6 (Selectable:0-10)
9922 Beep sound freq. 2000Hz (Selectable:100-3000Hz)
Shortening
9923 Dummy Enable Disable
capacitor
9924 Freq. rang in which shortening Lower limit 2500kHz
capacitor tunes on.
9925 (9923 should be set at "2") Upper limit 3999.9kHz
9926 Test tone Enable Disable
Power reduction on
9927 Enable Disable
2182/2187.5kHz
Less then 60W or
9928 Minimum output power
60W more
MIF MIF 2
9930 Data to "REM1" terminal TBUS CIF NMEA
(4800bps) (1200bps)
MIF MIF 2
(4800bps) (1200bps)
MIF MIF 2
(4800bps) (1200bps)
MIF MIF 2
9933 Data to "CIF" terminal TBUS CIF NMEA
(4800bps) (1200bps)
Class of emission of TX/RX, when
9934 unit connected to "REM1" is once No change SSB AM TLX
keyed.
keyed.
keyed.
Class of emission of TX only while
9937 unit connected to "REM1" is No change SSB AM TLX
keyed.
keyed.
keyed.
A3-3
FS-5000/8000
Channel Setting No.

Function
No.
0 1 2 3 4
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : SSB
9940 6kHz 3kHz 0.3kHz
(Changeable thru keyboard)
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : CW
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : TLX
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : AM
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : R3E
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : FAX
Receiver bandwidth in kHz : LSB
9947 Squelch on telex mode No change OFF
9948 Noise blanker on telex mode No change OFF
9949 AGC on telex mode No change FAST
9950 Duplex mode on telex mode No change Disable
Receiving antenna on telex mode
Main
9951 (Only when optional R.ANT SEL Dup (Used)
(Not used)
board is installed.)
Tx antenna status at reception OFF ON
9952
(No change) (To GND)
Operation on AM mode 2182kHz
9953 T/RX RX only Disable
only
9954 Operation on R3E mode T/RX RX only Disable
9955 Operation on FAX mode T/RX RX only Disable
9956 Operation on LSB mode T/RX RX only Disable
Cypher communication (Vs Enable
9957 control signal ON/OFF on TB2-10 Disable Enable
in FS-5000C unit)
9960 Recall of 27MHz SSB/DSB freq. Disable Enable
9961 ITU freq. Table selection Standard USA Europe
MF band : 405-526.5kHz
9962 transmission (When optional MF Disable Enable
tuner : AT-410 is installed.)
A3-4
FS-5000/8000
Channel Setting
Function
No. 0 1 2 3 4
9963 User channel programming Enable Disable
FS-8000 only check meter
9964 indication for both upper & lower No Yes
transceiver unit
9965 Scan response time (DSC/NBDP) Standard Fast
The transmission of AM tow-tone
9966 Free Limited Disable
alarm is restricted or not.
Select default setting for each Enter international telephone country code
9980 country 0:standerd 1:USA 31Holland 44:Europe 47:Norway
81:Japan
Dummy load installation NO Yes
9981 (Both functions of 9911 and 9923 9911:RX, 9911:TX,
are determined.) 9923:Disable 9923:Enable
ANT BK. relay or RX ANT NO Yes
9982 installation (Both functions of 9913 9913:30ms, 9913:10ms,
and 9917 are determined.) 9917:ON/OFF 9917:ON
Power default setting
9989 (When old type Ant. coupler is Europe Norway
installed.)
9997 All user CH clear Clear
System Lock (Important system
9998 [OFF/ON]: Enter "present time" to change setting.
setting are not changeable.)
9999 System initialization (Default) Disable Enable
Important)
When the ROM change, should be changing both the ROMs of same version
number in Control unit and Transceiver unit.
A3-5
FS-5000/8000
2.2 Confirmation of settings

To confirm settings, press [RCL] [9] [9] [9] [9] and [ENT] in this order.
Then press [ENT] key successively.
System setting for GMDSS

FS-5000)
System channel:9982 (A.BK relay or R.ANT) ---- [1]: YES
Note) 9913:System Delay 10 ms
9917:50 ohm BK Relay 1:ON (Permanently)
*The 50 ohm BK is installed the TX FIL board.
Tx/Rx ANT Tx ANT Rx ANT
AT-5000 AT-5000
ANT BK Relay or
Tx Rx Tx Rx
FS-5000T FS-5000T
FS-8000)
9913:System Delay 10 ms
9917:50 ohm BK Relay ON or OFF (depend on installation)
*The 50 ohm BK is installed the COMBINER board.
Tx/Rx ANT Tx ANT Rx ANT
AT-5000 AT-5000
or
Tx/Rx Tx Rx
FS-8000T FS-8000T
9917: 0 (ON/OFF) 9917: 1 (ON)
“BFO” setting frequency

The DSC and NBDP are connected, the BFO frequency should be set to 1700 Hz.
1700 Hz; [BFO] 1700 [ENT]
A3-6
FS-5000/8000
2.3 System channel description

The following describes about some system channels.
9900
Output power of ITU/DSC channels and direct key-in frequencies are preset as
shown below.
Model vs Max. Output Power (*): for Japanese vessels only.
FS-5000 FS-2500* FS-1600* FS-8000
Output Power 400W 250W 150W 800W
9901
Free Any frequencies (1.6065 to 29.9999 MHz) can be transmitted by direct
key-in.
Limited The frequencies in the ITU/DSC and user channels can be transmitted.
ROM Only the frequencies stored in the user channel can be transmitted.
Marine Any frequency in the following bands may be transmitted.
1606.5 - 4438 kHz, 5680 kHz 18780 - 18900 kHz,
6200 - 6525 kHz, 19680 - 19800 kHz,
8100 - 8815 kHz, 22000 - 22855 kHz,
12230 - 13200 kHz, 25070 - 25210 kHz,
16360 - 17410 kHz, 26100 - 26175 kHz
9911
To test the transmitter press [TEST] and [START] keys in this order. The dummy
load (if equipped) is connected automatically and the test signal of 2191kHz,
modulated by two-tone alarm, is sent to the dummy load.
9915
If you select "1" (short), only check data for Ia, Vc, Ic and Pi are displayed
repeatedly every pressing of the [CHECK METER] key.
9916
To enable to lock the keys except for [SEND], [START], [2182], and [2187.5]
keys, select "1" (ON). Then press the * key to turn on the key lock function. First
press of the * key make the keys inactive. (Keyboard Lock [ON]" will be
displayed.)
Select "2" (Intercom call), to use the [*] key for intercom call.
Note that the AF board 05P0356-33 in the Control Unit is required.
A3-7
FS-5000/8000
9917
Used if installation contains a receiving antenna or ANT BK RELAY board (in
antenna coupler). For high speed switching between receiving and
transmitting
(for example, telex) set to "1." Then, TX delay time (system setting 9913) is
shortened to "10ms”.
9919
For control unit priority, select the same setting numbers for both control units.
*To give priority to No. 1 Control Unit; *To give priority to No. 2 Control Unit;
No.1 Control Unit: Setting ”1” No.1 Control Unit : Setting “2”
No.2 Control Unit: Setting ”1” No.2 Control Unit : Setting “2”
9923
Setting No. Contents LCD Indication Remarks

Dummy load can be switched With DUMMY LOAD
“0”(Enable) DUMMY
by DUMMY key. PCB.
DUMMY key is not Without DUMMY
“1”(Disable) ---
operative. LOAD PCB
Shortening capacitor
automatically turns on in the
“2” range set by 9924/9925. S.CAP(Shorten-ing With modified
(Short Cap.) Further, DUMMY key is capacitor) DUMMY LOAD PCB
allowed to turn on/off
shortening capacitor.
9928
For 1988 SOLAS Convention ships (GMDSS) set this item to "1." Then, minimum
output power is automatically set at 60W (power data -- MF:115, HF:110), except
for minimum power data already stored into user channel.
9930 - 9932
MIF Furuno Multi Interface for Radio communication. Selected when DP-6,
DSC-6 is connected.
TBUS Selected for equipment made by 'Thrane & Thrane A/S" of Denmark. If
TBUS data is used, it is not necessary to connect TXD/RXD lines.
9934 – 9936
If you wish to change the class of emission only while the selcall is transmitted
and to restore it automatically to previous status after transmission, set the channel
Nos. 9934 - 9936 and 9937 to "0" (No change) and "2" (AM), respectively.
EX) Selcall is connected REM 1, set to system channel “9934” to “0” and
“9937” to “2”..
A3-8
FS-5000/8000
9947
The "1": SQ on Telex [1-OFF] setting automatically turns off the SQ (if
ON) when
class of emission is changed to TELEX. (Note that AF signal to DP-5/6 is
not passed through squelch circuit, so this setting is not for DP-5/6 connection.)
9948
The '1": NB on Telex [1-OFF] setting automatically turns off the NB (if ON) when
class of emission is changed to TELEX.
9949
AGC on Telex
*The "1" setting sets AGC to FAST when class of emission is changed to TELEX.
9950
Duplex on Telex
*The "1" setting inhibits DUPLEX mode (unnecessary on TELEX) when class of
emission is changed to TELEX.
9952
1: ON (Connected to GND)
*This function is available only when the Rx antenna is installed and dummy load
board with antenna earth relay is mounted in the coupler. If you want to connect
the Tx antenna to ground manually (irrespective of 9952 setting), press the
[DUMMY] key. (For HF band of the FS-8000, this function is operative only
when the output power is selected for "Low 2" or less.)
9953
2182 --- Transmission 2182 kHz, Reception all frequencies
9961
ITU Freq. Table [0-Standerd, 1-USA, 2-EU]
[2-EU] selection; MF band ITU frequency list added.
A3-9
FS-5000/8000
9966
In accordance with both the above setting and system setting 9953 (Operation on
AM mode), the transmission of two-tone alarm on AM mode is as follows:
System setting:9966 System setting:9953 TX of two-tone alarm on AM mode.

0: TX/RX
Possible on all frequencies.
0:FREE 1: RX only
(Factory setting) 2: No Disabled
3: 2182 Possible on all frequencies.
0: TX/RX Possible on all frequencies.
1: RX only
1: LIMITED Disabled
2: No
3: 2182 Possible on 2182 kHz only.
9980
Returns to default setting for each country. For example, enter “44” for Europe.
9981
Determines the functions of 9911 and 9923 as follows:
9981 [0] NO [1] YES

9911: Alarm 0-Receive 1-Transmit
9923 : Dummy 1-Inhibit 0-Enable
9982
Determines the functions of 9913 and 9917 as follows:
9982 [0] NO [1] YES

9913 : System 30 ms 10 ms
9917: 50 ohms BK 0-on/off 1-Permanently on
Relay (fixed)
A3-10
FS-5000/8000
9989
Power setting for Europe and Norway type [1-EU, 2-NOR].
Setting of power
data. (When old type Ant. coupler is installed. :05P0358-44
and after)
EU (Europe) Power data NOR (Norway) Power data

1.6-2.5 FS-5000 225 1.6-2.5MHz FS-5000: 200 FS-8000: 160
MHz FS-8000 160 2.5-4.0MHz FS-5000: 210 FS-8000: 160
4.0-30MHz FS-5000: 225 FS-8000: 160
9998
Ex) Preset time is 12 : 35.
Press 1235 [ENT] in this order to turn on or off the system lock function.
The following system settings are not changeable when you turn on the system
lock function.
* STO FULL (or LOW) Power Adjustment

* STO 9900 Model
9901 Tx freq. selection
9903 Output power of SSB on MF band
9914 Alarm sending time
9960 Recall 27MHz freq.
9999 System initialization
A3-11
FS-5000/8000
2.4 Default setting for each country
[STO] [9] [9] [8] [0] [ENT] Country code [ENT]

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item. The system channel that it
isn't mentioned in the below list is the same as standard setting. Refer to section “2.1
System Channel List”.
Country Code List
Setting Country Code
CH
Function 44: 47: 81:
No. 0: 1:USA 31:
0 1 2 3 4 Standard Holland EU Norway Japan
Types of delivery for each country - U - S N K
9901 TX freq. Selection Free Limited ROM Marine 0 0 3 0 3 0
Output power of
9903 transceiver unit 400W 150W 50W 0 1 0 0 0 2
on MF band
Class of emission SSB
9904 AM SSB 2 2 2 2 2 2
on 2182kHz FIX
9907 Time display format Japan USA Europe 0 1 2 2 2 0
Numerical display of
9910 Disable Enable 0 0 0 0 0 1
check meter data
TX delay time 30ms (Selectable:5-99ms) Note) FS-8000:10ms 30 30 30 30 10 30
9913
*Upper:FS-5000 *Lower:FS-8000 10 10 10 10 10 10
50 ohm BK. relay ON
9917 ON/OFF 0 0 0 0 1 0
(Fixed)
Shortening
9923 Dummy Enable Disable capacitor 1 1 1 1 1 1
9926 Test tone Enable Disable 0 1 1 1 1 0
Power reduction on
9927 Enable Disable 0 1 1 1 1 0
2182/2187.5kHz
Minimum output Less then 60W or
9928 0 1 1 1 1 0
power 60W more
Duplex mode on No
9950 Disable 0 0 1 0 0 0
telex mode change
Operation on AM 2182kHz
9953 T/RX RX only Disable 1 1 1 1 1 0
mode only
Operation on R3E
mode
Operation on FAX
mode
Operation on LSB
mode
Cypher
communication (Vs
9957 Enable control signal Disable Enable 0 0 0 0 0 1
ON/OFF on TB2-10
in FS-5000C unit)
ITU freq. Table

9961 Standard USA Europe 0 1 2 2 2 0
selection
A3-12
FS-5000/8000
3. Jumper settings
3.1 For NAV data format selecting, CIF or NMEA
Jumper wire setting on AF board selects data format to be received. Referring to next page.
In addition, system setting for “9933:Data to CIF terminal” port must be set.
[STO] 9 9 3 3 [ENT]
0: MIF(4800bps) 1: TBUS 2: CIF
3: NMEA 4: MIF2(1200bps)
FS-5000C TB-4
NMEA
Nav device
CIF/NMEA
(TXD/RXD)
or FURUNO
Radio Equipment
MIF(4800bps) EX)RB-500
3.2 When using C.Loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500

Put a jumper wire on the AF board to use current loop format. Refer to the next page for
locatin of parts on AF board having suffix number –33 and after.
In addition confirm the system setting for “9931:Data to REM 2 terminal” port.
To connect with the DB-500 (C.Loop) or RB-500, setting should be as below.
[STO] 9 9 3 1 [ENT]
0: MIF(4800bps) 1: TBUS 2: CIF
3: NMEA 4: MIF2(1200bps)
Jumper wire: Short (Current Loop)
A3-13
FS-5000/8000
CIF/NMEA
*CIF NMEA: Open, CIF: Short
*NMEA NMEA: Short, CIF: Open
REM2
*C.Loop Short
*RS-232C Open
A3-14
FS-5000/8000
4. User (Preset) Channel Programming

The 'TX freq. selection" (9901) is set to "1" (Free), so you may store frequencies by
recalling the ITU/DSC channels or by keying in a frequency through the keyboard.
Select class of emission, bandwidth, and frequency, then press the following keys to store
the frequencies (class of emission & BW as well) into the user channel.
[STO] (User CH No.) [ENT] [ENT]

*User CH No. : 1 to 8999 CH (storage capacity: 400 CH)
Execute the following key sequence to store ITU frequencies (class of emission & BW as
well) into the user channel.
[ITU] (ITU CH No.) [ENT]

[STO] (User CH No.) [ENT] [ENT]
Note)
To see stored user channels, press [RCL] 9998 [ENT].
To erase a user channel, press [STO] “User CH No.” [ENT] [0] [ENT].
A3-15
FS-5000/8000
5. Power Adjustment
A3-16
FS-5000/8000
A3-17
FS-5000/8000
A3-18
FS-5000/8000
A3-19
FS-5000/8000
A3-20
FS-5000/8000
6. Self test
A3-21
FS-5000/8000
6.2 Antenna Coupler unit
Old type antenna coupler
New type antenna coupler (05P0358-44 and after)
To check the antenna coupler for proper operation, press the CHCK button (S2) on the
coupler board. The relay start chattering and LED’s CR1 to CR24 blink one by one in
ascending order. If device failure is found, an appropriate LED lights to indicate the
offending device:
Device LED
ROM CR1
RAM CR2
A/D converter CR3
Note) ROM, RAM, A/D converter are incorporated in the CPU.
A3-22
Section B1. DSC-5
1. Connection
DSC-5 Rear View
DSC-5 configurations
MF/HF system
*DSC-5 + AA-50 + FS-1562/5000/8000 + DP-5/6
*DSC-5 + AA-50 + FS-1562/5000/8000 + DP-5/6 + RV-118G/128G
*DSC-5 + AA-50 + FT-258/508 + RV-118G/128G + DP-5/6
*DSC-5A (with 2187.5kHz WR) + FS-1562/5000/8000 + (DP-5/6)
VHF system
*DSC-5 + FM-7000 (with Channel 70 watch receiver)
*DSC-5V (with Channel 70 WR) + FM-7000
B1-1
DSC-5
MF/HF System
Not use.
VHF System
Note) key-lock command: Priority command
B1-2
DSC-5
2. Changing System Settings and MMSI number

2.1 Changing system settings
To change system settings;
1. Press the [SETUP] key at the default display followed by pressing the [FILE] key
within two or three seconds.
MES AD -------- I
2. Select “I” by pressing the [SELCT] key several times.

3. Then, press the [ENT] key.
Self-ID : 431456789
Group-ID : 011111111
4. Enter cipher code 652111.

Here !!
Self-ID :?
Group-ID :? You can enter new ID number.
5. Enter self ID code followed by pressing the [ENT] key.
6. Enter group ID code followed by pressing the [ENT] key.
*Ready for filing*

S:431456789 G:011111111
Note) When own ship is not assignment to Group ID, set to “011111111”.
7. Enter cipher code 652111 again.
Ignore ID < >

ON OFF
8. Select “ON” then press the [ENT] key. “TEST” indication blinks.
TEST
B1-3
DSC-5
9. You can change (set) following settings.

*Selection (VHF or MF/HF) of communication equipment.
[SETUP] - [4]
*”COMM” setting in the PROG menu.
[SELECT] - [PROG] --- [COMM]
*Tx-key timing setting in the “SYS” sub menu.
[SELECT] - [PROG] - [SYST] --- “key”
*Further, ”TO” (Test tone) in the self test can be done.
[SELECT] [PROG] [TEST] --- “TO”
Refer to Setting List for details.
10. After changing the settings, set the “Ignore ID” in the “TO” test to “OFF” for
normal operation by taking the steps below.
TEST
[SELECT]
CALL ----- PROG Select "PROG"
[ENT]
Select "TEST"
TIME ----- TEST
[ENT]
Self test < >

Select "TO"
MO TO -----
[ENT]
Select "ID"
NARK ----- ID
[ENT]
Ignore ID < >

ON OFF
Select "OFF"
Important !!
[ENT]
Watch
Returns to default display
B1-4
DSC-5
2.2 Settings List
For MF/HF DSC system

Standard type
REM
AA-50/DSC
DB
DMC-5 DP-5/6 DB-500 FS-1562
DB-120
Note) The AA-50 is not required
DMC B
when DSC-5A is installed.
D
or
A
E
CIF/NMEA DSC Note) MF/HF TR
FS-5000
DSC-5 AA-50
MF/HF RX REM1-3 -8000
Printer C NBDP
REM1-3
REM-B REM-A
PP-500
DP-5/6
-510
Added Receiver type
RCV
RV-118G
128G
REM
Note) The AA-50 is not required
MF/HF TR
when DSC-5A is installed.
Note) REM
DSC
AA-50 DB
DMC-5 DP-5/6 DB-500 FS-1562
DB-120
DMC
DSC
or
B E MF/HF RX
A
CIF/NMEA MF-HF T/R

FS-5000
DSC-5
D REM1-3 -8000
Printer C NBDP REM1-3
REM-B REM-A
PP-500
DP-5/6
-510
For VHF DSC system

DMC-5
DMC A C D E
CIF/NMEA B REM-1
DSC-5/5V FM-7000
VHF
Printer
Note) DSC-5V is equipped with CH70 WR.
PP-500
-510
B1-5
DSC-5
The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item.
Setting List
Key operation Settings
Item MF/HF DSC System Note
VHF
1 2 3 4 5 6 Add.
System
Standard
RCV
Select
[4]:XMITR MF/HF VHF
XMITR
[SET UP]
MMSI [FILE] I Own ID
Group ID [FILE] I Group ID
TIME TIME Date & UTC
Line out
LINE 0dBm 1dBm
level
Jumper
NAV CIF
CIF/ setting:
device CIF or NMEA
NMEA CONT pcb
selection NMEA JP-1/2
DMC ON ON:DMC-5
REM-A ON or OFF
connection OFF connected
OFF No.1VHF:
VHF VHF
VHF
REM-B OFF No.2VHF
connection VHF+CH70 VHF+
TERM CH70
OFF
NBDP COMM NBDP NBDP:DP
REM-C OFF or NBDP OFF
connection VHF connected
TERM
WR
RT
ON
[SELECT] PROG XT
HF TR TERM
REM-D ON-WR ON-RT OFF-XT
connection WR
RT
OFF
XT
TERM
OFF
HF RX WR
REM-E WR WR OFF
connection RCV
TERM
NBDP A1A:ON
NBDP ON OFF
remote A1A:OFF
DIS
URG
EXT ALM ALARM SAF DIS
SYST BUS
ROU
AUTO
Tx key 0.5
KEY AUTO 0.5
timing /
15
B1-6
DSC-5
Key operation Setting value

Item MF/HF DSC System VHF Note
1 2 3 4 5 6 System
Standard RCV
QUICK Quick:
Printer
PRT QUIK PP-500/510
selection SLOW connected
Ver check DSC & MODEM Ver
BEEP
1:lineout
2:line in
3:DMC
TxD
MO 4:DMC BEEP or 1 For monitor
RxD test
[SELECT] PROG SYST 5:CIF
TxD
Monitor
TEST 6:CIF
selection
RxD
TO
RR
RL
LL
--
MC
K
D
P
ABLE
AUTO [6]:
NR
ACK AUTO- UN- ABLE
ACK /
setting ABLE
MOD
0
DIS/URG
ALM type
TYPE / 1
9
[7]:
Key click ON
VOL KEY ON
ON/OFF OFF
ALM ON
ALM ON
ON /OFF OFF
F1 T2189.5/R2177.0 Recommend
F2 T4208.0/R4219.5 to
[SETUP] International
Scan freq. [5]: F3 T6312.5/R6331.0
Freq
F4 T8415.0/R8436.5 Not used (To cannel
setting SCAN
F5 T12577.5/R12657.0 scan freq.,set
the RX freq.
F6 T16805.0/R16903.0 as 99999.9.)
Printer AUTO
[0]:
ON/OFF AUTO
PRINT MANU
setting
To cancel the
manually
Manual
[1]:POSITION When NAV device is not connected. entered data.
position
Enter 9999
for the UTC.
B1-7
DSC-5
3. Jumper wire settings
DSC-5A only
Format JP 1 JP 2
CIF (default) Open Short
NMEA Short Open
Note)
CIF/NMEA selection must be also made through the menu;
Select the PROG menu and call the COMM menu, then select CIF/NMEA selection
mode. (COMM menu can be called only when “Ignore ID” is set to “ON” .)
B1-8
DSC-5
4. Self test
Pressing the [3] key at normal display, automatically starts the daily test. The test checks
the MODEM, Remote line and the connection between DSC, MF/HF RT and NBDP
with MIF commands.
B1-9
DSC-5
5. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM

After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working
properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on
the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.

2. Press the NMI switch.
For DSC-5/5A (1) The power is automatically cut off.
(2) Turn the power on manually.
For DSC-5R Since the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on
the screen, turn the power off and on manually.
3. The screen should look something like this:
NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM
RAM clear
1. When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key;
For DSC-5/5A (1) The power is automatically cut off.
(2) Turn the power on again manually.
For DSC-5R Turn the power off and on again manually.
2. The default display appears.

Watch
B1-10
DSC-5
EEROM clear
The PROG menu (returns to default settings) and clears self-ID code, etc.
You must do setup of system !! Refer to section “2.2 settings list”.
1. When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key;

Note) If you want to print out the contents of the EEROM, place the cursor on the
“EEROM” position and press the [0]: print key.
For DSC-5/5A (1) After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off.
(2) Turn the power on manually.
For DSC-5R (1) After about 15 seconds the indication of “Turn off the
power” appears on the screen.
(2) Turn the power off and on manually.

Self-ID ?
Group ID:
Enter self-ID and group-ID codes.

[ENT]
*Ready for filing*
S: G:
[ENT]
Test
Note)
Item Purpose
RAM 1 Clears work area only in the S-RAMs.
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. Transmitted and received
RAM 2
messages, and file prepared in the MES menu.)
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and contents of the PROG
EEROM (RAM & EEROM)
menu (returns to default settings) and clears self-ID code, etc.
B1-11
DSC-5
6. DSC Frequency table
B1-12
DSC-5
7. Menu tree
B1-13
DSC-5
B1-14
DSC-5
B1-15
DSC-5
Clearing Manual POS.:

Enter to 9999 on UTC.
Clearing SCAN Freq.:

Enter to 99999.9 on Rx Freq.
B1-16
DSC-5
8. Power and Frequency measurement

of MF/HF Radiotelephone
MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission
mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone.
To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below.
The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX).
The MF/HF radiotelephone TX key line and inputting tone signal is controlled by
the DSC-5/5A. The DSC-5/5A muse be set the Ignore ID ON. Refer to section “2.1
Changing System settings”.
Ignore ID ON
TEST
Press [SELECT] key.

Function < >
CALL RCV XMIT PROG
Select "PROG", press [ENT] key.
Program < >

TIME COMM SYST TEST
Select "TEST", press [ENT] key.
Self test
MO TO RR RL LL MC K D P
Select "TO", press [ENT] key.
Tone test < >

MARK tone:1700Hz-85Hz
SPACE tone:1700Hz+85Hz Don’t select T1 and T2 !!
MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2 DOT:1700Hz+85Hz
Select "MARK or Space", press [TEST] key.

For example, select "Space".
Tone test < Space tone >
Now doing Outputting tone signal
Press [CANCEL] key several times.
Return to "self test" display.
Self - test
Select "MC", press [ENT] key.
Manual cont out < >

IN OUT
Select "OUT", press [ENT] key.
Manual cont out < >

ALM DIS VK VM HK HM HH
Select "HK", press [TEST] key.
Manual cont out < HF Key >

ON Tx ON (Measurment: power and frequency)
Fo+85Hz
Press [TEST] key.
OFF
Tx OFF
TEST
B1-17
DSC-5
9. Power and Frequency measurement of

VHF Radiotelephone
The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output
power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70.
The VHF radiotelephone TX key line is controlled by the DSC-5/5V.
The DSC-5/5A muse be set the Ignore ID ON. Refer to section “2.1 Changing System
settings”.
Ignore ID ON
TEST
Press [SELECT] key.

Function < >
CALL RCV XMIT PROG
Select "PROG", press [ENT] key.
Program < >

TIME COMM SYST TEST
or Select "TEST", press [ENT] key.
Self test
Select "MC",
press [ENT] key. Select "TO", press [ENT] key.
Tone test < > SPACE tone:1700Hz+400Hz Don’t select T1 and T2 !!
Select "MARK or Space", press [TEST] key.

Return to "self test" display.
Self - test
Select "MC", press [ENT] key.
Manual cont out < >

IN OUT
Manual cont out < >

ALM DIS VK VM HK HM HH
Select "VK", press [TEST] key.
Manual cont out < VK Key >

156.525MHz
(+10ppm)
Press [TEST] key.
Manual cont out < VK Key >
OFF
Tx OFF
TEST
B1-18
Section B2. DSC-6/6A
1. Connector on Rear Panel

Connect equipment to the DSC-6/6A as shown in the figure which follows.
2. Typical Configurations (Type-1)

EX 1) DSC-6 + AA-50 + DP-5/6 + FS-5000
CIF/NMEA MF/HF Rx DSC MF/HF TR REM1-3
DSC-6 AA-50 FS-5000
NBDP REM3-1
REM-B REM-A
DP-5/6
EX 2) DSC-6 + AA-50 + DP-5/6 + FS-1562
CIF/NMEA MF/HF Rx DSC MF/HF TR REM REM REM

DSC-6 AA-50 DB FS-1562
NBDP REM
REM-B REM-A
DP-5/6
B2-1
DSC-6
Installation Type
Not use
Note) Key-lock command :priority command
Note) RC-1500 and RC-2000-3F: Type-1

(FS-1562 + AA-50 + DSC-6 + DP-5/6)
RC-5000 and RC-8000: Type-1
(FS-5000/8000 + AA-50 + DSC-6 + DP-5/6)
B2-2
DSC-6
3. System settings
3.1 Initial settings
At power on, the display shown below appears.
Enter own ship’s ID (MMSI), data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5
connection, DP-5/6 connection, installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level as
below.
Protection OFF
Refer to section “3.2 Changing system settings”.
See page B2-2.
B2-3
DSC-6
3.2 Changing System settings

The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display.
Watch
[SELECT]
Set up menu < >

Set up menu
TIME 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 0 ALM
Note) To release protection for “9:system” menu.

Watch
[SELECT] [9]
System < >

V P ID ----
Select "P" and press [ENT]
* System protected *
Enter cypher code;

Protection < >
652111
ON OFF
Select "OFF" and press [ENT].
System < >

V P ID ----
Now you may reenter the following

* Format of navigator * Installation type
* DMC-5 connection * TX timming
* DP-5/6 connection * AF line out level
The registered MMSI number is reading only.

If you want to change of MMSI number, refer to section "6. Changing ID number".
After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu to "ON" for normal operation.
TEST
Important !!
[SELECT] [9] [>] [ENT]
Protection < >

ON OFF
Select "ON" and press [ENT].
Press [CANCEL] several times.
Watch
Returns to normal display.
B2-4
DSC-6
4. System settings list

MF/HF Rx DSC MF/HF TR REM1-3
NMEA To AA-50
NMEA data FS-5000 DB FS-1562
DSC-6 AA-50
FS-8000 or
REM3-1
DMC NBDP To DP-5/6
REM-B REM-A
DMC-5 DP-5/6
NMEA
Installation type; Type-1
NMEA data
Note) NMEA –0183 data sentence receiving by DSC-6: GLL, RMA, RMC
The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item.

Settings list
Set up menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note
TIME Mon – day –year -UTC Date & UTC
To cancel the
L/L &
1 Position — manually entered data,
UTC(Auto/Manual)
enter 9999 for the UTC.
Able
NOR Proposal from other
Comply
2 Able station is acceptable or
status Unable ||
not.
MOD
3 Self test — See S/M
Auto
Auto/Manual Auto Automatic printing
Manual
Quick
4 Print out Type (Printer type) Quick PP-510/500 is connected
Slow
Print out to EEROM
EEROM
content
ON
Key click ON
OFF
OFF
1.AF OUT For check
6 Sound 2.AF IN For check
Monitor 3.NMEA Tx OFF, 1, or 2 Not use
4.NMEA Rx For check
5.DMC Tx For check
6.DMC Rx For check
Message
Enter to
Address 0 MID X5 - X9
Group ID
7 File
Tel No.
Work-F
DSC-F
B2-5
DSC-6

V (ROM Version) DSC & MODEM
P (Protection) Pass word : 652111
To clear contents of
EE-ROM.
ID (MMSI) Own ID (NMI SW ON)
Refer to section “6.
Changing ID number”.
NMEA Refer to section
N/C (NMEA/CIF) NMEA or CIF “5. Jumper setting”.
System CIF
(CONT PCB:J2)
ON ON:DMC is connected
(Protected: DMC (DMC ON/OFF) ON or OFF
OFF OFF:DMC is not connect
Refer to ON ON:NBDP is connected
9
section 3.2 DP (NBDP ON/OFF) ON or OFF OFF:NBDP is not
“Changing OFF connected
system Type-1:RT and DSC is
settings”.) 1 1
connected
RT (Type 1/2/3) Type-2:RT, RCV and
2 2
(Refer to page DSC6-2) DSC is connected
3 Not use
OFF
Auto Auto FURUNO SSB
0.5 sec
K (Tx kye timing)
||
15 sec
L (Line out level) 0dBm 0dBm FURUNO SSB
F1 2189.5/2177.0
Recommend to
F2 4208.0/4219.5
International Freq.
F3 6312.5/6331.0
0 Scan Freq. (To cancel scan
F4 8415.0/8436.5
frequency, set the RX
F5 12577.5/12657.0 frequency as 99999.9.)
F6 16805.0/16903.0
ON
ON/OFF ON
ALM OFF
Type (DIS and URG) 1-9 1
B2-6
DSC-6
5. Jumper setting (Receiver board and CONTROL board)
Note that NMEA/CIF setting in system menu must also be changed.

Refer to section “4. System settings list”.
B2-7
DSC-6
6. Changing ID (MMSI) number (Ver-1.05 and after)
Refer to section “7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM”.
Procedures
1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on.
2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on.
Clear <Do not clear>

NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM
4. Select “EEROM” and press the [ENT] key to clear data on the EEROM.
5. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on again.
The initial setting display appears.
(Refer to section “3.1 Initial settings”)
TEST
6. Enter own ship’s ID (MMSI), data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5
connection, DP-5/6 connection, Installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level.
B2-8
DSC-6
Procedures

NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM
4. Clear to RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM.

RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear
When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key;
The power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually.
B2-9
DSC-6
EEROM clear
When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key;
After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off.
Turn the power on again manually. The initial setting display appears.
TEST
(Refer to section “3.1 Initial settings”)

Note)
Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM
by pressing the [4] key.
Contents of S-RAM and EEROM

Item Purpose
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs
RAM 2 (incl. transmitted and received messages, and prepared in
messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7])
Clears contents of EEROM.
*Settings of [SELECT] and [ALARM STOP] menu.
*Scan programmed frequencies of [SELECT] [0] menu.
*Distress massage
*AD/Tel No./Work-F/DSC-F data of [SELECT] [7] in File
EEROM
menu
*System setting of [SELECT] [9] menu.
MMSI, data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF),
DMC-5 connection, DP-5/6 connection, installation type,
Tx timing and AF line output level.
B2-10
DSC-6
8. Self test
Pressing the [3] key at normal display, automatically starts the daily test and displays
the results. The test checks the MODEM, Remote line and the connection between DSC
and MF/HF RT, NBDP in MIF command.
B2-11
DSC-6
9. DSC Frequency table
B2-12
DSC-6
10. Menu list

B2-13
DSC-6
Enter to Group ID.
Clearing SCAN Freq.:

Enter to 99999.9 on Rx Freq.
B2-14
DSC-6

MF/HF Radiotelephone
To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below. The radiotelephone must
be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX). The MF/HF radiotelephone
TX key line and inputting tone signal is controlled by the DSC-6/6A.The DSC-6/6A
muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “3.2 Changing System settings”.
Protection OFF
TEST
Press [SELECT], [ ] key.
T/A test < tone /signal >

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-FREQ
Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.

Tone test < > SPACE tone:1700Hz+85Hz
DOT:1700Hz+85Hz
Don’t select T1 and T2 !!
MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
Select "MARK or Space", press [ENT] key.

Press [CANCEL] key twice.
T/A test < tone /signal >

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-FREQ
Select "MANUAL-CONT", press [ENT] key.
Manual cont out < >

IN OUT

Manual cont out < >
ALM DIS HK HM HH
Select "HK", press [ENT] key.

OFF
Press [ENT] key.

Fo+85Hz
Press [ENT] key again.

OFF
TEST
B2-15
Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP
1. Connection
DMC-5 DMC-5
A A
CIF/NMEA B REM-1 CIF/NMEA B REM-1

DSC-8V FM-8000 DSC-8VP FM-7000
VHF RT VHF RT
Printer DC DC Printer DC
21.6 - 31.2V 13.5V
10.8 - 40.0V
PP -510 or PP-500 PP -510 or PP-500
POWER POWER POWER

POWER 24 VDC
24 VDC 100/220 VAC 100/220 VAC
DSC-8V System DSC-8VP System
The difference between the DSC-8V and DSC-8VP is asbelow.

DSC-8V No power supply circuit. Power is supplied from VHF radiotelephone
FM-8000.
(When the FM-8000 is turned on, the power (15VDC) is supplied to
the DSC-8V.)
DSC-8VP Built-in Power board. The DSC-8VP operates from 10.8 to 40.0VDC.
B3-1
DSC-8V/8VP
2. Changing system settings

Watch
[SELECT]
Set up menu < >

Set up menu
TIME 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 ALM
Note) To release the protection for 9:system and 8:RECEIVER menu,

follow the steps below..
Watch
[SELECT] [9]
System < >

V P ID ----
Select "P" and press [ENT]
Enter cypher code;

652111
Protection < >
ON OFF
Select "OFF" and press [ENT].
System < >

V P ID ----
Now you may reenter the following

* MMSI * AF line out level
* Format of navigator * CH70 WR selection
* DMC-5 connection
After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu to "ON".
TEST
Important !!
Protection < >

ON OFF
Select "ON" and press [ENT].
Press [CANCEL] several times.
Watch
B3-2
DSC-8V/8VP

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting Item.
Settings list
TIME Mon – day –year -UTC Date & UTC
To cancel the manually
L/L &
1 Position — entered data, enter 9999
UTC(Auto/Manual)
for the time.
Able
Proposal from other
Comply NOR
2 Able station Is acceptable or
status Unable ||
no.
MOD
3 Self test — See S/M.
Auto
Auto/Manual Auto
Manual
Quick
4 Print out Type Quick PP-510/500 is connected
Slow
Print out to EEROM
EEROM
content
ON
Key click ON
OFF
OFF
1.AF OUT
For check
6 Sound 2.AF IN
Monitor 3.NMEA Tx OFF or 1
(3: Not use)
4.NMEA Rx
5.DMC Tx
6.DMC Rx
Message
7 File Address Group ID
Tel No.
RECEIVER No.1 VHF
CH70
(Protected: :CH70
Refer to
8 section2.
No.2VHF
Changing VHF
:VHF
system
settings)
V (ROM Version) DSC & MODEM
System P (Protection) Pass word : 652111
(Protected:
ID (MMSI) Own ID
Refer to
NMEA Jumper setting.
9 section2. N/C (NMEA/CIF) NMEA or CIF
CIF (CONT PCB:J2)
Changing
system ON ON ON:DMC is connected
DMC (DMC ON/OFF)
settings) OFF OFF OFF:DMC is not connect
L (Line out level) 0dBm 0dBm
ON
ON/OFF ON
ALM OFF
Type (DIS and URG) 0-1 - 9 1
B3-3
DSC-8V/8VP
4. Jumper wire setting
Jumper JP-2 on the CONTROL board selects receiving data format, NMEA or CIF.
CONTROL Board
NMEA/CIF setting is also required through System menu. Refer to section “3. System
setting list”.
B3-4
DSC-8V/8VP
5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM
Procedures
2. For DSC-8VP
a, The power is automatically cut off.
b, Turn the power on manually.
For DSC-8V
Since the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on the screen, turn the
power of FM-8000 off and on manually.

NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM
B3-5
DSC-8V/8VP
4. Clear to RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM.

For DSC-8VP
b, Turn the power on again manually.
For DSC-8V
Turn the power off and on again manually.
The normal display appears.
Watch VHF CH70
EEROM clear
After about 15 second ,
For DSC-8VP
b, Turn the power on again manually.
For DSC-8V
Turn the power off and on again manually.
The initial setting display appears.
TEST
(Refer to section “3. System settings list”)

Note)
Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM
by pressing the [4] key.

Item Purpose
RAM 2 (incl. transmitted and received messages, and prepared in
messages/address/Tel No in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7])
EEROM
(Own ship’s ID number, etc)
B3-6
DSC-8V/8VP
6. Self test
Pressing the [3] key at normal display automatically starts the daily test and displays the
results.
B3-7
DSC-8V/8VP
7. Menu List: [SELECT]

B3-8
DSC-8V/8VP
Enter to Group ID.
B3-9
DSC-8V/8VP

VHF Radiotelephone
The VHF radiotelephone TX key line is controlled by the DSC-8V/8VP.
The DSC-8V/8VP muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2. Changing
System settings”.
Protection OFF
TEST
Tx key ON.
INSPECTION TEST < >

TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-CH
Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.

Tone test < > SPACE tone:1700Hz+400Hz Don't select T1 and T !!
Select "MARK or Space", press [ENT] key.

Press [CANCEL] key twice.
INSPECTION TEST < >
TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-CH
Select "MANUAL-CONT", press [ENT] key.
Manual cont out < >

IN OUT

Manual cont out < >
VK
Select "VK", press [ENT] key.
Manual cont out < VHF- Key >

OFF
Press [ENT] key.

156.525MHz
Press [ENT] key again. (+10ppm)

OFF
TEST
B3-10
Section B4. DSC-60
1. Connection
FAX-5 + 2.6m Whip Antenna
FAX-5 + 2.6m Whip Antenna

RT Antenna
Option
Option Option
Antenna
Coupler
FS-75
ANT D.ANT FS-2550
Option FS-1562
Option
FS-2500
Option FS-5000
DMC Terminal MF/HF RT FS-8000
(DMC-5) DMC RX PCB (FS-xxxx)
OR (05P0703)
Distress Button
(IC-302)
RT Option
Option
RCV BZ Distributor
Incomming
(DB-120/500)
Indicator (IC-303)
IEC-61162
DSC/WATCH NBDP Option
RT
Option (NMEA) RECEIVER DSC
NBDP IEC-61162
Nav device (DSC-60) (DP-6) (NMEA)
Term
COM1
Option
NBDP Terminal Printer

Option Speaker
(IB or P/C)
Printer Option
Handset
Printer SEL
24V DC Option
DC24V Option Printer

Battery 24V AC/DC (PP-510)
100/110/200/220V AC Power Supply
(PR-300)
Note)
With the optional DSC general watch keeping receiver board, communication by
radiotelephone and NBDP is enabled by the MF/HF radiotelephone while watching DSC
distress, safety and general frequencies.
If DSC general watch keeping receiver board is not installed, DSC general frequency is
watched by the MF/HF radiotelephone, and it cannot be watched during communication
by radiotelephone and NBDP.
B4-1
DSC60
2. System setup list
2.1 Setup menu: [#/SETUP]

The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. The recommended
“settings” listed in the table are presumed to be the standard settings. Set them according
to user’s requests. In addition to these settings, required are DIP switch settings on the
CONTROL/MODEM board.
System setup menu list

Setup
Item setting Note
menu
RCVD ON
ON
CALL OFF
OLD ON
ON
POSITION OFF
4H
3H In the rule, means to activate an alarm
POSITION
ALARM 2H 4H when the position information is over
OLDER
1H 4H old.
0.5H
DIS/URG
EXT ROUTINE
DIS/URG IC-303
ALARM ALL
OFF
COMPLY ABLE
ABLE
TYPE UNABLE
AUTO POSITION ON
ON
ACK CALL OFF
POLLING ON
ON
CALL OFF
INPUT AUTO
POSITION AUTO GGA > RMC > RMA > GLL > ZDA
TYPE MANUAL
XMTD MANUAL
MANUAL
CALL AUTO
RCVD MANUAL When printer is connected, set to
PRINT AUTO
CALL AUTO AUTO.
DAILY MANUAL
MANUAL
TEST AUTO
F1 2M INTL
F2 4M INTL
SCAN F3 6M INTL
ROUTINE Default settings : OFF
FREQ. F4 8M INTL
F5 12M INTL
F6 16M INTL
B4-2
DSC60
Setup
Item setting Note
menu
2M FIXED FIXED
ON
4M ON *MF/HF type: watch keeping
OFF
ON 2, 8MHz and other one Freq.
6M ON *MF type: Fixed on 2MHz.
SCAN OFF
DISTRESS
FREQ. 8M FIXED FIXED
Note)
ON Depend on “WACTH RCVR”
12M ON
OFF setting in Setup menu-SYSTEM.
ON
16M ON
OFF
ON
KEY CLICK ON
OFF
HANDSET 32 32 ADJ.:0-63
VOLUME ORDINARY
8 8 ADJ.:0-63
ALARM
DISTRESS
8 8 ADJ.:8-63
ALARM
X1–X9 With MNI switch set to on, and
MMSI FIXED
(FIXED) enter the password (652111).
WATCH MF/HF MF/HF type Depend on specification.
RCVR MF MF type (Sea area A3:Set to MF/HF type.)
LINE OUT
0dBm 0dBm
LEVEL
TX KEY
AUTO AUTO
TIMING
SYSTEM MIF
(PROTECTED) When FS-xxxx connected, set to
Pass word:
RT PORT IEC MIF
MIF.
652111 OFF
REMOTE ON
ON or OFF Depend on specification
Note) STATION OFF Main Ver:2.09
OFF
NBDP PORT ON or OFF When DP-6 connected, set to ON.
ON
Used for CH busy check.
CH DET S OFF – 255
100 (Calling category: routine and
LEVEL (100) Main Ver:2.09
business used)
INTL Russian vessel: setting to
REGULATION INTL
RUSSIA “RUSSINA” Main Ver:2.09
Date and UTC indication of
DIST Date & UTC --
transmitted Distress alert
Note)
“SYSTEM” menu is protected. To cancel the protection;
1. While displaying DSC normal display, press [SETUP]. The setup menu appears.
2. Select “SYSTEM” by using an arrow key.
3.Press [ENT] key.
4. Confirm that “PROTECTION”: ON is displayed on the bottom line. Type 652111.
5. Then, “PROTECTION” ON is changed to “PROTECTION” OFF, which enables
setting of each item. Now you can modify each item in the system setup menu.
B4-3
DSC60
2.2 System menu description

1. MMSI
The registered MMSI Number is reading only, that is, can not be changed in this menu.
2. WATCH RCVR (Default setting: MF/HF)

This item sets the frequencies of DSC watch keeping receiver.
- MF/HF : Up to 6 scan frequencies can be selected for the reception of MF/HF DSC
messages.
- MF : The receiver frequency is fixed to 2187.5 kHz.
3. LINE OUT LEVEL (Default setting: 0dBm)

Select default setting “0 dBm”, if FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected.
This item adjusts the output level from DSC, LINE OUT. The output level can be set at
every 1.5 dBm step with the left and right arrow keys. The adjusting range is from –12 to
+12 dBm.
4. TX-KEY TIMING (Default setting: AUTO)

This item sets the transmission timing between DSC and MF/HF radiotelephone for DSC
call. FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set this timing at the default setting
“AUTO”. The timing can be set at AUTO, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, or 15 seconds. For
example, if the timing is set at 5 seconds, transmitting message is output to the LINE
OUT line 5 seconds after [CALL] key has been pressed. If AUTO is selected, LINE OUT
signal is output after TUNE OK signal has come back from the radiotelephone.
5. RT-PORT (Default setting: MIF)

This item sets the protocol to control the radiotelephone. The setting is made at MIF, IEC,
or OFF. If FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set this item at the default setting
“MIF”.
- MIF: Furuno radiotelephone interface
- IEC: IEC-61162-1
- OFF: Radio remote control is turned OFF.
Note) Related settings

Select RS-232C, RS-422, or Current Loop by DIP switches S4 and S5 on
The pin assignment of the RT connector for MIF data is different from those for IEC
data.
When FS-1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set DIP switch as below.
- S4-#1 and #2: ON
- S4-#3 and #4: OFF
6. REMOTE STATION (Default setting: OFF) Main Ver 2.09 and after
This setting determines whether DSC-60 is operated as remote station or not. This item is
set at ON or OFF. If it is set at OFF, the remote function can not be switched by
[1/RT/2182] key.
B4-4
DSC60
7. NBDP PORT (Default setting: OFF)

If FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected to Furuno NBDP, DP-5/6, set this item at
ON. Then, the control of the NBDP can be made by the MIF protocol.
Whereas MAIN and MODEM CPU programs are updated from IB-581 or PC, NBDP
Port setting is disregarded. At this time, however, set DIP switch S3-1 and 2 at ON, S3-3
and 4 at OFF.

Select RS-232C, RS-422, or Current Loop by DIP switches S3 and S5 on
The pin assignment of NBDP connector for MIF data is different from those for IEC data.
When DP-6 or DP-5 is connected, set DIP switch as below.
- S3-#1 and #2: ON
- S3-#3 and #4: OFF
8. CH DET S LEVEL (Default setting: 100) Main Ver 2.09 and after
Before transmitting Routine and Business message, the system checks whether the
frequency to be transmitted is already in use or not. If it is used, the transmission is
commenced after the channel is not used. The maximum scale of the S-meter
corresponds to 255. To deactivate this function, select OFF.
9. REGULATION (Default setting: INTL) Main Ver 2.09 and after

In Russian version;
- Alarm is released continuously after transmitting distress alert.
- The [CANCEL] key can be used during the transmission of distress alert.
The transmission sequence is stopped at the end of the fifth transmission.
- If another distress alert or urgent message is received after pressing the [CALL] key for
distress relay or distress acknowledgement, the received message has priority while the
function triggered by the [CALL] key is cancelled.
10. DIST
Date and time of the latest distress alert are displayed. The data is stored onto the
EEROM. Main Ver 2.01: Date and time in ZDA is used. If ZDA is not available, XXXX
is shown. Main Ver 2.09: ZDA or RMC is used. If ZDA or RMC are not input, XXXX is
shown.
B4-5
DSC60
3. Setting DIP Switches

3.1 Outline of the settings on CONTROL/MODEM board
For data communication between the DSC and connected equipment, such as RT, NBDP,
DMC and navaids, the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board are setup to select
data format. The outline of the settings is shown in the Table and Figures below.
422
S5 ON
1 2 3 4
S6
C.LOOP ON
J3 J8 J9
1 2 3 4
422
J7 J4
S7 ON
S5
U5
J6
EEPROM U11
S6
S6 1 2 3 4
S7 S7
S1 S4 S3 S2 S8 232
NMI SW
J5
S8 S8
(RT) (NBDP) (DMC) ON
J1
05P0702
1 2 3 4
ON CALL
S4 S3 S2
(RT) (NBDP) (DMC) 1 2 3 4
232 422
Default settings)
- S2-#1 and #2 : OFF - S3-#1 and #2 : ON
- S2-#3 and #4 : ON - S3-#3 and #4 : OFF
- S4-#1 and #2 : ON
- S4-#3 and #4 : OFF - S5, S6, S7, S8 : All OFF
B4-6
DSC60
3.2 Setting for the connection with FS-75/1562/5000 and DP-6

TX/RX control data exchange between Furuno radio units is made normally by MIF
protocol through the RS-232C connections with factory-default setting.
[RT] [REM-1/2/3] [RT] [REM]

DB-120 REM-A
#2-SD #2-SD PCB
#3-RD #3-RD
DSC-60 FS-5000C DSC-60 FS-75/1562
[REM-B] [REM-A] [REM-B] [REM-A]
[NBDP] [REM-1/2/3] [NBDP]
DP-6 DP-6
#2-SD #2-SD
#3-RD #3-RD
Connection with FS-5000 and DP-6 Connection with FS-75/1562 and DP-6
The DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board of DSC-60 are set as follows:

RT: S4 (Selection of data format for the communication with RT)
- S4-1 and 2 : ON (RS-232C)
- S4-3 and 4 : OFF (RS-232C)
NBDP: S3 (Selection of data format for the communication with NBDP)

- S3-1 and 2 : ON (RS-232C)
- S3-3 and 4 : OFF (RS-232C)

Pressing [#/SETUP] key reveals “Setup menu” screen. Select SYSTEM, and set RT
PORT and NBDP PORT.
- RT PORT ->>> MIF
- NBDP PORT ->>> ON
Furthermore, priority setting must be made on FS-75/1562:Ver.07 and after.

Not necessary on FS-5000.
FS-75/1562 Set to setting No.9928:1
FS-75/1562 Setting of 9928

Priority
0: Main unit takes priority. 1: Remote control takes priority.
1 DSC Distress alert DSC Distress alert
2 2182kHz (Main unit) DSC other than distress
3 DSC other than distress Remote TEL (DSC)
4 Remote TEL (DSC) NBDP
5 NBDP 2182kHz (Main unit)
6 Main unit Main unit
B4-7
DSC60
3.3 Setting for the connection with navigational aids

The input data from navigation aids is selected in format, IEC: RS-422 or Current Loop,
using the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board of DSC-60.
Set S5-#4 to ON for the reception of IEC data from GPS, such as GP-500M2 and GP-80.
422
S5
ON
IEC:RS-422
1.NBDP
2.RT S5-4: ON
3.DMC C.Loop
1 2 3 4 4.NMEA
S5-4: OFF
C.LOOP

“AUTO” or “MANUAL” is selectable for POSITION setting in “System setup” menu. If
AUTO is selected, the DSC-60 accepts the sentences of GGA, RMC, RMA, GLL, and
ZDA. The data that DSC uses are Position data and Time data (automatically combined
with transmitting messages).
- GGA : Global positioning system fix data

- RMC : Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
- RMA : Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
- GLL : Geographic position, latitude/longitude
- ZDA : Time and date
The ZDA is used for automatically printing-out of sending/receiving messages and the
selftest result, and date and time in the communication log.
B4-8
DSC60
3.4 Setting for the connection with DMC, IC-302 and PC

DMC-5, IC-302, and PC can be connected to DMC port. Set the DIP switches on
CONTROL/MODEM board as follows: *Default settings: - S5, S6, S7, S8 : All
OFF
1. Connecting PC (for use in future)

To connect PC, set the DIP switches to RS-232C.
- S2-#1 and #2 : ON (RS-232C, TX/RX data)
- S2-#3 and #4 : OFF
- S5-#3 : OFF
- S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
- S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON (PC)
- S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
2. Connecting DMC-5
To connect DMC-5, set the DIP switches to RS-422.
- S2-#1 and #2 : OFF
- S2-#3 and #4 : ON (RS-422, TX data)
- S5-#3 : ON (C.Loop, RX data)
- S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON
- S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
- S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
3. Connecting IC-302
To connect IC-302, set the DIP switches to Current Loop.
- S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON
- S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
- S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
Pin assignment of DMC port
J3 pin DMC-5 P/C IC-302

1 TD-A SD DMC-OUT-H
2 TD-B GND DMC-OUT-C
3 RD-A RD DMC-IN-H
4 RD-B GND DMC-IN-C
5 NC NC CTR
6 F.GND F.GND F.GND
B4-9
DSC60
4. Setting the receiver board

A FAX-5+2.6m whip active antenna is usually used to receive DSC distress signal and
DSC general signal.
Set J3 on the RX board to ACTIVE to apply voltage to the antenna.
455kHz
FIL
ANT ACTIVE
J2
ACTIVE
J3
05P0703
RX
Ref.OSC
05P0703:
DSC watch keeping receiver board
and
DSC general watch keeping receiver board (option).
B4-10
DSC60
5. How to enter MMSI

This information explains how to release the protector to enter MMSI in System Setup
menu.
How to enter MMSI
To enter MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity number), follow steps below.
1. Turn on the unit, and press S1 (NMI SW) on the CONTROL/MODEM board.
The EEROM clear display appears.
DSC-60 with top cover removed

2. Type 652111. (ENT key is unnecessary.) The display does not change.
3. Select MMSI CLEAR by pressing an arrow key, and press [ENT].

MMSI default number appears.
4. Enter the MMSI of own ship by using numeric keys.
5. Confirm that the number displayed on the screen is correct.
6. Press [ENT]. The message “PLEASE POWER DOWN” appears.
7. Turn off and on the unit.
B4-11
DSC60
6. Self test
Pressing [3/TEST/DEF] key with DSC standby screen or Radiotelephone setting screen
automatically starts the daily test, and the test results are displayed. Main CPU, MODEM,
and RX boards can be checked, and the connection between MF/HF radiotelephone and
NBDP made by Furuno can be checked by MIF commands.
Procedures
1. Press [3/TEST/DEF] key with DSC standby screen or Radiotelephone setting screen.
2. The test automatically starts. The test can not be cancelled once if started.
* DSC-60 daily test *
JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26
MAIN CPU :
MODEM :
RCVR1 :
RCVR2 :
REMOTE RT :
REMOTE DP :
3. It takes 30 to 40 seconds to complete the test. Then, the distress alarm LED flashes,
and the buzzer and external speaker sounds for 2 seconds.
4. The test results are displayed.

If a printer is connected, pressing [8/PRINT/TUV] key can print out the results.
* DSC-60 DAILY TEST *

* DSC-60 dialy test *
JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26
JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26 MMSI : 123456789
MAIN CPU : OK VER.xx MAIN CPU : OK VER.xx
MODEM : OK VER.xx MODEM : OK VER.xx
RCVR1 : OK RCVR1 : OK
RCVR2 : OK RCVR2 : OK
REMOTE RT : OK FS-1562 REMOTE RT : OK FS-1562
REMOTE DP : OK DP-6 REMOTE DP : OK DP-6
Note)
The default setting of DAILY TEST in PRINT OUT submenu of “Setup menu” is set at
“MANUAL”. Set it at “AUTO” to print out the test results automatically.
The printed date and time is the data of NMEA data (ZDA) from the navaids.
To display the present program version number, press the [1 RT] key five times
while pressing the [* FILE] key.
5. Pressing [CANCEL] key returns the screen to DSC standby screen.
B4-12
DSC60
7. Setup menu list
B4-13
DSC60
B4-14
DSC60
B4-15
DSC60
B4-16
DSC60
Main CPU Ver:2.09 and after.
Set up Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6

MMSI X1--X9
MF/HF
WATCH RCVR
MF
LINE OUT LEVEL 0 dBm -12 - +12 dBm
0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4,
Tx KEY TIMING AUTO
5, 10, 15 sec
MIF
PROTECTION RT PORT IEC
Note) PASS
System OFF
WORD:xxxxxxx
REMOTE ON
STATION OFF
OFF
NBDP PORT
ON
CH DET S LEVEL 100 Setting: OFF – 255
INTL
REGURATION
RUSSIAN
DIST Date & UTC
B4-17
DSC60

MF/HF Radiotelephone
To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below.
The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX).
1. Pressing [#/SETUP] key reveals “Setup menu” screen. Select TEST and press [ENT]
key. Then, the following “Test function” screen appears.
* * Setup menu * * * * Test function * *

ALARM SCAN FREQ [ENT] TONE AF PCB
AUTO ACK USER CH BK CONT PCB
ERASE FILE VOLUME REMOTE PANEL PCB
MESSAGE EXT ALARM RX PCB
POSITION TEST EXT ALERT TA TEST
PRINT OUT SYSTEM
PROTECTION : ON
To execute the test function, cancel “PROTECTION”. Enter “652111” from the
numeric keys.
2. Selecting TONE and pressing [ENT] key reveals a submenu.

Choose MARK or SPACE on the submenu, and turn the signal “ON” by pressing
[ENT] key. For example, choose “MARK”.
MARK :OFF * * Test function * *

SPACE :OFF TONE AF PCB
BK CONT PCB
DOT :OFF
REMOTE PANEL PCB
EXT ALARM RX PCB
EXT ALERT TA TEST
MARK:1700Hz – 85Hz
SPACE:1700Hz + 85Hz PROTECTION : OFF
DOT:1700Hz + 85Hz
3. Transmit power by turn ON the handset PTT switch of DSC-60, and measure the
frequency and power.
4. To measure other frequencies, turn OFF the handset PTT switch and change the
frequency of MF/HF radiotelephone. Repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. After the completion of the measurements, turn off power for DSC-60.
B4-18
DSC60
9. How to update system program

9.1 Over view
The program disk supplied includes two programs: main program and modem program.
To update the system program, DIP switch #1 and #2 of S3 on the
CONTROL/MODEM board must be set to ON position. Either of an IB-581 or a PC
PC/AT compatible is connected as follows.
Using IB-581 Using PC

Any IB-581 can be used. The PC is connected to the DSC-60 as
below.
DSC-60 DSC-60
NBDP COM-1
S3 NBDP RS-232C
S3
ON IB-581 ON PC
KEY
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
(NBDP)
Key (NBDP)
board
Connection between DSC-60 and PC/IB-581
The connection is made with the following interconnection cable. The connector to the
DSC-60 is a 25-pin D-SUB male, and to the IB-581 or PC a 9-pin D-SUB female.
D-SUB 9pin D-SUB 25pin
DCD 1 1 F.GND
RXD 2 2 SD
TXD 3 3 RD
DTR 4 4 RTS
GND 5 5 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
RTS 7 7 S.GND
CTS 8 8 NC
RI 9 9 S.GND
10 NC
19 NC
20 DTR
21 TD-A
22 TD-B
23 RD-A
24 RD-B
25 NC
B4-19
DSC60
9.2 Updating MAIN program with IB-581

1. Connect the IB-581 to the DSC-60.
2. Turn on the IB-581, but do not turned on the DSC-60.
3. Terminate the terminal program.

When using IB-581 for DP-6, FELCOM 12/81, while press and holding down [Alt]
and [Fn], press [F2]. For example, A:\DP10\TERMINAL appears on the DP-6
terminal.
When using IB-581 for FELCOM 11, press [F1] and [8] in order.
4. Insert the program floppy disk in the slot.
5. Type B: and press [Enter]. The prompt B:\> appears.
6. Type “UPDSC” and press [Enter]. The following message appears.
Program upload utility Version 6.21

Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.1997,1998,1999 (T.K)
uppg infile 1 infile 2 p1 p2 p4 p5
p1:Deletion waiting time.
p2:Waiting time to write.
p3:Password output interval.
p4:ID number.(1,2...)
p5:Poer number.(1,2...)
Erase Wait:osec
Wait:o
Wait counter=100
Port no.=1
TARGET POWER ON.
7. Turn on the DSC-60.

The indication on the DSC screen changes as below. The picture on the IB-581 runs.
8. Wait for about 5 minutes.
9. The DOS prompt appears after the message “Finish version up.”
10. Turn off the DSC-60, disconnect the IB-581 and turn on the DSC-60 again.
11. Press [3/TEST/DEF] to perform the selftest and confirm the program has been
updated.
*** Checking program Version, refer to section “6.Self test”. ***
B4-20
DSC60
9.3 Updating MODEM program with IB-581

1. Connect the IB-581 to the DSC-60.
2. Turn on the IB-581, but do not turned on the DSC-60.
3. Terminate the terminal program.

When using IB-581 for DP-6, FELCOM 12/81, while press and holding down [Alt]
and [Fn], press [F2]. For example, A:\DP10\TERMINAL appears on the DP-6
terminal.
When using IB-581 for FELCOM 11, press [F1] and [8] in order.
4. Insert the program floppy disk in the slot.
5. Type B: and press [Enter]. The prompt B:\> appears.
6. Type “UPMODEM” and press [Enter]. The following message appears.

Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.1997,1998,1999 (T.K)
uppg infile 1 infile 2 p1 p2 p4 p5
p4:ID number.(1,2...)
p5:Poer number.(1,2...)
Erase Wait:osec
Wait:o
Wait counter=100
Port no.=1
TARGET POWER ON.
7. Turn on the DSC-60.

The message “Now Loading” appears on the DSC screen. The picture on the IB-581
runs.
8. Wait for about 5 minutes.
9. The DOS prompt appears after the message “Finish version up.”
10. Turn off the DSC-60, disconnect the IB-581 and turn on the DSC-60 again.
11. Press [3/TEST/DEF] to perform the self test and confirm the program has been
updated.
*** Checking program Version, refer to section “6.Self test”. ***
B4-21
Section C1. AA-50
1. Over view
The AA-50 MF/HF DSC Watch Receiver receives distress and safety frequencies (max.
6), and are mainly fitted on the vessels which operate in ocean areas A3 and A4.
Receiving distress and safety calls
Receiving general calls
AA-50
Receiver
Receiving
DSC-5
or
Transmitting FS-xxxx
DSC-6 Relay
K2, 3
Relay turns upward upon receiving

distress and safety calls.
Note) SOLAS Chapter-4 Regulation 12 (watch)

1. Every ship, while at sea, shall maintain a continuous watch:
.1 on VHF DSC channel 70, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of
regulation 7.1.2, is fitted with a VHF radio installation;
.2 on the distress and safety DSC frequency 2,187.5kHz, if the ship, in
accordance with the requirements of regulation 9.1.2 or 10.1.3, is fitted with
an MF radio installation;
.3 on the distress and safety DSC frequencies 2,187.5kHz and 8,414.5kHz and
also on at least one of the distress and safety DSC frequencies 4,207.5kHz,
6,321kHz, 12,577kHz or 16,804.5kHz, appropriate to the time of day and
geographical position of the ship, if the ship, in accordance with the
requirements of regulation 10.2.2 or 11.1, is fitted with an MF/HF radio
installation. This watch may be kept by means of a scanning receiver;
.4 for satellite shore to ship distress alerts, if the ship, in accordance with the
requirement of regulation 10.1.1, is fitted with an INMARSAT ship earth
station.
C1-1
AA-50
2. Connection
2.6m Whip antenna
FAX-5
ANT
DSC-5 DSC MF-HF T/R

RS-232C RS-232C
or AA-50 FS-xxxx
DSC-6 MF/HF Rx REM
Connection
ANT
BREAKER 10.0V-40.0V
MF-HF T/R DSC
2A
The potentionmeter for adjustment of
LINE OUTPUT LEVEL (+10dBm adjustable)
is on the rear panel. LINE LEVEL
It is pre-adjusted at the factory (0dBm output) Grounding Terminal
0dBm
for use with the DSC-5/6.
To Receiver or Radiotelephon To DSC Terminal:DSC-5/6

:RV-xxxG/FS-xxxx
AA-50 Rear Panel
3. Jumper setting
When the Pre-AMP unit (FAX-5) is installed, the jumper block of J9 on the Receiver
Board must be set to “ACTIVE” to supply about 9Vdc to the Pre-AMP unit.
2.6m Whip antenna
FAX-5
Receiver Board
J1
To Antenna J9 Factory setting:Active

Active
Note) ACTIVE Antenna : 2.6m Whip antenna + FAX-5
C1-2
AA-50
4. Self test
1. Tune on the power. (Scanning starts.)
2. Press the TEST switch. (“TEST” LED lights.)

*If problem, the “frequency” LEDs light in order.
2187.5 4207.5 6312 16804.5 REMOTE (Note)
Lighting Lighting Lighting Lighting Lighting
*If error, Frequency indication LEDs blink. To restart scanning, press any key.
(RCVR board or OSC board is suspected to be faulty)
3. The self test stops automatically and scanning restarts.

(“TEST” LED goes off.)
Note)
The “REMOTE” LED blinks when the AA-50 and DSC-5 (DSC-6) do exchange data.
Cause: DSC turned off, cable between AA-50 and DSC-5 (DSC-6) loosened or
Disconnected, or wrong DSC system settings
DSC-5: [Remote-E] setting ---“OFF” and “TERM”,
DSC-6: [Type] setting ------ “OFF”.
To restart scanning, press any key.
C1-3
DP-5
Section D1. DP-5
1. Connection
Power
PP-500
PP-510
Printer
GLL, RMA, RMC, VTG

DBT, MTW, VHW, TRF
NAV Device
NMEA/CIF Printer
REM REM-A(RT) Key board
MF/HF RT Key board

*
DP-5 CONTROL
NBDP REM-B(DSC)
MF/HF DSC 24VDC
*
* When the radiotelephone (DSC) is connected to REM-A port,

set to RT (DSC) on F6: terminal menu.
* When the DSC (radiotelephone) is connected to REM-B port,
set to DSC (RT) on F6: terminal menu.
DP-5
REM Distributor REM-A
FS-1562
(05P0606) MF/HF Rx NBDP
MF/HF TR
AA-50 DSC
DSC-5/6
REM-B
REM 1 or 2 or 3
REM-A DP-5
FS-5000
REM 2 or 3 or 1 MF/HF Rx NBDP
MF/HF TR
AA-50 DSC
DSC-5/6
REM-B
D1-1
DP-5
2. Setting list
Function Item Default Setting Note

F3:Operate 6:Manual Reception AUTO AUTO
To enter appropriate station at
1:Station Entry Storing
least one.
Password: ANSWER CODE
6:Answerback Code Entry MMSI+CS+X
(Caps Lock)
7:Group ID Entry
F5:Station
(4/5 digit)
8:Group ID Entry (9 digit)
Password: ID CODE
9:Select ID Entry
X1 –X5 (Caps Lock)
(4/5 digit)
0:Select ID Entry (9 digit) MMSI
RX MSG Save OFF OFF
Active file Auto Send OFF OFF
Signal Tracking OFF ON
Edit before sending NO YES or NO
ARQ Error count OFF ON
Communication time OFF ON
Dual font (Bold:Sending) OFF ON
Echo ON ON
Sending Volume display OFF ON
Comm. Status display OFF ON
*ARQ/FEC Center Freq 1700 1700 Pass word:DP5(Caps Lock)

*Shift Freq +85 +85 Don’t change.
DIRC Center Freq 1700 1700
Shift Freq +85 +85
F6:Teminal Rate 60 60
CW Mode Frq 1615 1615
Rate 10 10
Line Out Level (dBm) 0 0
*Remote A Mode OFF RT

*Rate (baud) 4800 4800 Pass word:DP5(Caps Lock)
*Start Bit 1Bit 1Bit
*Date Bit 7Bit 7Bit Don’t change.
*Stop Bit 2Bit 2Bit Note) RT is connected to REM-A
*Parity Bit Even Even port.
*Delimiter CR CR
MIF Tune OFF OFF
Freeze OFF OFF
FS-1562:OFF
AGC OFF ON or OFF
FS-5000:ON or OFF
*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting.
D1-2
DP-5

*Remote B Mode OFF DSC
*Rate (baud) 4800 4800
Pass word: DP5(Caps Lock)
*Start Bit 1Bit 1Bit
*Date Bit 7Bit 7Bit
Don’t change.
*Stop Bit 2Bit 2Bit
Note) DSC is connected to
*Parity Bit Even Even REM-B port.
*Delimiter CR CR
F6:Teminal
MIF Tune OFF OFF
Freeze OFF OFF
AGC OFF OFF
CIF or Pass word: DP5(CAPS LOCK)

CIF/NMEA Mode CIF
NMEA Jumper setting: JP-2 on the
CIF Rate (baud) 4800 CIF:4800 CONTROL Board.
Monitor OFF Line OUT
Line In Level 4 4
Line Out Level 4 4
Beep Level 4 4
CRT Economy Mode OFF ON
File Partial View OFF ON
*Slave Delay 5 msec 5 msec Pass word: DP5(Caps Lock)
*BK Timing Pre tone 10 msec 10 msec
*Post Tone 0 msec 0 msec Note) Refer to next page.
*Mute Timing Pre BK 0 msec 0 msec *Timing depends on the type
of the transceiver unit
*Post BK 0 msec 0 msec
F8: System connected.
Reception Alarm ON ON
Time System OFF UTC
Time & Date 90/1/1 Setting
Printer PP-500 PP-500 PP-500/510 is connected.
Header File Name ON ON
Time ON ON
Footer OFF OFF
Language Normal Normal
Self Test
Version No. Ver x.xx
Modem Version No. Ver x.xx
D1-3
DP-5
Reference)
Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit connected.
Setting of timing list

RC-258
F6:System FS-5000 FS-1502
FS-1562 FS-1503 RC-508
Timing (m sec) FS-8000 FS-1552
RC-808
Slave Delay 5 5 5 50 5
BK Timing Pre tone 10 10 10 50 5
Post Tone 0 0 0 10 0
Mute Timing Pre BK 0 0 0 0 0
Post BK 0 0 0 0 0
DP-5 F6:Terminal
OFF ON or OFF OFF OFF OFF
MIF AGC
Remarks 9982:1 Tx delay time
RT :System or
9906: 10msec 9910:10 msec Default: --
settings (9913:10msec)
(9917:BK ON)
30 msec
D1-4
DP-5
3. Initial settings
3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry
Enter vessel’s answerback code AAB and ID code as follows. “Page D1-13” describes
how to change AAB and IDs.
1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu.

Station
1: Station Entry
2: Timer Operation Entry
3: Scan Entry
4: Scramble Code Entery
5: User Channel Entery
6: Answerback Code Entry
7: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit)

8: Group ID Entry (9 digit)
9: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit)
0: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
2. Press [6] key to select “Answerback code Entry”, or operate the cursor to highlight
item to [6], and press the [Enter] key.
The display should look something like below.
Answerback Code Entry
Answerback Code
3. Enter vessel’s answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks
for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.
Answerback Code
OK
432456789 FURU X Cancel
Caution
Confirm the “CODE” before pressing ENTER key.
You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.
4. Do the same to enter IDs.
D1-5
DP-5
3.2 Terminal settings (F6)
Press function key [F6] to display the Terminal display.

To change settings, first, select “Change” on the top (Set UP) line. Press the [↓] key to
select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option.
“Default” on the setup line is for factory use.
“Section 4.2” describes how to change Terminal menu.
Don’t change !!
Don’t change.
Note) RT is connected to
REM-A port.
FS-1562:OFF
Don’t change.
Note) DSC is connected
to REM-B port.
D1-6
DP-5
Terminal menu Description (F6)
D1-7
DP-5
D1-8
DP-5
3.3 System settings (F8)
Press function key [F8] to display the System screen.

To change settings, first, select “Change” on the top (Set UP) line. Press the [↓] key to
“Section 4.2” describes how to change Terminal menu.
Don’t change.
Note) Refer to Setting
of timing.
(Page D1-4.)
When the PP-500/510

is connected.
*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting
D1-9
DP-5
System menu Description (F8)

*:protected
D1-10
DP-5
D1-11
DP-5
3.4 Manual Reception (F3-6)
Selects communication mode for reception.

1. Press Function key [F3] and then the [6] key.
2. Select receive mode: “AUTO”. (Default)

Manual Reception
AUTO ARQ FEC DIRC
3. Press the [Enter] key. The reception mode: AUTO appears on the screen.
Note)
*AUTO mode : Automatic operation in ARQ and FEC.
ARQ mode : ARQ mode only.
FEC mode :FEC mode only
DIRC mode : DIRC mode only
3.5 NAV data format selection (CIF/NMEA)
Jumper wire JP2 on the CONTROL board selects the format of the signal from the
navigator connected to the DP-5.
CONTROL board
Receiving NAV data;

ROMs
CIF :Short
GLL, RMA, RMC,
NMEA :Open (Factory setting)
VTG, DBT, MTW,
JP2
VHW, TRF
1. Call up the F6: Terminal menu screen that the format selected invalid.
Then press DP5 in this order to enable NMEA/CIF mode selection.
2. Press the down arrow key to display the NMEA/CIF mode selection screen.
3. To change the mode, move the cursor from “Look” to “Change” by pressing the right
arrow key. Place the cursor at the NMEA/CIF mode position with the down arrow
key, then select a format. Then press the [ENTER] key to return to the normal
display.
D1-12
DP-5
4. Changing AAB, ID code,

Terminal and System settings
4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code
Answerback and ID codes can be changed as follows:

Station
1: Station Entry
3: Scan Entry
4: Scramble Code Entery

2. Press [6] key and [Enter] keys in order.
3. Press the [Caps Lock] key to type in upper case letters.

Type [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].
Answerback Code
4. Enter vessel’s new answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel”
asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.
5. Do the same to changing IDs.

For IDs code, type [I] [D] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].
D1-13
DP-5
4.2 Changing F6 and F8 settings
To change “Locked” items in [F6] and [F8] menus.
1. For example, press function key [F6]: Terminal.
2.Press the [Caps Lock] key to type in upper case letter.

Type [D] [P] [5].
3. To change settings, select “Change” on the top line. Press the [↓] key to select item,
then press the [→] [←] key to select option.
Note) To select the default setting, select “Default” on the top line, and then press
[Enter] key.
D1-14
DP-5
5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM

5.1 S-RAM clear
The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three
ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the
NMI switch on the rear panel as below.
Procedure
2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.
NMI SW
REMOTE A REMOTE B
CIF/NMEA
PRINTER CONTROL
Rear panel view of DP-5
3. After several seconds, the normal display comes on automatically.
When clearing S-RAM, Message and Log file is erased.
D1-15
DP-5
5.2 EEROM Clear
1. Press function key [F8] to open the "System" menu. To change setting, move the
cursor to "Change" on the top line. Press the [↓] key to select "Self Test", then press
[Enter] key. "Self Test" menu appears on the display.
2. Select "EEROM" on the Self Test menu, then press [Enter] key.
3. EEROM check starts automatically. ( Check Address counts up.)
4. Press [ESC] key while EEROM check is carried out.

The message "EE-ROM check completed. Press any key to escape." appears on
the display.
5. Press [C] while pressing [Ctrl] key.
6. "Self Test" menu appears on the display.
7. Turn OFF power and ON again.
8. "WRITING to EEROM" appears on the display.
9. Normal display is shown automatically about one minute later.
EEROM contents
[F5]: Station menu
[F6]: Terminal menu
[F7]: Editor menu
[F8]: System menu
D1-16
Section D2. DP-6
1. Connection
Key board
Key board 24VDC
IB-581
Printer Printer Terminal unit
24VDC
Printer
(PP-510)
COM-2 NC COM-1
GLL, RMA, RMC, VTG

DBT, MTW, VHW, TRF
NAV Device
ICE1162(NMEA) Terminal
REM REM-A(RT) 24VDC

*MF/HF RT DP-6
Main unit
NBDP REM-B(DSC)
*MF/HF DSC
*MF/HF Radiotelephone :FS-5000, FS-1562 series

*MF/HF DSC :DSC-5/6/60
DP-6
REM Distributor REM-A
FS-1562
(05P0606) MF/HF Rx NBDP
(Main unit)
MF/HF TR
AA-50 DSC
DSC-6
REM-B
or
RT NBDP
DSC-60
Note)
Remote A and B ports of Main unit are connected to FS-1562 and DSC-6.
The Distributor board (05P0606) is necessary in the RC-1500 console.
REM 1 or 2 or 3
REM-A DP-6
FS-5000 (Main Unit)
REM 2 or 3 or 1 MF/HF Rx NBDP
MF/HF TR
AA-50 DSC
DSC-5/6
REM-B
or
RT NBDP
DSC-60
D2-1
DP-6
2. Settings list

F3:Operate 6:Manual Reception AUTO AUTO
Terminal
Ver20 and
Password: ANSWER CODE
5:Answerback Code Entry after
MMSI+CS(4
(Caps Lock)
F5:Station digit) +X
6:Group ID Entry (4/5 digit)
7:Group ID Entry (9 digit) Password: ID CODE
8:Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) X1 –X5 (Caps Lock)
9:Select ID Entry (9 digit) MMSI
*Slave Delay 5 msec 5 msec Password: DP6
*BK Timing Pre tone 10 msec 10 msec (Caps Lock)
*Post Tone 0 msec 0 msec
*Mute Timing Pre BK 0 msec 0 msec Note) Timing depends on the
*Post BK 0 msec 0 msec type of the transceiver unit
*Modem Output Level 0 dBm 0 dBm connected. See to “Reference”.
MIF Tune OFF OFF
Freeze OFF OFF
F6:System FS-1562:OFF,
AGC OFF ON or OFF
FS-5000:ON or OFF
Emission ON ON
TX/RX MSG Save OFF ON or OFF
Edit Before sending OFF On or OFF
Time System UTC UTC
ZDA (Terminal Ver 17 and after)
Time & Date --- Note) When NMEA data is not
connected, entry by manual.
Display Mode Normal Normal
Language Normal Normal Password: DP6
Fn+F1
Printer PP-510 PP-510 (Caps Lock)
*: Password is needed for change of these setting.
Reference)
Timing values depend on the transceiver connected.
Setting of timing
RC-258
F6:System FS-5000 FS-1502
FS-1562 FS-1503 RC-508
Timing (m sec) FS-8000 FS-1552
RC-808
Slave Delay 5 5 5 50 5
BK Timing Pre tone 10 10 10 50 5
Post Tone 0 0 0 10 0
Mute Timing Pre BK 0 0 0 0 0
Post BK 0 0 0 0 0
DP-6 F6:System
OFF ON or OFF OFF OFF OFF
MIF AGC
Remarks 9982:1 Tx delay time
RT :System
9906: 10msec (9913:10msec) 9910:10 msec Default: --
settings (9917:BK ON) 30 msec
D2-2
DP-6
3. Initial settings
3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry
Enter vessel’s answerback code and ID code as follows. “Section 4” describes how to
change AAB and IDs.

Station
1: Station Entry
3: Scan Entry

2. Press [6] key to select “Answerback code Entry”, or operate the cursor to highlight
item to [6], and press the [Enter] key. The display should look something like below.

Answerback Code
3. Enter vessel’s answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks
for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.
Answerback Code Terminal program Ver 20 and later,
OK AAB: MMSI(9digits)+4charctor+X
432456789 FURU X Cancel
Caution
Confirm the “CODE” before pressing ENTER key.
You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.
4. Do the same to enter IDs.
D2-3
DP-6
3.2 System settings (F6)

Press function key [F6] to display the System display.
To change settings, first, select “change” on the top (Setup) line. Press the [↓] key to
“Section 4.2” describes how to change System menu.
Don’t change !!
*Password is needed for
change of these setting.
Pass word: DP6
(Caps Lock)
FS-1500 serise:OFF
Enter setting referring to below.

MIF Tune OFF
Freeze OFF
AGC OFF: FS-1562 ON or OFF: FS-5000
Emission ON
Tx/Rx MSG Save ON or OFF
Edit before sending ON or OFF
D2-4
DP-6
F6: Menu description
Timing values depend on the transceiver connected. Therefore some trial and
error may be necessary to find suitable values.
*MIF Tune
Turn on to send ATU tuning command.
*Freeze
Turn on to send “freeze” command to radio equipment connected.
*AGC
Turn on to automatically control gain in telex mode.
(FS-1500 series RT is not supports AGC command.)
*Emission
Turn on to automatically change mode at RT to telex.
*Tx/Rx MSG Save
Turn on to automatically save incoming and outgoing message to FDD.
*Edit before sending
“No” transmits keying operation one by one. “Yes” transmits message only
when the [Enter] key is pressed after confirming text typed.
D2-5
DP-6
3.3 Manual Reception (F3-6)

Selects communication mode for reception.
1. Press Function key [F3] and then the [6] key.
2. Select receive mode: “AUTO”. (Default)

Manual Reception
AUTO ARQ FEC DIRC
3. Press the [Enter] key. The reception mode: AUTO appears on the screen.
Note)
*AUTO mode : Automatic operation in ARQ and FEC.
ARQ mode : ARQ mode only.
FEC mode :FEC mode only
DIRC mode : Not use
3.4 Printer and Language setting

Press [F1] while pressing [Fn] keys. The “Set up” will appear on the screen.
Set up
Language Normal Norway Sweden UK
Printer PP-510 Other
Default Setting)
Printer: PP-510
Language: Normal
When you change the Printer or Language setting, enter “unlocking” code in upper case
letter: [D] [P] [6].
D2-6
DP-6
4. Changing AAB, ID code and System settings

4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code
Answerback and ID codes can be changed as follows:

Station
1: Station Entry
3: Scan Entry

2. Press [6] key and [Enter] keys in order.
3. Press the [Caps Lock] key to type letters.

Type [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].
Answerback Code
4. Enter vessel’s new answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel”
asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again.
5. Do the same to changing IDs.

For IDs code, type [I] [D] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].
D2-7
DP-6
4.2 Changing F6: System settings
To change “Locked” items in [F6] and [F1]+[Fn] menus.
1. For example, press function key [F6]: System.
2.Press the [Caps Lock] key to enter upper case letters.

Type [D] [P] [6].
3. To change settings, Select “Change” on the top line. Press the [↓] key to select item,
then press the [→] [←] key to select option.
Note) To select the default setting, select “Default” on the top line, and then press
[Enter] key.
D2-8
DP-6
5. Self Test
To run the self test.
1. Press [F6] to display the system menu.
2. Press [→] to display Change in reverse video.
3. Press [↓] to select Self Test.
4. Press the [Enter] key to start the test.
5. Print out printer test.
Test description
*Terminal unit test
Displays terminal unit version No.
*Main unit test
Displays MODEM board version no. If NG (No good) appears check
communication cable and if main unit is powered.
*Radio unit test
Transmits CAID command in MIF format to external equipment, and name of
external equipment returns. if NG (No good) appears check communication
cable and if SSB radiotelephone is powered.
*DSC unit test
Transmits CAID command in MIF format to external equipment, and name of
external equipment returns. If NG (No good) appears check communication
cable and if DSC terminal is powered.
*Printer unit test
If NG appears check if printer is powered and if cable between printer and
terminal is connected.
D2-9
DP-6
6. How to Update Programs
6.1 Terminal Program

Note) The program floppy disk supplied contains both the terminal and main (main
unit) programs.
1. Quit the terminal program.

With the terminal program version -16 or later,
- press [F2]while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
With the version -15 or earlier,
- press [F2] while pressing [Fn] key.
The prompt, "A: \>DP10\TERMINAL>", will appear on the screen.
Note) When updating the terminal program of Ver.-11 or prior, delete "DP10.SAV"
file in advance.
1) Quit the terminal program. "A:\>DP10\TERMINAL>" will appear.
2) Confirm the above file, DP10.SAV
- Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively.
3) Files in "A:\>DP10\TERMINAL>" directory will shown.
4) If there is "DP10.SAV" file, delete it as follows.
- Press [D], [E], [L], [Space], [D], [P], [1], [0], [.], [S], [A], [V], and
[Enter] key successively.
2. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive.
3. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys,

- [B], [:], and [Enter], successively.
The prompt, "B:\>", will appear on the screen.
D2-10
DP-6
4. To update the terminal program,

(Terminal Program for Standard)
- press keys, [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L], and [Enter], successively.
Then, the updating will proceed automatically by following the instructions as shown
below:
1) After a message, "Overwrite A:\DP10>----- (Yes/No/All)?", has appeared,
- Then, press keys, [A] and [Enter] , successively.
2) After a message "Press any key to continue." has appeared,
- press any key, for example, [Enter] key.
(Terminal Program for Russian)

- press keys, [R], [U], [S], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter], successively.
Then, the updating will proceed automatically by following the instructions as
shown below:
After a message "Press any key to continue." has appeared,
- press any key, for example, [Enter] key.
Reference)
(1) Press [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for
composing messages between English and Russian.
(2) To install the new program for English version,
- successively press keys, [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L], and [Enter].
The updating automatically proceeds by following instructions to be displayed.
5. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "A:\>".
6. Turn off once and on again the terminal unit.
Confirming program version

To confirm the version of the Terminalv program, execute "[F6]:System ---> Self-Test".
D2-11
DP-6
6.2 Main: Main Unit Program

With the terminal program version -16 or later,
- press [F2] while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
With the version -15 or earlier,
- press [F2] while pressing [Fn] key.
The prompt, "A:\DP10\TERMINAL>", will appear on the screen.

- [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt, "B:\>", will appear.
4. Turn off once and on again the DP-6 (main unit).
5. To update the main unit program,

- press keys, [N], [B], [D], [P], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] key, successively.
6. After a message "DP-10 File Update" has appeared,

- press [F1] key.
6. - Press [N], [B], [D], [P], [.], [E], [X], [E], and [Enter] keys successively for
"File Name".
If an error message "Timeover Err" appears, turn off and on again the DP-6 main
unit after pressing [Esc] key. Then, try again from step 6.
8. Wait about 5 minutes until the "%" of "File Data Transferring" display reaches 100%.
9. When "Transfer Complete" is displayed, the main unit program updating has finished.
10. Turn off once and on again power of the main and terminal units.

To confirm the version of the main program, execute "[F6]:System ---> Self-Test".
D2-12
Section E1. FM-7000
1. Connection
ANT CH70 ANT
REMOTE 1 VHF RT
MIC DSC-5V
CH70 WR
FM-7000-F REMOTE 2
12VDC RB-700
SPKR
EXT SP
& Wing Handset
FM-7000 + DSC-5V (with Channel 70 watch receiver board)
ANT
REMOTE 1 VHF RT
MIC
DSC-5
FM-7000-E-HK
REMOTE 2
12VDC RB-700
CH70 WR SPKR
EXT SP
& Wing Handset
FM-7000 (with Channel 70 watch receiver board) + DSC-5
E1-1
FM-7000
2. System Settings
Preset jumper connections on the PANL board, RX board and SUB-CPU board (option)
according to local regulations. You can make USA CH 2/3/4 inoperative.
2.1
Note)
E1-2
FM-7000
E1-3
FM-7000
E1-4
FM-7000
Not use in GMDSS
E1-3.
To default settings
E1-5
FM-7000
E1-6
FM-7000
E1-7
FM-7000
Not use in GMDSS
Not use in GMDSS
E. Registration of steps A to D
Registered
E1-8
FM-7000
2.2
JP2 (CH70: refer to page FM7000-11)
E1-9
FM-7000
2.3
E1-10
FM-7000
2.4
E1-11
FM-7000
3. Adjustment
3.1 Tx Power Adjustment
Item Rating Check Point Adjuster Condition

SIMP 20 to 25 W R54 Simplex CH, Power: HI
DUP 18 to 25 W R55 Duplex CH, Power: HI
LOW Loss than 1 W R56 CH16, Power: LOW
ANT connector
CH16, Power: HI
Hot Power 6 to 8 W R53 (Temporarily disconnected
lead wire of posistor RT1.)
Note)
Hot power;
It reduces the power automatically to 6 to 7 w when the temperature at the power
amplifiers exceeds 100 degrees (actually 85 degrees)“HI” indication blinks when power
is reduced.
MAIN UNIT Pick up

Power
meter
PA
TX Board ANT
RT1
R56 [Low]
R55 [DUP] Frequency
To check "HOT" Counter
power,remove RT1 R54 [SIMP]
at solder side. R53 [Hot]
VCO
C68
Frequency ADJ. Power ADJ.
3.2 Frequency Adjustment
TX Freq. on CH16 (Rating) Conditions Adjuster

156.8 MHz±300Hz C68
PTT: ON
(Rule: ±10ppm) (TX Board)
If the frequency is out of the rating, adjust C68 on TX Board to correct.

(Adjust to PLL reference OSC: 8 MHz )
E1-12
FM-7000
4. Self Test
The built-in self test-diagnosis tests checks the EEROM, Keyboard, PTT switch and auto
revert rest for proper operation.
E1-13
FM-7000
Keyboard/Switch Check
To check the keyboard, PTT switch, and auto revert rest, press them in succession.
E1-14
FM-7000
E1-15
FM-7000
Error Messages
The LCD displays error messages to alert you to possible equipment fault. The table
below describes these error messages.
E1-16
FM-7000
5. Private Channel List
E1-17
FM-7000
E1-18
FM-7000
E1-19
Section E2. FM-7500
1. Connection
The FM-7500 VHF Radiotelephone consists of;

-VHF Radiotelephone FM-7000
-DSC Terminal DSC-5
-Power unit
ANT
REMOTE 1
MIC CIF/NMEA
DSC-5
VHF RT
FM-7000 REMOTE 2 12VDC
RB-700
CH70 WR SPKR
EXT SP
& Wing Handset
12VDC
AC100/220V EXT SP
AC/DC & Wing Handset
12VDC
24VDC Power supply
FM-7500
2. Settings
Referring to FM-7000 and DSC-5 setting list.
E2-1
Section E3. FM-8000
1. Connection
The FM-8000 enables GMDSS operation with VHF DSC terminal, DSC-8V.
T/R antenna CH70 antenna
ANT
ANT
REMOTE 1 VHF RT
MIC
DSC-8V
FM-8000 REMOTE 2
24VDC RB-700
SPKR
EXT SP
& Wing Handset
2. System Settings
2.1 Changing System setting
E3-1
FM-8000
E3-2
FM-8000
E3-3
FM-8000
E3-4
FM-8000
2.2 Channel Preset (CH0 to CH255 available)
E3-5
FM-8000
E3-6
FM-8000
E3-7
FM-8000
3. Adjustment
3.1 Tx Power Adjustment
Item Rating Check Point Adjuster Condition

High Power 20 to 25 W R54 CH16, Power: HI
Low Power Loss than 1 W R56 CH16, Power: LOW
ANT connector CH16, Power: HI
Hot Power 6 to 8 W R53 (Temporarily disconnected lead
wire of posistor RT1.)
Note)
Hot power;
It reduces the power automatically to 6 to 7 w when the temperature at the power
amplifiers exceeds 100 degrees (actually 85 degrees) “HI” indication blinks when power
is reduced.
MAIN UNIT Pick up

Power
meter
PA
TX Board ANT
RT1
R56 [Low]
Frequency
To check "HOT" Counter
R54 [High]
power,remove RT1
at solder side. R53 [Hot]
VCO
C67
Frequency ADJ. Power ADJ.
3.2 Frequency Adjustment
TX Freq. on CH16 (Rating) Conditions Adjuster

156.8 MHz±300Hz C67
PTT: ON
(Rule: ±10ppm) (TX Board)
If the frequency is out of the rating, adjust C67 on TX Board to correct.

(Adjust to PLL reference OSC: 8 MHz )
E3-8
FM-8000
4. Self test
E3-9
FM-8000
E3-10
FM-8000
Error Indication
E3-3.
E3-3.
E3-11
FM-8000
E3-12
FM-8000
5. Private Channel List
E3-13
FM-8000
E3-14
FM-8000
E3-15
Section E4. FM-8500
FM-8500
1. Connection
Note)
For RMC, data (month and day) are
entered in the log, and for GLL, time
(hour/min/sec) is entered in the log.
FM-8500 rear view, showing connector location
E4-1
FM-8500
2. System settings
2.1 Initial Settings

This section provides how to set up the following items.
1. Ship’s ID number 4. Channel system settings
2. DSC block settings 5. Selection of LCD display, Japanese or English
3. VHF block settings 6. Protection (on/off)
Protection OFF
Refer to section “2.2Changing system settings”.
TEST VHF ch70

(*1)
manual
[SELECT] [9]
System < Rom version > RT3-Time out timer < OFF >
V P ID DSC RT CH PO L OFF [1] ON [2]
Disable or continue after a long transmission.
Select "ID" press the [ENT] key. For USA, set to ON, Not effective unless USA mode is enabled.
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
Enter own identification Refer to section “5 changing ID
RT4-TX AF monitor < OFF >
[digits] MMSI: - - - - - - - - - and Private mode”.
OFF [1] ON [2] OFF !!
Enter own ship's ID and the [ENT] key twice. Disable or enable monitoring of external equipment;
For example, Remote Station RB-700 is monitored.
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key.
DSC : Receiver < CH70 >
CH70 [1] VHF [2] RT5-Auto 1W < ON >
When two FM-8500s are installed, designate ON [1] OFF [2]
one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). ON:Automatic setting of 1W when selecting the low output power
The default setting is "CH70" as mainunit. channel set by "Channel Preset" operation.
Select "CH70" or "VHF" press the [ENT] key. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
DSC : remote DMC ON RT6-Dual watch < ON >

ON [1] OFF [2] ON [1] OFF [2]
Select whether DMC-5 is connected or not. Disable or enable dual watch.
(ON:connected)
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key twice.
RT6-Scanning < ON >
RT1-Mode : USA/WX < OFF >
ON [1] OFF [2]
ON [1] OFF [2]
Disable or enable the USA/WX mode. Disable or enable channel scanning.

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
RT7-Auto SQ <L00 H03 H030>

RT1-Mode : private < OFF > Refer to section “5.Changing ID and *You had better not change these value.
OFF [1] ON [2] LOW= 00 HIGH HOLD
Private mode”.
Disable or enable the PRIVATE channel mode. Settings auto SQ function (*better not change these value)
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key. LOW:Enter lowest limt of voice frequency which open
automatic SQ. Enter value by the following formula.
RT2-Hook work : CH16 < ON > Setting value x 50 = Low Frequency
HIGH:Enter highest frequency which opens automatic SQ.
ON [1] OFF [2]
Setting value x 50 = Hi Frequency
Disable or enable watch on CH16 when handset is on hook. HOLD:Enter SQ hold time in two digits, by follwing the formula.
Setting value x 20 msec= Time desired
Press the [ENT] key 4 times .
RT2-Hook work : SP < ON >
ON [1] OFF [2] * INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI >
ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
Disable or enable speaker when handset is on hook.
(continued next page)

(*1)
E4-2
FM-8500
(From previous page)
*INTL Channel mode

* INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > The international channel setting display appears.
TX: Transmission and reception available

RX:Reception only
UN:Transmission and reception prohibited
Rotate CHANNEL knob to a select channel to be set.
Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.
INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI >

TELECOM=SIMP[1] DUP[2]
Select communication mode.

Select "SIMP" or "DUP" and press the [ENT] key .

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
Select TX power.
Select "HIGH" or "LOW" and press the [ENT] key .
To set other INTL channels.

Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
To select other mode (USA, WX or Private),

Press the [CH16] key while pressing the a CHNNEL knob. (RT program Ver-06 and later)
*USA Channel mode *PRIVATE Channel mode
USA CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > P01/ CH:- - - < - - - - - - - ->
ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3] PRIV No.SELECT: [<] [>] key
TX: Transmission and reception available Press the arrow key to select private channel
RX:Reception only (P01 to P20) to be set.
UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Press the [ENT] key.
Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key P01/ CH:001 <UNABLE>
depending on channel. ENABLE=TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI >
TELECOM=SIMP[1] DUP[2] RX:Reception only
Select communication mode. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key
depending on channel.
USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI > P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >
TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2] TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]
Select TX power. Select communication mode.

Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key. Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key.
P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >

To set other USA channels. TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
Select TX power.
Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.
*WX Channel mode
WX CH:001 < RX > To set other private channels.
ENABLE= RX[1] UNABLE[2] Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
ENABLE:WX Reception
UNABLE:WX reception prohibited
Press ENABLE[1] or UNABLE[2] key, and [Enter] key
To set other WX channels.

Press the [CANCEL] key.
System < Rom version >

V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
(continued on next page)
E4-3
FM-8500
Note)
System < Channel >
PO:TX power adjustment
V P ID DSC RT CH PO L Refer to section "6. 1 Tx Power adjustment".
Select "L" and press the [ENT] key .
LCD language < English >

E[1] J[2]
For the Tx/RX massage display in DSC and menu display,
Japanese or English is selected.
Press E[1] or J[2] key, and [Enter] key.

Select "P" and press the [ENT] key .
Protection < OFF >

ON OFF
* Important !!
Select "ON" and press the [ENT] key .
System < Channel >

To return to normal display, press [CANCEL] key several times.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
E4-4
FM-8500
2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF)

Watch VHF ch70

auto
[SELECT]
Set up menu < M.Position >

Set up menu
1 2 3 4 6 7 9 ALM
To release protection of menu 9, follow the steps below.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
[SELECT] [9] [ ]
System <Protection >

V P ID ----
Select "P" and press [ENT] key.
Enter cypher code "652111"

Protection < ON >
ON OFF
Select "OFF" and press [ENT] key.
System <Own ID number>

V P ID ----
Now you can reset the followings.

* DSC block * RT block
* Channel system * Power setting
* Setting language
The registered MMSI number and Private mode"ON or OFF" is reading only.
If you want to change MMSI number and Private mode "ON or OFF",
refer to section "5. Changing ID and Private mode".
After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu shown

below to "ON" for normal operation.
TEST VHF ch70

Importamt !!
manual
Protection <OFF>
ON OFF
Select "ON" and press [ENT] key.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
E4-5
FM-8500

[SELECT] “Setup menu”
The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item.
Setup menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note

Manual
1 L/L and UTC entered data, enter 9999 for
Position
the UTC.
ABLE ABLE
No reason
Busy
2 Auto ack
UNABLE Equip disable
Unable channel
Unable mode
ROM
ROM/RAM RAM
EEROM
NMEA
DMC
Diagnosis Remote loop
3 (Protected) Remote station
652111 Printer IF
Without the [CANCEL]
Keyboard test [DIMM] [SELECT] and
[ENT] key.
Display test
Print out test
AUTO
AUTO/MANU AUTO
4 Print out MANU
EEROM Print out to EEROM content.
Keyboard ON
6 Sound ON
click OFF
MASSAGE
7 File ADDRESS Group ID 0 MID X5 - X9
TEL No.
E4-6
FM-8500
Setup
Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Setting Note
menu
Rom RT and DSC
version version
Protection ON/OFF Pass word:652111
Own-ID To clear EEROM content.
ID (MMSI) Own ID
number (NMI SW ON)
CH70[1] When two sets are installed,
Main VHF:CH70
Receiver designate one as Main (CH70)
DSC: VHF[2] Sub VHF:VHF
RCVR/DMC
and the other as Sub (VHF).
ON[1]
DMC ON:DMC-5 is connected.
OFF[2]
OFF[1]
RT1:USA/WX By request
ON[2]
OFF[1] To clear EEROM content.
RT1:private By request
ON[2] (NMI SW ON)
RT2:Hook ON[1]
ON
work CH16 OFF[2]
RT2:Hool ON[1]
ON
work SP OFF[2]
OFF[1]
RT3:Time out OFF
ON[2]
RT1-7 RT4:AF OFF[1]
OFF
monitor ON[2]
ON[1]
9 System RT5:Auto 1W ON
OFF[2]
RT6:Dual ON[1]
ON
watch OFF[2]
ON[1]
RT6:Scanning ON
OFF[2]
LOW (00) 00
RT7:Auto SQ HIGH (03) 03
HOLD (30) 30
ENABLE CH
(TX /RX/UN)
INTL,
TELECOM
Channel USA,WX, By request
(SIMP/DUP)
PRIV
TX POWER
(HIGH/LOW)
CH60
CH CH88 Default:750 Power adjustment required.
Tx power CH14
CH60
HI/L CH88 Default:100 Power adjustment required.
CH14
LCD English[1]
English
Language Japanese[2]
Ordinary alarm ON/OFF ON
ALM
TYPE : 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 1
E4-7
FM-8500
4. Jumper Setting
Change the jumper plug setting (JP2) on the CONTROL board according to the type of
the wing microphone : Carbon MIC or Dynamic MIC.
Handset
- HS-6000FZ6 (Carbon MIC)
- HS-6000FZ5 (Dynamic MIC)
MIC Receptacle Box
-RBD-VHF (For Carbon MIC)
-RBD-VHF-B (For Dynamic MIC)
Top view of CONTROL PCB
For dynamic MIC, set R152 on the CONTROL board at fully counterclockwise (max).
No adjustment is required for carbon MIC.
E4-8
FM-8500
5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode

(DSC ROM Ver-03 and after)
Procedures
1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the power turned on.
2. Turn off the power.
3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.
Clear < Do not clear >

NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Select EEROM with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING
EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power”
will appear. Then, turn off the power,
TEST VHF ch70

manual
6. Press [SELECT] key and the [9] key, then this display will appear.
System <Rom Version>

V P ID DSC CH PO L
7. Put the cursor on “ID” by pressing [>] key and press [ENT] key.
Enter own identification

[digits] MMIS: - - - - - - - -
Changing ID number.
E4-9
FM-8500
8. Input the ID number of the own ship in nine digits, check to be sure about the input
number, and press [ENT] key. (When a wrong number is input, press [CANCEL] key
and enter the correct number.)
System <DSC:RCVR/DMC>
9. Put the cursor on “RT” and press [ENT] key twice.
RT1-Mode:private <OFF>
OFF[1] ON[2]
Setting Private mode ON or OFF.
10. After the selection, press [CANCEL] key.
System < RT 1-7 >

11. Put the cursor on “P”, and press [ENT] key.
Protection <OFF>
ON OFF
12. Select “ON”, and press [ENT] key. (By pressing [ENT] key again, the input ID
number can be confirmed. If the number is incorrect, input the correct number, from
the first step.)
13. Return to the normal display by pressing [CANCEL] key several times.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
The ID number to be input must be the MMSI number that is

allocated to the ship. Again, check that the input number is
correct.
E4-10
FM-8500
6. Adjustment
6.1 TX Power Adjustment

Connect Power meter and Dummy load or Antenna as illustrated below.
50Ω
50Ω 50Ω 50Ω
Handset FM-8500 Dummy load
Power meter or Antenna
CH60 :156.325MHz High Power :21 - 25W

CH14 :156.7MHz Low Power :0.7 - 1.0W
CH88 :157.425MHz
Must be “Protection OFF”.

*Referring to section : 2.2 Changing System settings (Protection ON/OFF)
1. At the normal display, Press [SELECT] and [9] keys in this order.
2. Select “P” by pressing the [>] keys, then press the [ENT] key.
3. Type password :652111.
4. Select “Protection OFF” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key.
“Protection OFF”
5. Select “PO” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. The following display
appears.
Tx power - CH60 <HI : 750>
SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw
Adjust high power and low power on INTL CH14, CH60 and CH88 as follows.
6. For example to adjust high power on INTL CH60;

While pressing the PTT switch, rotate the CHANNEL knob to set high power data.
Release the PTT switch when the desired value (power data) appears on the channel
display.
7. Then, press [HIGH/LOW] key. The following display appears. Adjust low power
by doing the same high power.
Tx power - CH60 <LOW : 100>
8. Change the channel to CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob.

Adjust high power and low power by doing the same as CH60.
9. After completion of power adjustment on INTL mode, adjust the output power for PRV
mode in the same procedure as for INTL power adjustment.
Note that for PRV mode, you can adjust power for each channel.
E4-11
FM-8500
Must be “Protection ON”.

*Referring to section “2.2 Changing System settings” (Protection ON/OFF)
10. After completion of power adjustment on all modes, press the [CANCEL] key.
11. Select “P”, then press the [ENT] key.
12. Select “ON”, then press the [ENT] key. “Protection ON”
13. To return to the normal display, press the [CANCEL] key several times.
6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment
Rule:+10 ppm
E4-12
FM-8500

After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly,
be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to
clear contents of S-RAMs.
Procedures

NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Clear to RAM, EEROM or ALL.

RAM clear
When select to RAM, press the [ENT] key;
Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
E4-13
FM-8500
EEROM or ALL clear

Select EEROM or ALL with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display
“Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another
display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power.
Turn the power on again.
To set the initial settings. Refer to section “2.1 Initial settings”.
TEST VHF ch70

manual
Note)
Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the
[4] key.

Item Purpose
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs.
RAM (incl. transmitted and received messages, prepared in messages in
FILE menu: [SELECT] [7], and [1], [2], [4], [6].
*Settings of [SELECT] [ALARM]
*Settings of [SELECT] [9] (System setting data)
Note)
EEROM Ship’s ID(“ID”) and Private ON/OFF setting is cleared.
Channel preset data (“CH”) and power adjustment
data (“Po”) are not restored to default setting when clearing
the EEROM.
*Settings of [SELECT] [7] (Message in files)
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and EEPROM.
ALL (There is not clear ID and Private mode settings in [SELECT]
[9] menu.)
E4-14
FM-8500
8. Self test
E4-15
FM-8500
E4-16
FM-8500
FM-8500 Self test flow
PTT TEST PTT ON
H8 CPU has in RAM the diagnostic

TX Power>15W XMT POWER:NG result for each PTT ON.
For NG, V25 CPU is notified.
END OF PTT TEST
SELF TEST
TEST ON
TX ON without PA
NO
PLL Lock? PLL Lock:NG
YES
AF YES
LOOP BACK TEST
CH70 OK?
LOOP BACK TEST
OK? NO
YES AF NO
LOOP BACK TEST
OK?
CH70 RCVR:NG CONTROL:NG
NO NO
PTT ON TEST PTT ON TEST In CH70 LOOP-BACK TEST, all
OK? OK?
other than PA is put in transmission
YES YES status and DSC signal is transmitted,
XMT POWER:NG which is received at CH 70 receiver to
see if it is a right signal by analyzing
the signal with the control.
This test allows collective diagnosis of
the transmitter, CH 70 receiver and
VHF DSC:GOOD VHF DSC:NG
control.
In AF LOOP-BACK TEST, the test

described above is performed only
END
with the control by looping the signal
back within the control.
E4-17
FM-8500
9. Private Channel list
E4-18
FM-8500
E4-19
FM-8500
E4-20
FM-8500

VHF Radiotelephone
The FM-8500 muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2.2 Changing System
settings”.
Protection OFF
TEST
INSPECTION TEST < >

TONE DIS-CH Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.
CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2 DOT:1700Hz+400Hz
Select "MARK or Space", press PTT SW.

Now doing Tx ON
(Measurment: power and frequency)
156.525MHz
(+10ppm)
Tone test < >
Release PTT SW.
CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
TEST
E4-21
Section E5. FM-8700
1. Connection
Receivable Sentence)
GLL, RMC, ZDA
DX-8700 Rear panel
E5-1
FM-8700
2. System settings
2.1 Initial Settings
This section provides how to set-up the following items.

1. Ship’s ID number 4. Channel system settings
2. DSC block settings 5. Selection of LCD display, Japanese or English
3. VHF block settings 6. Protection (Lock Initial settings)
Protection OFF
Refer to section “2.2Changing system settings”.
TEST VHF ch70

(*1)
manual
[SELECT] [9]
System < Rom version > RT3-Time out timer < OFF >
V P ID DSC RT CH PO L OFF [1] ON [2]
Disable or continue after a long transmission.
Select "ID" press the [ENT] key. For USA, set to ON, Not effective unless USA mode is enabled.
Refer to section “5.Chenging ID
Enter own identification
and Private mode”. RT4-TX AF monitor < OFF > OFF!!
[digits] MMSI: - - - - - - - - -
OFF [1] ON [2]
Enter own ship's ID and the [ENT] key twice. Disable or enable monitoring of external equipment;
For example, Remote Station RB-700 is monitored.
DSC : Receiver < CH70 > Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key.
CH70 [1] VHF [2] RT5-Auto 1W < ON >
When two FM-8700s are installed, designate ON [1] OFF [2]
one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). ON:Automatic setting of 1W when selecting the low output power
The default setting is "CH70" as mainunit. channel set by "Channel Preset" operation.
Select "CH70" or "VHF" press the [ENT] key. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
DSC : remote DMC ON RT6-Dual watch < ON >

ON [1] OFF [2] ON [1] OFF [2]
Select whether DMC-5 is connected or not. Disable or enable dual watch.
(ON:connected)
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key twice.
RT6-Scanning < ON >
RT1-Mode : USA/WX < OFF >
ON [1] OFF [2]
ON [1] OFF [2]
Disable or enable the USA/WX mode. Disable or enable channel scanning.

Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
RT7-Auto SQ <L00 H03 H030>

RT1-Mode : private < OFF > Refer to section “5.Changing ID *You had better not change these value.
OFF [1] ON [2] LOW= 00 HIGH HOLD
and Private mode”.
Disable or enable the PRIVATE channel mode. Settings auto SQ function (*better not change these value)
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key. LOW:Enter lowest limt of voice frequency which open
automatic SQ. Enter value by the following formula.
RT2-Hook work : CH16 < ON > Setting value x 50 = Low Frequency
HIGH:Enter highest frequency which opens automatic SQ.
ON [1] OFF [2]
Setting value x 50 = Hi Frequency
Disable or enable watch on CH16 when handset is on hook. HOLD:Enter SQ hold time in two digits, by follwing the formula.
Setting value x 20 msec= Time desired
Press the [ENT] key 4 times .
RT2-Hook work : SP < ON >
ON [1] OFF [2] * INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI >
Disable or enable speaker when handset is on hook.
(continued next page)

(*1)
E5-2
FM-8700
*INTL Channel mode

* INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > The international channel setting display appears.

RX:Reception only
Rotate CHANNEL knob to a select channel to be set.
Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.

TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]
Select communication mode.

Select "SIMP" or "DUP" and press the [ENT] key .

TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
Select TX power.
Select "HIGH" or "LOW" and press the [ENT] key .
To set other INTL channels.

To select other mode (USA, WX or Private),

Press the [CH16] key while pressing the a CHNNEL knob.
*USA Channel mode *PRIVATE Channel mode
USA CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > P01/ CH:- - - < - - - - - - - ->
ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3] PRIV No.SELECT: [<] [>] key
TX: Transmission and reception available Press the arrow key to select private channel
RX:Reception only (P01 to P20) to be set.
UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Press the [ENT] key.
Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key P01/ CH:001 <UNABLE>
depending on channel. ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI >
TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2] RX:Reception only
Select communication mode. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key
USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI > P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >
TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2] TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]
Select TX power. Select communication mode.

Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key. Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key.
P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW >

To set other USA channels. TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
Select TX power.
Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.
*WX Channel mode
WX CH:001 < RX > To set other private channels.
ENABLE= RX[1] UNABLE[2] Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
ENABLE:WX Reception
UNABLE:WX reception prohibited
Press ENABLE[1] or UNABLE[2] key, and [Enter] key
To set other WX channels.

Press the [CANCEL] key.
System < ROM version >

(continued on next page)
E5-3
FM-8700
Note)
System < Channel >
PO:TX power adjustment
V P ID DSC RT CH PO L Refer to section "6.1 Tx Power adjustment".
Select "L" and press the [ENT] key .
LCD language < English >

E[1] J[2]
For the Tx/RX massage display in DSC and menu display,
Japanese or English is selected.
Press E[1] or J[2] key, and [Enter] key.

Select "P" and press the [ENT] key .
Protection < OFF >

ON OFF
* Important !!
Select "ON" and press the [ENT] key .
System < Channel >

To return to normal display, press [CANCEL] key several times.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
E5-4
FM-8700
2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF)
Watch VHF ch70
auto
[SELECT]
Set up menu < M.Position >

Set up menu
1 2 3 4 6 7 9 ALM
To release protection of menu 9, follow the steps below.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
[SELECT] [9] [ ]
System <Protection >

V P ID ----
Select "P" and press [ENT] key.
Enter cypher code "652111"

Protection < ON >
ON OFF
Select "OFF" and press [ENT] key.
System <Own ID number >

V P ID ----
Now you can reset the followings.

* DSC block * RT block
* Channel system * Power setting
* Setting language
The registered MMSI number and Private mode"ON or OFF" is reading only.
If you want to change MMSI number and Private mode "ON or OFF",
refer to section "5. Changing ID and Private mode".
After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu shown

below to "ON" for normal operation.
TEST VHF ch70

Importamt !!
manual
Protection <OFF >

ON OFF
Select "ON" and press [ENT] key.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
E5-5
FM-8700
[SELECT] “Setup menu”
Setup menu Menu-1 Menu-2 Setting Note

Manual
1 L/L and UTC entered data, enter 9999 for
Position
the UTC.
ABLE ABLE
No reason
Busy
2 Auto ack
UNABLE Equip disable
Unable channel
Unable mode
ROM
ROM/RAM RAM
EEROM
NMEA
DMC
Diagnosis Remote loop
Rmt station
3 (Protected)
652111 Printer IF
Without the [CANCEL]
Keyboard test [DIMM] [SELECT] and
[ENT] key
Display test
Print out test
AUTO
AUTO/MANU AUTO
4 Print out MANU
EEROM Print out to EEROM content
Keyboard ON
6 Sound ON
click OFF
MASSAGE
7 File ADDRESS Group ID 0 MID X5 - X9
TEL No.
E5-6
FM-8700
Setup
Menu-1 Menu-2 Menu-3 Setting Note
menu
Rom RT and DSC
version version
Protectio
Pass word:652111
n
Own-ID To clear EEROM content.
ID (MMSI) Own ID
number (NMI SW ON)
CH70[1] When two sets are installed,
Main VHF:CH70
Receiver designate one as Main (CH70)
DSC:RC VHF[2] Sub VHF:VHF
and the other as Sub (VHF).
VR/DMC
ON[1]
DMC ON:DMC-5 is connected
OFF[2]
OFF[1]
RT1:USA/WX By request
ON[2]
OFF[1] To clear EEROM content.
RT1:private By request
ON[2] (NMI SW ON)
RT2:Hook ON[1]
ON
work CH16 OFF[2]
RT2:Hool ON[1]
ON
work SP OFF[2]
OFF[1]
RT3:Time out OFF
ON[2]
RT1-7 RT4:AF OFF[1]
OFF
monitor ON[2]
9 System ON[1]
RT5:Auto 1W ON
OFF[2]
RT6:Dual ON[1]
ON
watch OFF[2]
ON[1]
RT6:Scanning ON
OFF[2]
LOW (06) 06
RT7:Auto SQ HIGH (16) 16
HOLD (30) 30
ENABLE CH
(TX /RX/UN)
INTL,
TELECOM
Channel USA,WX, By request
(SIMP/DUP)
PRIV
TX POWER
(HIGH/LOW)
CH60
CH
CH88 Default:750 Power adjustment required.
(DUP/SIMP)
Tx power CH14
CH60
HI/L CH88 Default:100 Power adjustment required.
CH14
LCD English[1]
English
Language Japanese[2]
Ordinary alarm ON/OFF ON
ALM
TYPE : 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 1
E5-7
FM-8700
4. Jumper settings
Handset
-HS-6000FZ6 (Carbon MIC)
-HS-6000FZ5 (Dynamic MIC)
MIC Receptacle Box
-RBD-VHF (For Carbon MIC)
-RBD-VHF –B (For Dynamic MIC)
E5-8
FM-8700
5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode

Procedures
1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the power turned on.

NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Select EEROM with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING
EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the
power” will appear. Then, turn off the power,

TEST VHF ch70
manual
6. Press [SELECT] key first and [9] key next, then this display will appear.
System <Rom Version>

V P ID DSC CH PO L
7. Put the cursor on “ID” by pressing [>] key and press [ENT] key.
Enter own identication
[digits] MMIS: - - - - - - - -
Changing ID number
E5-9
FM-8700
8. Input the ID number of the own ship in nine digits, check to be sure about the input
number, and press [ENT] key. (When a wrong number is input, press [CANCEL] key
and enter the correct number.)
System <DSC:RCVR/DMC>
9. Put the cursor on “RT” and press [ENT] key twice.

RT1-Mode:private <OFF>
OFF[1] ON[2]
10. After the selection, press [CANCEL] key.

System < RT 1-7 >
11. Put the cursor on “P”, and press [ENT] key.

Protection <OFF>
ON OFF
12. Select “ON”, and press [ENT] key. (By pressing [ENT] key again, the input ID
number can be confirmed. If the number is incorrect, input the correct number, from
the first step.)
13. Return to the normal display by pressing [CANCEL] key several times.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
The ID number to be input must be the MMSI number that is allocated to

the ship. Again, check that the input number is correct.
E5-10
FM-8700
6. Adjustment
6.1 TX Power Adjustment
Connect Power meter and Dummy load or Antenna as illustrated below.
50Ω 50Ω
50Ω
50Ω 50Ω Dummy load
Handset FM-8700 DX-8700
Power meter or Antenna
TX ANT ANT
CH60 (DUP/SIMP) :156.325MHz High Power :21 - 25W

CH14 (DUP/SIMP) :156.7MHz Low Power :0.7 - 1.0W
CH88 (DUP/SIMP) :157.425MHz
To compensate a power loss in the duplexer, set the maximum power and reduced
power in “DUP” and “SIMP” modes on CH14, CH60, CH88.
Must be “Protection OFF”.

1. At the normal display, press [SELECT] and [9] keys in this order.
2. Select “P” by pressing the [>] keys, then press the [ENT] key.
3. Type password :652111.
4. Select “Protection OFF” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key.
“Protection OFF”
5. Select “PO” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. The following display
appears.
SIMP power - CH60 <HI : 750>
Adjust high power and low power on SIMP (INTL) CH14, CH60 and CH88 as
follows.
6. For example to adjust high power on SIMP (INTL) CH60;

While pressing the PTT switch, rotate the CHANNEL knob to set high power data.
Release the PTT switch when the desired value (power data) appears on the channel
display.
E5-11
FM-8700
7. Then, press [HIGH/LOW] key. The following display appears.

Adjust low power by doing the same as high power.
SIMP power - CH60 <LOW : 100>

8. Change the channel to SIMP CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob.
Adjust high power and low power by doing the same as CH60.
9. Change the channel to DUP CH60, CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob.
Adjust high power and low power by following the same manner as above.
DUP power - CH60 <HI : 750>

10. After completion of power adjustment on DUP and SIMP modes, adjust the output
power for PRV mode in the same procedure as that for INTL mode.
Note that in PRV mode, you can adjust power for each channel.
Must be “Protection ON”.

11. After completion of power adjustment on all modes, press the [CANCEL] key.
12. Select “P”, then press the [ENT] key.
13. Select “ON”, then press the [ENT] key.
“Protection ON”
14. To return to the normal display, press the [CANCEL] key several times.
E5-12
FM-8700
6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment
Rule: +10 ppm
E5-13
FM-8700
Procedures

NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Clear to RAM, EEROM or ALL.

RAM clear
When select to RAM, press the [ENT] key;
Turn on the power again, then this display will appear.
Watch VHF ch70

auto
E5-14
FM-8700
EEROM or ALL clear

Select EEROM or ALL with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A
display
“Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another
display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power.
Turn the power on again.
To set the initial settings. Refer to section “2.1 Initial settings”.
TEST VHF ch70

manual
Note)
Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by
pressing the [4] key.

Item Purpose
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs.
RAM (incl. transmitted and received messages, prepared in messages in
FILE menu: [SELECT] [7], and [1], [2], [4], [6].
*Settings of [SELECT] [ALARM]
*Settings of [SELECT] [9] (System setting data)
Note)
EEROM Ship’s ID(“ID”) and Private ON/OFF setting is cleared.
Channel preset data (“CH”) and power adjustment
data (“Po”) are not restored to default setting when clearing
the EEROM.
*Settings of [SELECT] [7] (Message in files)
Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and EEPROM.
(There is not clear ID and Private mode settings in [SELECT]
ALL
[9] menu.)
E5-15
FM-8700
8. Self test
E5-16
FM-8700
E5-17
FM-8700
FM-8700 Self test flow
PTT TEST PTT ON
H8 CPU has in RAM the diagnostic

DUP unit OK ? DUP unit:NG
result for each PTT ON.
For NG, V25 CPU is notified.
TX Power>15W XMT POWER:NG
END OF PTT TEST
SELF TEST
TEST ON
TX ON without PA
TX PLL Lock:NG
NO
T/R PLL Lock? RX PLL Lock:NG
YES
AF YES
LOOP BACK TEST
CH70 OK?
CH70 RCVR LOOP BACK TEST
:NG memorized OK? NO
YES RCVR
AF NO
:NG memorized
LOOP BACK TEST
RCV OK?
LOOP BACK TEST
OK?
YES RCVR:NG CH70 RCVR:NG CONTROL:NG
NO NO
PTT ON TEST PTT ON TEST In CH70 LOOP-BACK TEST and RCV
OK? OK?
LOOP-BACK TEST, all other than PA is put in
YES YES
XMT POWER:NG transmission status and DSC signal is transmitted,
which is received at CH 70 receiver and RX board
to see if it is a right signal by analyzing the signal
VHF DSC:GOOD VHF DSC:NG
with the control. This test allows collective
diagnosis of the transmitter, CH 70, RX receiver
END
and control.
In AF LOOP-BACK TEST, the test described
above is performed only with the control by
looping the signal back within the control.
E5-18
FM-8700
9. Private Channel list
E5-19
FM-8700
E5-20
FM-8700
E5-21
FM-8700
VHF Radiotelephone
The FM-8700 muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2.2 Changing System
settings”.
Protection OFF
TEST
INSPECTION TEST < >

TONE DIS-CH Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.
CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2 DOT:1700Hz+400Hz
Select "MARK or Space", press PTT SW.

Now doing Tx ON
(Measurment: power and frequency)
156.525MHz
(+10ppm)
Tone test < >
Release PTT SW.
CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
TEST
E5-22
Section F1. DMC-5
1. Connection
FM-8500
FM-8700
MF/HF RT (FS-5000/1562/etc) FM-7500
WR (AA-50) FM-7000+DSC-5/5V
DSC (DSC-5/6/60) FM-8000+DSC-8VP FELCOM-10/11/12
MF/HF DSC NO.1 VHF NO.2 VHF INMARSAT-C

System +DSC System +DSC System (Class 2)
Tx/RX data
Tx/RX data
Tx/RX data
(RS-410N)
(C.Loop)
(C.Loop)
(C.Loop)
DMC
TB-6 TB-1 TB-2 TB-5
10-40V DC TB-10 DMC-5

TB-4 TB-7 TB-3 TB-8 TB-9
(RS-410N)
(RS-410N)
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
AF
AF
EGC RECV 2182 kHz WR NAVTEX
AL-5/5F AL-5/5F
EGC-5 AA-45B/46B NX-500
2. System settings
Each port must be set up through the menu. Selecting equipment as follows.
1. Press [SETUP] key.

2. Press [1]:NAVTEX, [2]:2182WR, [4]:VHF DSC, [5]:MF/HF DSC or [6]:SES/EGC key
within 2-3 seconds.
3. Select each of content on setup menu by [SELCT] key.
4. Press [ENT] key.
Other setup
*Alarm tone selection : [SETUP], [7]
*Enter Date & time : [SELECT], “TIME”
F1-1
DMC-5
System Settings List

Menu Setting Note

NAVTEX [SETUP] OFF When installed in NAV bridge,
ON or OFF
Receiver [1] ON setting may OFF.
OFF
[SETUP] 2182kHz Watch keeping is not
2182kHz WR ON OFF
[2] required from Feb. 1999.
Monitor-OFF
OFF
[SETUP] When VHF No.1out of order,
VHF DSC No.1 No.1
[4] select VHF No.2.
No.2
OFF
[SETUP] J3E Select class of emission for
MF/HF DSC J3E
[5] H3E distress communications.
F1B
OFF
[SETUP] EGC
SES/EGC SES(EGC) FELCOM-10/11/12 connected.
[6] SES+EGC
SES(EGC)
0 to 9 The user may select receiver
Alarm Tone [SETUP] Type
(Default:1) alarm tone.
Selection [7]
Key click ON or OFF
[SELECT] YY-MM-DD-U YY-MM-DD The UTC time used for Distress
Date & Time
”TIME” TC -UTC alert message.
Note)
The UTC time when it was entered with the DMC-5 is given priority more than the
DSC-5/6/8VP and FM-8500/8700.
Condition of the UTC time setting from DMC-5 to DSC-5/6/8VP, following below.
*When the DMC-5 entered the UTC time
*When the DMC-5 counted 00:00.
*When the DMC-5 or DSC-5 turn on power.
*When the DMC-5 changed in NO.1 or No.2 VHF selection setup menu.
*When the DMC-5 set from OFF to ON in the MF/HF setup menu.
F1-2
DMC-5

After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly,
be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to
clear contents of S-RAMs
Procedures
NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM
4. Select RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM by pressing the [SELECT] key.

The power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually.
F1-3
DMC-5
EEROM clear
After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off.
Turn the power on again manually. Muse be system settings.
(Refer to section “2. System settings”)

Item Purpose
RAM 2
(incl. received messages and ship’s position data.)
Clears all contents of the S-RAM and EEROM.
EEROM
(Settings of combined equipment, etc. [SETUP] [1] and [7]
F1-4
DMC-5
4. Self test
F1-5
1. Connection
IC-100
FURUNO
Receiver Distress
Call Unit Alaert Unit
ANT
IC-301 IC300 or DMC-5
Printer AC
Printer
DTE1 REMOTE A
DMC PP-500
IC-500
REMOTE B Key
RP
NC Key board
IC-200
NMEA)
GLL, RMA, RMB, NMEA/CIF CONTROL
RMC, VTG, WPL NMEA/CIF NC NC
DTE2
24VDC
24VDC
EGC Printer (PP-505)

or 2nd Terminal
2. System settings
2.1 System setup: [F5]
1. Press [F5] to display the System menu.
2. Press [Enter] or [1] to display the System setup screen.
3. Necessary settings are as below. (DET installed only one)

*System Date YY-MM-DD
*Preferred NCS AUTO
*SES Operation Mode INMARSAT-C
G1-1
FELCOM 10
*Nav port Auto

*DTE 2 Port Sub -addr. 001
*Message Output Port DTE1
*Polling Output Port DTE1
2.2 Terminal setup: [F6]
1.Press [F6] to display the Terminal menu.
2. Set the “DET Type” to Main.
2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]
1. Press [F10] key, and [2] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings
are as below.
*Set the CES ID

The default CES ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS).
Tap the Space Bar to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable CES by the [↓]
key followed by the [Enter] key.
*Protocol
Select “Maritime”.
*Nature
Set to “Unspecified”.
G1-2
FELCOM 10
3. Jumper wire setting (CPU Board ROM: U1 Ver 1650041102B and after)
3.1 EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting
G1-3
FELCOM 10
3.2 For Data Format (NMEA/CIF)
JP 1 setting
NMEA : Put a jumper to NMEA side
(GLL, RMA, RMB, RMC, VTG, WPL)
CIF : Put a jumper to CIF side
CPU Board
CPU Board 16P0043-2: ROM(U1) 1MB
16P0043-3: ROM(U1) 4MB
Note)
EGC MSG. Alarm Output
U1 (EPROM): Program and
ON/OFF setting jumper.
Return/Forward ID Installed.
G1-4
FELCOM 10
4. System status monitor
Press [F8], [1] key to display the System Status Monitor.
System Status Monitor Display
G1-5
FELCOM 10
G1-6
FELCOM 10
5. S-RAM Clear
Procedure
NMI SW
REMOTE A REMOTE B
CIF/NMEA
PRINTER CONTROL
Rear panel view of IC-500
G1-7
FELCOM 10
6. Menu Tree
G1-8
FELCOM 10
FQ5-93-025
7. FURUNO Information
1993-07
G1-9
1. Connection
CIF/NMEA 24VDC
IC-111 NC
FURUNO CONTROL
NC
REMOTE B
IC-511
Printer 24VDC
Printer
NC
PP-510
5D-FB-CV (30 m) REMOTE A
8D-FB-CV (50 m) Key
Receiver Distress 12D-SFA-CV (100 m) Key boaerd
Call Unit Alert Unit
IC-301 IC300 IC300 or DMC-5 ANT or

DMC DTE1 COM1
Printer
Printer
COM2 PP-510
BUZZER IB-581
NC
IC-211 Key
24VDC Key boaerd
GLL, RMA, RMB
NMEA DTE2
RMC, VTG, WPL
Note) CPU2 Ver 105 and after ; Option
Additional BWC and BWR. 24VDC DATA
GPS Rx board
or 2nd Terminal
2. System settings
2.1 System setup: [F5]
2. Press [Enter] or [1] to display the System setup screen.
3. Necessary settings are as below. (DTE installed only one)

*System Date YY-MM-DD
*Preferred NCS AUTO
*MES Operation INMARSAT-C
*Nav port INT or EXT (Depend on installation)
INT: Internal GPS Board
EXT: External Equipment
G2-1
FELCOM 11
*DTE 2 Port Sub -addr. 001

*Polling Output Port DTE1
2.2 Terminal: [F6]
1.Press [F6] to display the Terminal menu.
Terminal: IB-581 Terminal: IC-511
2. Set the “DET Type” to Main.
Press [F10] key, and [1] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings
are as below.
* LES ID
The default LED ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS). Tap
the Space Bar to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable LES by the [↓] key
followed by the [Enter] key.
*Protocol
Set to “Maritime”.
*Nature
G2-2
FELCOM 11
3. Dip switch setting

1. Remote Alarm setting
The FELCOM 11 can be connected to remote units Distress Message Button IC-300 or
Distress Message Controller DMC-5. Which generates an audible alarm when a distress
alert or urgent message receives. The DIP switch (S2) on the CPU Board function as
below. All bits are set to OFF at factory.
Distress
Urgent
CPU Board (16P0108)

S2 ON
CPU
CPU
1 2 3 4 OFF
S2
Pin # Type of Alarm OFF ON

3 Distress Enabled Disabled (*1)(*2)
4 Urgent Enabled Disabled (*1)
*1) To change the setting, captain’s agreement is required.

*2) This setting is allowed only when EGC alarm generated from the Terminal Unit can
be heard at the conning place.
G2-3
FELCOM 11
Terminal: IB-581 The system Status Monitor is always displayed.

Ternimal: IC-511 Press [F8], [1] or [Enter] key to display the System Status
Monitor.
System Status Monitor Display
G2-4
FELCOM 11
G2-5
FELCOM 11
FQ5-96-003
1996-02
G2-6
FELCOM 11
FQ5-95-012
1995-07
G2-7
FELCOM 11
6. MES ID
The MES ID number is burnt in EEROM U21 on the CPU Board in the Communication
Unit. If the CPU Board must be replaced, be sure to restore the original EEROM.
Otherwise, you cannot pass or receive traffic.
7. S-RAM Clear (IC-511)

Procedure
NMI SW
REMOTE A REMOTE B
CIF/NMEA
PRINTER CONTROL
Rear panel view of IC-511
G2-8
FELCOM 11
8. Menu Tree
G2-9
FELCOM 11
9. How to up date the Terminal (IB-581) program

- Press keys, [F1] and [8], successively.
or,
- select "[8]: Quit" in [F1]: File menu, and press [Enter] key.
2. The prompt, "A:\FELCOM11>", will appear on the screen.


- press [I], [B], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] keys, successively.
Reference) When installing terminal program for Russian;

(1) Successively press keys,
- [I], [B], [R], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter].
(2) Pressing [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for
6. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "B:\>".
Confirming the program version;

The version of the terminal program appears on the screen when starting terminal
program.
G2-10
1. Connection
IC-112
FURUNO
5D-FB-CV (30 m)
8D-FB-CV (50 m)
12D-SFA-CV (100 m)
Distress ANT
Alert Unit
DTE1 COM1
DMC-5 or IC302 Printer
Receiver Printer
Call Unit or DMC1 COM2 PP-510
NC IB-581
IC-303
IC-212 Key
IC302 24VDC Key boaerd
DTE2
DMC2
Option
BUZZER GPS Rx board

GLL, RMA, RMB or 2nd Terminal
NMEA DATA
RMC, VTG, WPL
Note) CPU2 Ver 106 and after ;
Additional BWC and BWR. 24VDC
2. System settings
2.1 System: [F8]
2. Press [2] to display the System setup screen.
G3-1
FELCOM 12
3. Necessary settings are as below. (DTE installed only one)

*System Date & Time YY-MM-DD
*Preferred NCS AUTO
*MES Operation Mode INMARSAT-C
*Nav port INT or EXT (Depend on installation)
INT: Internal GPS Board
EXT: External Equipment
*Active port DTE 1
*EGC Output Port DTE1
Press [F8] key, and [1] key. The display should look like below.
Necessary settings are as below
* LES ID
The default LED ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS).
Press the [Enter] key to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable LES by the
[↓] key followed by the [Enter] key.
*Protocol
Set to “Maritime”.
*Nature
G3-2
FELCOM 12
3. Dip switch setting

Terminal software:1650116103 and before CPU 2:1650118104 and before
CPU board
All bits of the DIP switch S1 on the CPU board must be set to “OFF” position.
If the switch is set to “ON” position, the received call unit IC-303 and/or the distress
message controller DMC-5 cannot release alarm signal when a distress and an urgency
(including EGC) message are received. Note that the distress alert unit IC-302 dose not
release alarm sound when a distress and an urgency message are received.
DIP SW No. Alarm type OFF ON Remark

1 Always OFF Factory use
2 Always OFF Not used
3 Distress Output Not output
4 Urgency Output Not output
Terminal software:1650116104 and after CPU 2:1650118106 and after

Compliance with IMO Circ.862 (Referring to Furuno Information FQ5-1999-015)
The buzzer on the Distress/Urgent receiving unit IC-303 does not sound at the reception
of the telex routine message. The alarm sound is released when the DIP switch, S1 #3
on the CPU board is turned on.
DIP SW No. OFF ON

1 Always OFF
2 Always OFF
The IC-303 sounds at the reception of the telex routine
3
message.
The IC-303 unit does not sound at the reception of the
4
EGC urgency message.
G3-3
FELCOM 12
G3-4
FELCOM 12
G3-5
FELCOM 12
5. MES ID
MES ID, Forward ID and Return ID is factory programmed. When replacing the CPU
Board (16P0148), remove the EEROM from the old board and put it on the new board.
G3-6
FELCOM 12
6. Menu Tree
G3-7
FELCOM 12
7. How to update the Terminal and CPU-2 program

7.1 Terminal
- Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
2. After a message "OK to quit system? Yes/No" has appeared,

- place the cursor on "Yes" and press [Enter] key.
A prompt "A:\FELCOM12>" will appear.


- press [I], [B], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] keys, successively.
Reference) When installing terminal program for Russian:

(1) Successively press keys,
- [I], [B], [R], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter].
(2) Pressing [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for

With terminal prgram versin -03 after or later :
To confirm the version of the terminal program,
- press [F1] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
G3-8
FELCOM 12
7.2 CPU-2
The program for CPU-2 on the CPU board in the communication control unit is stored
in U26 (Flash ROM), and its updating is executed from the terminal unit. Updating the
program is made as follows;
Note) U26 stores the loader program and CPU-2 program. For the program updating,
the loader program loads the CPU-2 program .

2. After a message "OK to Quit System Yes/No ?" has appeared,

Then, the prompt "A:\FELCOM12>" will appear.
3. Insert the floppy disk containing the program for CPU-2 into the FD drive.
4. Change to "B" drive by successively pressing keys,

- [B], [:], and [Enter].
Then, the prompt "B:\>" will appear.
5. Successively pressing keys,

- [U], [P], [F], [1], [2], and [Enter], will show the following message:
"About to update FELCOM12 CPU2 software. Press 'Y' to update the software to
165-0118-lxx. If you wish to cancel, Press 'N' key."
6. - Pressing [Y] key will show the following message:

"Loader Version 6.00 Erase wait: 0 sec Write wait: 0 Wait counter=100
TARGET power ON"
7. - Turning off once and on again the communication control unit will show the
following message:
"Execute STEP 1 Execute STEP 2 xxxxxx byte transfer Now Erasing xxx
percent completed"
Note) xxx will count from 000 to 100.
G3-9
FELCOM 12
8. When xxx has counted up to 100 (about 5 minuts later) the following message will
appear and the updating will be finished;
"Finish version update."
"B:\>"
9. Turn off once and on again the communication control unit and terminal unit.
G3-10
1. Connection
Terminal Printer
DTE1
REF (PC) (PP-510)
DOWN CON
RX AC OUT For FAX, PC
UP CON TX
PRINTER Class 2 only
ANT CONT
TEL1 No. 1 TEL
TB4
IB-310 B-FAX
ANT AC FAX FAX
IB-180 JUNCTION BOX

IB-311 To connect two or more
telephones, use junction
IB-280 box IB-311.Cllass
GYRO
DTE2
NMEA
Terminal
PC DATA
AC IN (PC)
FELCOM 80
HSD Terminal
(PC)
HSD Terminal CTRL

(RS-422 or 232C)
CTRL Terminal Printer
REF DTE1
REF (PC) (PP-510)
DOWN CON RX
IB-680 RX IF AC OUT For FAX, PC
TX
UP CON TX IF
PRINTER Class 2 only
ANT CONT
TEL1 No. 1 TEL
TB4 B-FAX
ANT AC FAX FAX
IB-310
IB-180 JUNCTION BOX
IB-311 To connect two or more
telephones, use junction
IB-280 box IB-311.Cllass
GYRO
DTE2
NMEA
Terminal
PC DATA
AC IN (PC)
FELCOM 80 + HSD (IB680)

Note) Refer to FURUNO Information, FQ 5-1999-014.
To connect the HSD modem, Inmarsat communication unit must be modified as below.
Modification kit comes with the HSD modem, IB-680.
1. Replacement of rear panel
2. Replacement of ROM on SYS CPU and I/O CPU board
(SYS: Ver19 or more I/O:Ver.3 or more)
3. Fixing of the connector plate onto the rear panel and wirings
4. Replacement of FILTER board in DOWN CONV unit
H1-1
FELCOM 80
Multiple Telephone/Facsimiles
Install the PHONE I/F board (standard supply) in the Communication Unit and connect
it to the V. CODEC board as shown below.
Connection of more than one telephone requires Junction Box IB-311. In this case the
TEL1 and FAX1 modular jack on the Communication Unit IB-280 is not used.
Max. TEL 4 ,
FAX 2 units
Junction Box
IB-311
IB-280
H1-2
FELCOM 80
Settings item
Setting Note
Unit Function
AZ CPU
Antenna hatch Depend on the
IB-180 Board: DIP Ship’s Stem (Std.Setting): S2-All OFF
direction Antenna installation.
SW S2
AD
Depend on the Gyro
Converter Setting of Gyro Default: AC synchro/360X/100VAC
specifications.
Board
IB-280
The output level Depend on the Cable length
Tx/Rx IF
of Tx/Rx IF Antenna cable 25m or less:S1/S2 H(L)/L(H)
board:S1/S2
board. length. 26m or more:S1/S2 H/H—Default
TEL FC622SL1WG Dialing format PB [STO] [#] [*] [STO]
PP-510 ROM Ver: 1650098100
Printer PP-510 Left Margin DIP SW-ALL OFF
System program Ver: 1650084010
Dialing format PB
Modem speed:
9600bps
9600(B-FAX)
Modem Refer to section
FAX *PFX-50 2400bps
speed:2400 “3.6 FAX settings:PFX-50”.
Monitor ON or OFF
Language Japanese or English
ECM OFF
[F4][3][7]
IMN + 4Char. + X
AAB Reentering AAB: Press [Alt]+[Ctrl],
(4Char.:Ship’s name)
type “ANSWER”
CPU2 DIP SW S2#2 ON
or
Displaying the commissioning menu
Entering IMN by commands
Ter- Assigned IMN & ID
& ID **Job number & Pass word**
minal PC
- Job number: FURUNOSERVICE
Unit
- Password : FELCOM80
[F4][6][3]
DMG message: 1:Abbr.ship’s Name
4Char.:Ship’s name
Ship’s name 2: Maritime
3:Undesignated
Network Setup Select sea area [F4][6][4]
*PFX-50
All Memory Clear
When the FAX is turned off for a long period, it dose not function properly, became of
abnormality of the FAX’s memory (RAM) contents.
1. Turn the power off.
2. While pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*] keys together, turn the power on.
3. Preset various settings.
H1-3
FELCOM 80
Setting item
Setting Note
Unit Function
No.1 TEL:
- Register the TEL number: *51* LES
OFF: Direct call
SW Panel 00 Country code xxxxxxx #
Automatic call
SW1 - Clear the registered number: *51*#
Call start with reception of DTR
ON: Address call
signal from HSD terminal.
Interface with HSD terminal.
OFF: RS-449 RS-449:D-SUB 37pin
SW Panel Terminal RS-232C: D-SUB 25pin
SW2 Interface Never use both RS-232C and RS-449
IB-680 ON: RS-232C terminal on the HSD modem at the
time.
SW Panel Automatic data OFF: NO
SW3 rate switching ON: YES
SW Panel Command OFF: HDCL - High level data link control
SW4 format ON: BSC - Binary synchronous communication
SW Panel Character OFF: 8 bit/no parity
SW5 format ON: 7 bit/odd parity
64k
Date rate SW Data rate 56k is for USA ISDN circuit
56k
Reference: IB-680)
Registering, Deleting Subscriber Number
Register subscriber number as follows with the No.1 telephone. The subscriber number
may contain 20 digits (*,# cannot be registered). The number can be confirmed by
printing the status display.
1. Pick up the handset of the No.1 telephone and confirm dial tone.
2. Dial subscriber’s No. as follows;
*51* aaa 00 bb xxxxxxxxx #
subscriber number
Country code
Automatic Dialing
Land Earth Station (LES)
Prefix for HSD call
Deleting subscriber number

Dial [*] [5] [1] [*] [#].
H1-4
FELCOM 80
3. Setting procedure
3.1 DIP switch setting (Antenna unit: IB-180)
H1-5
FELCOM 80
3.2 Tx IF output level setting (Communication unit: IB-280)
H1-6
FELCOM 80
3.3 Gyro Converter setting (Communication unit: IB-280)
H1-7
FELCOM 80
H1-8
FELCOM 80
H1-9
FELCOM 80
H1-10
FELCOM 80
Function of DIP switches and Jumper wires

The function of each DIP switch and jumper wire is as shown in the tables which
follow.
H1-11
FELCOM 80
H1-12
FELCOM 80
Modification when using DC Step Type Gyrocompass

If DC step type gyrocompass is used, modification of the communication unit is
required to prevent the fuse of the gyrocompass from being blown.
Modification in the field
Disconnect the plug mated to J3 on the LED PANEL board (16P0087) at the back side
of the front panel of the communication unit. And change the setting of the slid switch
S1 on the LED PANEL board.
H1-13
FELCOM 80
H1-14
FELCOM 80
DIP switch and Jumper wire settings by makes

and models of gyrocompass
The table below shows how to set the AD Converter board for connection with various
makes and models of gyrocompasses.
H1-15
FELCOM 80
3.4 Setting of Telephone
Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. The handset should be on the
hanger.
1. Press the [STO] key
2. Press the [#] key.
3. Press the [*] key to display “Pb”.
4. Press the [STO] key again.
3.5 Printer: PP-510 Setting (Ver 1650098100) For Left Margin

Field modification
1. Replace ROM in PP-510 (Type: 1650098100) and change the DIP switch setting.
2. Update master system FD to version 10 (Type: 1650084010) and make execution FD.
Replacing ROM and changing DIP switch setting

1. Remove the printer cover and the ribbon cassette.
2. Slide the print head to far right-hand side.
3. Slide the DIP switch cover leftward to remove it.

4. Replace ROM.
5. Set the DIP switch #1 - #8 to OFF.
6. Line up the left-hand end of the DIP switch cover with point @ and then slide it
rightward to set.
7. Set the ribbon cassette and refasten the printer cover.
Note) Ver 1650098100 before

Set the DIP switch #4 and #5 to ON.
H1-16
FELCOM 80
3.6 FAX settings: PFX-50
1. Clearing contents of RAM

To clear all contents of RAM, turn the power on while pressing and holding down the
[1] [3] and [*] keys together.
2. How to set up FAX

The setting changes to the factory default if the machine is not used for about one
month or more. Follow the steps below to set up the fax.
1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*].
2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES].
3. Enter ship’s name by referring character code list in the operator’s manual.
5. Enter the fax number of own station.
6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice.
7. Press [FUNCTION/NO] to change line type from DP to PB.
9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 9902101230 for 12:30, February 1999.
10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. After 2 seconds, “TEL/FAX” appears.
11. Press [FUNCTION/NO] three times.
12. Press [YES], [NO], and then [NO].
13. Press [YES], and then [NO] four times.
14. Press [YES].
15. Press [YES].
16. Change receiving mode to FAX by pressing [AUTO RCV/YES] several times.
H1-17
FELCOM 80
3. How to turn off ECM
Depending on the fax model of the receiving station, necessary is turning off ECM
(Error Correction Mode) of the fax PFX-50. The procedure is;
1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3].
2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]
and [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order.
Now the screen should show “FUNC0=00010010”
Note)
Press 00010000 in that order to change modem speed from 9600 bps to
2400 bps, 10: 9600bps, 00: 2400bps.
FUNC 0=0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Modem speed
00: 2400bps 10: 9600bps
3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears.

4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM.
The third digit from right is for ECM on and off.
Note)
FUNC 18=0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
ECM ON/OFF Line MON ON/OFF
0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON
5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order.

6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.
H1-18
FELCOM 80
Reference)
H1-19
FELCOM 80
Setting Modem Speed, Turning Line Monitor ON/OFF
B-FAX: 9600bps
Changing dialing format

Change dialing format “Pulse” to “Pushbutton”. See page H1-19.
H1-20
FELCOM 80
Changing language from Japanese to English
H1-21
FELCOM 80
3.7 Terminal settings
1. Entering AAB
Press [F4], [3] and [7] in this order at normal display.
!
!! ATTENTION: CAN NOT
Enter your ship’s answer back code given by Inmarsat, then press the [Enter] key.
Normally, answer back code consists of telex IMN given by Inmarsat and four
characters your applied to Inmarast for.
EX) TELX IMN No. 4characters X

343164830 JFKS X
Reentering AAB
1. Press [F4], [3] and [7] in this order at normal display.
2. While pressing and holding down both the [Alt] and [Ctrl] keys, enter cipher code;
[A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R]
The AAB stored in the memory is erased.
H1-22
FELCOM 80
2. Entering IMN
1. Turn the Communication Unit off and turn on pin#2 of DIP switch S2.
OR
Displaying the commissioning menu by commands
[F4][6] **Job number & Pass word**
- Job number: FURUNOSERVICE
2. Turn the Communication Unit on.

3. On the Terminal Unit (PC), press [Esc] to display the normal display and then press
[F4] and [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu.
4. Press [6] and [Enter] key to display the Commissioning menu.
5. Press [6] followed by the [Enter] key. The following display appears.
6. Enter appropriate number followed by the [Enter] key.
7. Press [Back Space] to clear data and enter terminal ID number given by Inmarsat.
8. Press [>] and enter INM followed by the [Enter] key.
9. To enter other INMs, repeat steps 6 to 8.
10. Press [E] and [Enter] to return to the Commissioning menu.
Note)
The OID/DID number assigned from Inmarsat are;
Voice : 01 –0F TELEX : 31 – 3F
FAX : 11 – 1F HSD 56k: 42 *
DATA : 21 – 2F HDS 64k: 41 *
*: In rare cases, 56k HSD: 41 and 64k HSD: 42; 56k HSD: 41 and 64k HSD: 51.
H1-23
FELCOM 80
3. Setting up DMG message (Class 1 only)
4. Setting up Network menu
H1-24
FELCOM 80
4. Self Test
1. By PC
Note )
Self-test results are printed out By No.1 Telephone
[*] [9] [0] [#]
H1-25
FELCOM 80
2. Description of Status Monitor Display (on PC)
H1-26
FELCOM 80
H1-27
FELCOM 80
H1-28
FELCOM 80
5. How to update Terminal Program
H1-29
FELCOM 80
Reference) Making System Program
Procedure
1. Turn on the PC. (C:\>)
2. Insert the FELCOM 80 system program disk in disk drive of PC.
3. Type “a:install”. (C:\>a:install)
4. Press the [Enter] key. System program is copied to hard disk.
5. Remove system program disk and insert blank floppy disk.
6. Press [Enter] key. First the disk is formatted. It takes about one minute. After
formatting is completed, the MS-DOS and the FELCOM 80 system program are
automatically copied to the blank disk.
7. The calender (date) format display appears. Select format desired.
8. To sellect the American format, for example, press [2] and [Enter]. The date appears
at the top right corner on the normal display.
9. Specify directory where to store TELLEX message. You may select the default name
of “TELEX” by selecting “Yes”, or use a different name selecting “No”.
10. When the display shows c:\> turn off the power.
H1-30
1. Connection
8D-FB-CV (30m)
12D-SFA-CV (100m) KEY Board
IB-281 TX/RX RF
Terminal Printer
VDU
(IB-581) (PP-510)
MAX. 3set
Class 2 only
IB-301
IB-281 PRINTER
IB-350 TEL1 TEL
IB-360
IB-312 JUNCTION BOX
TEL6 FAX
GYRO
AD-100
NMEA
Terminal
DATA
MCT-1540-55 CARD READER (PC)
24VDC
FELCOM 81
EX) DATA-1(RS-232C) RX IF
RX IF
Dial UP Router TX IF
DATA-1(RS-422) TX IF
PC
REF
REF
AC100/200V IB-681 HSD CTRL
HSD CTRL
KEY Board
8D-FB-CV (30m)
12D-SFA-CV (100m)
IB-281 TX/RX RF Terminal Printer
VDU
(IB-581) (PP-510)
MAX. 3set
IB-281 PRINTER Class 2 only
IB-301
IB-350 TEL1 TEL
IB-360
IB-312 JUNCTION BOX
TEL6 FAX
GYRO
AD-100
NMEA
Terminal
DATA
MCT-1540-55 CARD READER (PC)
24VDC
FELCOM 81 + HSD (IB681)
Note)
To connect the HSD modem, Inmarsat communication unit must be modified.
Refer to the IB-681 installation manual.
H2-1
FELCOM 81
Settings item
Setting Note
Unit Function
Antenna hatch Depend on the
IB-181 Limit switch
direction Antenna installation.
Cable length
8DFB-CV
Depend on the
RF CONV Tx RF signal 10 to40m:Marked position (default)
IB-281 Antenna cable
board:R135 output level. 40 to 50m:CW MAX.
length.
12DSFA-CA
50 to 100m:CW MAX.
FC622SL1WG Pb: Pushbutton [STO] [#] [*] [STO]
TEL Dialing format
FC755D1 DIP SW #1 ON
Dialing format PB
Modem speed:
9600bps
9600 (B FAX)
FAX Modem Refer to section
*PFX-50 2400bps
speed:2400 “3.4 FAX settings:PFX-50”.
Monitor ON or OFF
Language Japanese or English
ECM OFF
[F4][3][8]
AAB IMN 4Char. X Reentering AAB:[Alt]+[Ctrl] type
“ANSWER”
CPU2 DIP SW S2#2 ON
or
Displaying the commissioning menu
Entering by commands
Assigned OID/DID
Termin OID/DID **Job number & Pass word**
IB-581
al Unit - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE
[F4][6][3]
DMG message: 1:Abbr.ship’s Name
Ship’s name :4Char.
Ship’s name 2: Maritime
3:Undesignated
Network Setup Select sea area [F4][6][4]
*PFX-50
All Memory Clear
When the FAX is turned off for a long period, it dose not function properly, became of
abnormality of the FAX’s memory (RAM) contents.
1. Turn the power off.
2. While pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*] keys together, turn the power on.
3. Preset various settings.
H2-2
FELCOM 81
Setting item
Setting Note
Unit Function
No.1 TEL:
- Register the TEL number: *51* LES
OFF: Direct call
SW Panel 00 Country code xxxxxxx #
Automatic call
DIP SW#1 - Clear the registered number: *51*#
Call start with reception of DTR
ON: Address call
signal from HSD terminal.
Interface with HSD terminal.
OFF: RS-449 RS-449:D-SUB 37pin
SW Panel Terminal RS-232C: D-SUB 25pin
DIP SW#2 Interface Never use both RS-232C and RS-449
IB-681 ON: RS-232C terminal on the HSD modem at the
time.
SW Panel Automatic data OFF: NO
DIP SW#3 rate switching ON: YES
SW Panel Command OFF: HDCL - High level data link control
DIP SW#4 format ON: BSC - Binary synchronous communication
SW Panel Character OFF: 8 bit/no parity
DIP SW#5 format ON: 7 bit/odd parity
64k
Date rate SW Data rate 56k is for USA ISDN circuit
56k
Reference: IB-681)
Registering, Deleting Subscriber Number
Register subscriber number as follows with the No.1 telephone. The subscriber number
may contain 20 digits (*,# cannot be registered). The number can be confirmed by
printing the status display.
1. Pick up the handset of the No.1 telephone and confirm dial tone.
2. Dial subscriber’s No. as follows;
*51* aaa 00 bb xxxxxxxxx #
subscriber number
Country code
Automatic Dialing
Land Earth Station (LES)
Prefix for HSD call
Deleting subscriber number

Dial [*] [5] [1] [*] [#].
H2-3
FELCOM 81
3. Setting procedure
3.1 Adjustment of limit switch (Antenna unit: IB-181)
3.2 Tx RF output Level setting (Communication unit: IB-281)
The longer the antenna cable the more the TX RF signal is attenuated.
Adjust potentiometer R135 on the RF CONV Board according to antenna cable length
as follows:
The IB-281, right side view
H2-4
FELCOM 81
3.3 Setting of Telephone
1. FC622SL1WG
Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. The handset should be on the
hanger.
1. Press the [STO] key
2. Press the [#] key.
3. Press the [*] key to display “Pb”.
Press the [STO] key again.
3. FC755D1
Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows.
1. Insert tip of mechanical pencil under plastic cover to remove cover, and then remove
memo paper.
2. Use the tip of the mechanical pencil to set DIP switch.
Bell OFF
PB S
ON
DIP SW #1: ON
1 2 3 4 OFF
DP L
3. Restore memo paper and plastic cover.
H2-5
FELCOM 81
3.4 FAX settings: PFX-50
1. Clearing contents of RAM

To clear all contents of RAM, turn the power on while pressing and holding down the
[1] [3] and [*] keys together.
2. How to set up FAX

The setting changes to the factory default if the machine is not used for about one month
or more. Follow the steps below to set up the fax.
3. Enter ship’s name by referring character code list in the operator’s manual.
7. Press [FUNCTION/NO] to change line type from DP to PB.
9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 9902101230 for 12:30, February 1999.
10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. After 2 seconds, “TEL/FAX” appears.
11. Press [FUNCTION/NO] three times.
12. Press [YES], [NO], and then [NO].
13. Press [YES], and then [NO] four times.
14. Press [YES].
15. Press [YES].
16. Change receiving mode to FAX by pressing [AUTO RCV/YES] several times.
H2-6
FELCOM 81
3. How to turn off ECM
Depending on the fax model of the receiving station, necessary is turning off ECM
(Error Correction Mode) of the fax PFX-50. The procedure is;
2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]
and [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order.
Now the screen should show “FUNC0=00010010”
Note)
Press 00010000 in that order to change modem speed from 9600 bps to
2400 bps, 10: 9600bps, 00: 2400bps.
FUNC 0=0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Modem speed
00: 2400bps 10: 9600bps

Note)
FUNC 18=0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
ECM ON/OFF Line MON ON/OFF
0:OFF 1:ON 0:OFF 1:ON

H2-7
FELCOM 81
Reference)
H2-8
FELCOM 81
Setting Modem Speed, Turning Line Monitor ON/OFF
B-FAX: 9600bps
Changing dialing format

Change dialing format “Pulse” to “Pushbutton”. See page H2-8.
H2-9
FELCOM 81
Changing language from Japanese to English
H2-10
FELCOM 81
3.5 Terminal settings
1. Entering AAB
Press [F4], [3] and [8] in this order at normal display.
!
!! ATTENTION: CAN NOT
Enter your ship’s answer back code given by Inmarsat, the press the [Enter] key.
Normally, answer back code consists of telex IMN given by Inmarsat and four
characters your applied to Inmarast for.
EX) TELX IMN No. 4characters X

343164830 JFKS X
Note) Reentering AAB

1. Press [F4], [3] and [8] in this order at normal display.
2. While pressing and holding down both the [Alt] and [Ctrl] keys, enter cipher code;
[A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R]
The AAB stored in the memory is erased.
2. OID/DID Settings
OID,DID settings are entered through the commissioning menu on the Communication
Unit Setup menu. The commissioning menu can be displayed in two ways: by entering a
command or changing the setting of a DIP switch.
Case-1) Displaying the commissioning menu by commands
1. At the standby display, press [F4] [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu.
2. Type FURUNOSERVEICE as the Job No.:
[F][U][R][U][N][O][S][E][R][V][I][C][E]. Press [Enter] key.
3. Type FELCOM81 as the password:[F][E][L][C][O][M][8][1]. Press the [Enter] key.
4. Go to the Communication Unit Setup menu and press [6] and the [Enter] key to
display the commissioning menu. Go to item case-2)-3 in next page.
H2-11
FELCOM 81
Case-2) Displaying the commissioning menu by changing DIP switch setting

1. Turn off the communication unit. Turn on S1#2 on the CPU2 Board.
2. Turn on the communication unit.
3. OID/DIS setting
9: HSD 56k TEL

64k
SYS CPU –13 or above
Note)
The OID/DID numbers assigned from Inmarsat are;
Voice : 01 –0F TELEX : 31 – 3F
FAX : 11 – 1F HSD 56k: 42*
DATA : 21 – 2F HDS 64k: 41*
*: In rare cases, 56k HSD:41 and 64k HSD: 42; 56k HSD:41 and 64k HSD: 51
H2-12
FELCOM 81
How to set OID/DID for HSD
After the modification of the communication unit for the HSD, the OID/DID for
the HSD communication must be set by using the following procedure.
1. Press [F4] [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu.
2. Type “FURUNOSERVICE” as the Job No.
3. Press [Enter] key.
4. Type “FELCOM81” as the password.
5. Press [Enter].
6. Press [6] [Enter] to display the commissioning menu.
7. Press [6] [Enter] to display the OID/DID registration menu.
8. Press [9] for HSD ID registration.
9. Enter the ID(s) assigned by the organization for the HSD64 and/or HSD56
communication.
10. Set the telephone terminal number to be used for HSD call. In the example
below, No.3 telephone is used for HSD call.
If provided, the DTMF (Dial Tone Multi Frequency) signal from the HSD
terminal can be connected to the telephone terminal on the communication unit
IB-281. In this case, the telephone number to be used must be entered on the
HSD ID line, but the OID/DID setting for the telephone is not required. If the
DTMF signal is not connected to the communication unit and is not provided, no
telephone number is entered on the HSD ID line and the No.1 telephone is used
for the HSD calling.
In the example below, the OIDs/DIDs for the HSD56 and the HSD64 are 41 and
51 respectively. The DTMF signal from the HSD terminal is connected to the
No.3 telephone terminal, that is, the calling from the HSD terminal is made by
using the No.3 telephone line. Note that no ID is entered on the No.3 TEL/FAX
line.
H2-13
FELCOM 81
[OID/DID Registration]
TEL FAX ID
1: 01 -- 7: Data 21
2: 02 -- 8: Telex 31 123456789
3: -- -- 9: HSD (64k) 51 TEL3
4: -- -- (56k) 41
5: -- --
E: Exit
H2-14
FELCOM 81
3. Setting up DMG message (Class 1 only)
4. Setting up Network Setup menu
H2-15
FELCOM 81
4. Self Test
4.1 IB-581
H2-16
FELCOM 81
4.2 Description of Status Monitor Display
H2-17
FELCOM 81
H2-18
FELCOM 81
H2-19
FELCOM 81
5. How to update the Terminal program

2. After a message "OK to quit system? Yes/No" has appeared,

A prompt "A:\>" will appear.


- press [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L] and [Enter] keys, successively.

To confirm the version of the terminal program,
- press [F1] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
H2-20
FELCOM 81
Reference) How to use HSD Checker
Using MES loop back service, the function of HSD modem can be checked by
following the steps below. This test requires the HSD Checker (no code number).
1. Turn on the FELCOM 80/81 and the HSD modem IB-680/681.
2. Confirm that the READY (SYNC&READY) lamp on the front panel of the
IB-280/281 comes on.
3. Connect the HSD checker to the “RS-422” or “RS-232C” terminal.
4. Set the DIP switches on the checker. For example, to check the RS422 port, set the
RTS and DTR switched to the lower position, and others to the upper position.
DIP Switches
Figure 1) Front panel of HSD checker
5. Set the DIP switches on the front panel of the IB-680/681 for RS-422 direct-call.
-SW1 (Automatic call) Set to OFF :Direct call ON :Address call
-SW2 (Terminal I/F) Set to OFF :RS-442 ON :RS-232C
(Depend on connected port.)
-SW3 to SW 8 Set to OFF
H2-21
FELCOM 81
6. Register the telephone number for the loop back service. For example;
Register the telephone number
Parth : *51* 222 0061 29 3334699#

Burum: *51* 012 0031 10 2947020#
You can check register the telephone number ;
Press * 9 6 # on the No.1 telephone.
7. Set the DTR switch on the checker to the upper position to commence the call. TX
and SYNC LEDs on the HSD modem come on. If TX LED does not light, check DIP
switch setting. If the SYNC LED does not come on, the receiver circuit may be
defective.
CR11 to CR18
DTR switch
8. LEDs, CR11 to CR18 light irregularly for about 10 seconds. Then, some LEDs
come on according to the setting of the sending data pattern switch.
H2-22
FELCOM 81
9. Change the sending data pattern switch setting. If the on/off pattern of the LEDs
CR11 to CR18 changes according to the sending data pattern switch setting, the
HSD modem is normal. The sending data pattern switches from left to right do not
correspond to the LEDs CR11 to CR18. The synchronization of both patterns
depends on the timing.
Sending data pattern switches
In the example of Figure 4 ;
Sending data pattern: ON/ON/OFF/ON/ON/OFF/ON/ON
Receiving data pattern:
OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/ON (normal) – left figure
ON/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/OFF (abnormal) – right figure
Correct receiving pattern Wrong receiving pattern
Figure 4) Sending data pattern and receiving data pattern
10. Set the DTR switch to lower position to terminate the call.
11. Clear the registered telephone number:
Press * 5 1 * # on the No.1 telephone.
H2-23
1. Connection
One compact communication unit allows us to use full Inmarsat B services: telephone,
fax, telex, 9.6k data (MSD), and HSD communications. The FELCOM 82 works from
AC power supply, 110 VAC or 220 VAC. There are two models of FELCOM 82:
FELCOM 82A (class 1) and FELCOM 82B (class 2). The FELCOM 82A consists of an
antenna unit, a communication unit, a handset, a junction box, a printer, a telex terminal
unit, and distress alert buttons. The FELCOM 82B does not have a telex terminal unit.
The optional multi-communication unit increases the number of telephone and/or
facsimile machine that may be connected from 3 sets to 10 sets. A telephone, a
facsimile machine, a multi communication unit (PBX), an incoming indicator, and a
credit card call adapter are also supplied optionally. The telephone distress alert button
may be located at either the IB-362, or at the handset hanger, which utilizes a built in
distress alert button. The system requi
IB-182
Antenna unit
8D-FB-CV:30/50m
12D-SFA-CV:100m
Handset &
Hanset hanger Class-1
ANT
IB-882 VDU IB-582
HANDSET Keyboard
100/220VAC IB-882/362(Tel DIS) 24V Terminal unit
IB-781
MJ-2S Gyro Gyro Class-2
Tel PRINTER
Credit call adapter
or FAX & Card Reader
MJ-2S PP-510
No.1 Tel 24V Printer
or FAX
MJ-2S
No.3-1 MJ-2S JUNCTION
Tel or FAX No.2 Tel
or FAX IB-313
MJ-2S Junction
No.3-2 MJ-2S PC
No.3 Tel box MSD
Tel or FAX (For MSD)
or FAX (9.6k data)
MJ-2S
No.3-3 To TEL3 port
Multi communication unit
Tel or FAX
PC
MJ-2S Incoming (For HSD)
No.3-4 Indicator
HSD HSD I/F
(56/64k)
Tel or FAX IB-372 EX) KlasHpopper
MJ-2S PCMCIA-400/PCI-400
No.3-5 TLX DIS
Tel or FAX ALT Button
IB-782
MJ-2S
IB-352
No.3-6
Tel or FAX TEL DIS AC IN 100/220VAC
Button
MJ-2S IB-362
No.3-7
Tel or FAX Can not be used
when IB-882/362 is used.
MJ-2S
No.3-8 IB-282
Tel or FAX NAV Communication
unit
100/220VAC AC IN
H3-1
FELCOM 82
2. System settings
2.1 Heading alignment
The system detects the heading direction at every power-up by using the limit switch in
the antenna unit. The switch is factory-adjusted so that the antenna is installed with the
access hatch located in the stern. When the antenna unit is installed with a directional
offset of 90, 180 or 270 degrees, following adjustment is necessary.
1. Mark the four screw locations on the disk.

2. Loosen the four screws fixing the disk.
3. Rotate the disk according to the access hatch position. For example, if the hatch is
located on the starboard side, rotate the disk 90 degrees counter clockwise.
4. Tighten the screws.
5. Confirm that the limit switch hits when the antenna points toward the ship’s bow.
Protrusion
Limit switch
Disk
Screws fixing the

disk, 4pcs.
H3-2
FELCOM 82
2.2 Telephone setting
2.2.1 Changing dialing system

The telephone FC755D1 is factory-set to pulse telephone system, so it must be changed
to push-button (PB) dialing system by using the steps below.
1. Use the tip of a pen or other pointed object to remove the plastic cover.
2. Remove the memo sheet.
3. Set #1 of DIP switch to ON. (#2 to #4 remains unchanged; OFF position)
4. Replace the sheet and the cover.
Line type
Sidetone
Bell off
PB S
ON
OFF
DP L
2.2.2 Activating echo cancel

In voice communications, when a land subscriber speeches into the microphone, he/she
may hear own voice like an echo from the loudspeaker on the handset. The echo
canceller eliminates the echo from the handset of the land subscriber. The echo cancel
function is set on the Echo Cancel menu as follows. Opening the Echo Cancel menu
needs a password.
1. Press [FUNC] [7] [4] to open “Echo Cancel” menu. If the password is requested,
press [FUNC] [6] [3], and type 5963, followed by [Enter]. Then type [7] [4].
2. Type the numeric key corresponding to the line to be set.
3. Press [2] to turn on the echo cancel function.
H3-3
FELCOM 82
2.2.3 T/Rx Volume level setting

The system provides T/Rx volume (Codec Level) setting function for the voice
communication. This function is set on the “Codec Level” menu as follows.
1. Press [FUNC] [*] [2] [6] [3] [3] [2].

“Codec Level” appears as follow.
Codec Level
Codec IN: 20
Codec OUT: 80
Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit]
2. Set Codec IN level and Codec OUT level to a desired value.

Codec IN adjusts Tx level and Codec OUT Rx level. The adjustable range is 10 to 90.
2.3 Fax setting (PFX-50)

At installation and when the machine is not used for one month or more, the fax
machine must be set up again.
2.3.1 Changing dialing parameters

To change dialing parameters,
(This step is to clear the memory.)
3. Enter ship's name by referring character code list in the operator's manual.
7. Press [FUNCTION/NO], then, change line type from DP to PB (tone dialing).
9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 0102101230 for 12:30,
February 10, 2001.
11. After "01-02-10 TEL" appears, press [AUTO RCV/YES] to change the display to
"01-02-10 FAX. "
H3-4
FELCOM 82
2.3.2 Turning on ECM

When sending a large number of pages and large images, turn on Error Correction Mode
or ECM. Otherwise, a communications error will occur. When the ECM is set to ON,
“EC” is displayed on the display and when it is set to OFF, “G3” appears. To turn on
ECM;
1. Turn on the fax machine while pressing and holding down [1] and [3].
2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]
[FUNCTION/NO] [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show
FUNC0=000100010.
2.3.3 Sending fax via voice line

To send fax via voice line, change the modem speed from 9600 to 2400 by following
steps below.
2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO]
[FUNCTION/NO] [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show
FUNC0=000100010.
3. Press [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] [0] [0] [0].
00010010: 9600 bps, 00010000: 2400 bps
H3-5
FELCOM 82
2.4 Gyro setting

The communication unit has a built-in gyro I/F board, 64P1106, identical to the one
used in Furuno large radars. The board must be set up according to the type of the gyro
connected.
Default setting
-Type : AC synchro
-Frequency : 50/60 Hz
-Rotor Voltage : 60 VAC to 135 VAC
-Stator Voltage : 60 VAC to 135 VAC
-Gear Ratio : 360X
-Supplied Power : 30 VAC to 135 VAC
GYRO I/F Board

(64P1106)
2.4.1 Switch and Jumper Setting

The default settings are shown in shaded cell of each setting item. (Turn off the unit to
change the settings.)
1) Gyro type
Gyro Type SW1 #4 SW1 #5 SW1 #6 JP1
AC synchro OFF OFF OFF #1, #2, #3
DC synchro OFF OFF OFF #2, #3, #4
DC step ON OFF OFF #4, #5, #6
Full-wave pulsating current OFF ON OFF #4, #5, #6
Half-wave pulsating current ON ON OFF #4, #5, #6
2) Frequency
Frequency SW1 #7 SW1 #8 Remarks
50/60 Hz OFF OFF AC synchro pulsating current
400 Hz ON OFF AC synchro pulsating current
500 Hz OFF ON AC synchro pulsating current
DC ON ON DC synchro, DC step
H3-6
FELCOM 82
3) Rotor voltage (between R1 and R2)

Rotor voltage SW2 #1 JP3 Remarks
20 to 45 VAC ON #2
30 to 70 VAC OFF #2
40 to 90 VAC ON #1
60 to 135 VAC OFF #1
4) Stator voltage (between S1 and S2)

Stator voltage SW2 #2 SW2 #3 JP3 Remarks
20 to 45 VAC ON OFF #2
20 to 60 VDC
30 to 70 VAC OFF OFF #2
40 to 100 VDC
40 to 90 VAC ON OFF #1
60 to 135 VAC OFF OFF #1
5) Ratio
Ratio SW1 #1 SW1 #2 SW1 #3 Remarks
360x OFF OFF OFF
180x ON OFF OFF
90x OFF ON OFF
36x ON ON OFF
6) Supply voltage
Supply voltage JP4 JP5 Remarks
20 to 45 VAC #2 #2
20 to 60 VDC
30 to 135 VAC #1 #1
40 to 100 VDC
7) NMEA data output interval

SW2, #4 selects the output interval either 2 sec. or 1 sec.; ON: 2 sec. and OFF: 1 sec.
8) AD10 data output interval

Select to 25 ms by changing the jumper block on JP6 and JP7 corresponding to
the output port. Do not use 200 ms.
H3-7
FELCOM 82
H3-8
FELCOM 82
2.4.2 Heading set up

If the gyro reading does not match the one displayed on the handset or terminal unit,
complete the following procedure with the handset.
1. Press [FUNC] [5] [2] in this order. The “52 Gyro” menu is displayed.
52Gyro
Gyro:000
Hold:OFF
Enter:[Ent]
2. Press the down arrow key to move the cursor onto “Hold.”
3. Press the left arrow key to turn on Hold function.
4. Press up arrow key to move the cursor onto “Gyro.”
5. Enter the gyro reading using numeric keys.
6. Press down arrow key to move the cursor onto “Hold.”
7. When the gyro indication is equal to the gyro reading, press the right arrow key,
followed by [Enter] key.
8. Use the [FUNC] key to close the menu.
9. Confirm that the gyro indication on the handset follows the change of the ship's
heading.
H3-9
FELCOM 82
2.5 Setup NAV data input circuit
Depending on the input signal, nav data input circuit must be modified as below.
J19
J17 U126
R228 R227
8
390 100 U133 U133
NAV DATA NMEA IN
CR56
9
NMEA-2.0(IEC-61162) : RS-422 J19 short (Default)

NMEA-1.5 : C.Loop J19 open
J19
H3-10
FELCOM 82
2.6 Entering answer back code (only for class-1)
The answerback code required by telex communication is registered onto the terminal
unit, IB-582. The answerback code is 9-digit IMN (Inmarsat Mobile Number) plus
4-letter telex answerback applied to the Inmarsat. To register the answerback code,
1. Press [F4] [3] [8] in this order.

Answerback Code
Cursor ---------------------------------------------
!! ATTENTION: CAN NOT REENTER !!
2. Enter the answerback code.

For example, IMN is 343164810 and 4-letter answerback is JFKS, type;
343164810 (space) JFKS (space) X
“X” must be always added for ship earth station.
Reentering answerback code

When you enter a wrong answerback code, type ANSWER while pressing and holding
down [Alt] and [Fn] to erase it.
H3-11
FELCOM 82
2.7 OID/DID setting

Originating and Destination Identifications (OID/DID), assigned by the authority, must
be programmed onto the EEPROM, U91 on the CPU board in the field. If not, calls
cannot be accepted throughout the Inmarsat B network. The network can identify the
system onboard a ship, using factory-programmed Forward/Return IDs, but it cannot
identify the end terminal and service type. In other words, the FELCOM 82 must be
able to determine which port should ring when a call comes in, and also, whether the
call is a voice call, a fax call, an HSD call, etc. in addition, it must know which ID
number is utilized on an outgoing call. HEX ID numbers must be programmed into the
FELCOM 82 so that the proper port /mode is identified.
The OID/DID is used by the LES to identify the desired end terminal and the route
between SES (Ship Earth Station).
The OID/DID is “HEX” values” detailed below.
Voice: 01 to 0F
Fax: 11 to 1F
Data: 21 to 2F
Telex: 31 to 3F
56k HSD 41 (or 42 depending on the authority)
64k HSD 42 (41, or 51 depending on the authority)
For example, if the SES installed to provide 3 telephones, 1 facsimile, 1 9.6k data, 1
telex, and 64k HSD, OID/DIDs for these should be:
Handset: 01
Telephone-1: 02
Telephone-2: 03
Fax machine: 11
9.6k data (PC): 21
Telex machine: 31
64k data: 42
The following explains how to enter OID/DIDs when you do not receive OID/DIDs, but
IMNs from the authority. For example, a given vessel applies for and receives 8 ID
numbers. Of these numbers, 3 are voice, 1 is fax, one is Telex, one is MSD, one is
HSD/56 and one is HSD/64.
If the ID's received from INMARSAT are;
399999990 voice
399999991 voice 2
399999992 voice 3
399999993 FAX
399999994 telex
399999995 9600 data
399999996 HSD/56
399999997 HSD/64
H3-12
FELCOM 82
The OID / DID settings should be:

Handset port, voice: 01
Tel-1 port, voice: 02
Tel-2 port voice: 03
Tel-3 port FAX: 11
PC 9600: 21
Telex machine: 31
HSD (56k) 41 (51or 42 depending on the authority)
HSD (64k): 42 (41 or 51 depending on the authority)
In this scenario, a person calling the vessel from a shore phone would call 399999990,
and the handset would ring. If they dialed 399999991, the phone that was plugged into
port two would ring.
If someone wanted to send a FAX to the vessel, they would dial 399999992, and
port number 3 (FAX) would then ring. The fax machine would be plugged into port
three, and would then answer the call and receive the fax.
2.7.1 Preprogramming OID/DID from terminal unit
To preprogram OID/DID;
1. Press [F4] [6] in this order to call “Comm. Unit Setup” menu.
2. Type FURUNOSERVICE on the JOB No. line and press [Enter] key.
3. Type a password, FELCOM82 and press [Enter] key. Note that the password you
typed does not appear on the display. Now, you can select “5:Commissioning.”
Communication Unit Setup
FELCOM82 InmarsatB MES [Communication UNIT IB-282]
Copyright (C) FURUNO Electiric Co., Ltd, 2000
(Type “HELP” or “?” for help)
[Main Menu]
1:Ocean Region 4:Test
2:DMG Setup
3:Network Setup
Enter JOB No.: FURUNOSERVICE
Password: FELCOM82 Not displayed
[Main Menu]
1:Ocean Region 4:Test
2:DMG Setup 5.Commissioning
3:Network Setup
Enter JOB No.:
H3-13
FELCOM 82
4. Press [5], followed by [Enter] key.

5. Press [6], followed by [Enter] key to call “OID/DID Registration” menu.
Communication Unit Setup
2:Ship Position
3:Commitioning Request Switch
4:Telephony Baseband Port Switch
5:Frequency Measurement Switch
6:OID/DID Registration
E:Exit
Enter JOB No.:6
OID/DID Registration
TEL FAX ID
1:HSET _ _ 5:DATA _
2:TEL1 _ _ 6:TELEX _ ________
3:TEL2 _ _ 7:HSD(64k) _
4:TEL3 _ _ (54k) _
E:Exit
Enter No.:
6. Press numeric key corresponding to that on which line you enter the OID/DID,
followed by [Enter] key. For example, to enter FAX OID/DID for TEL3 line,
press [4], followed by [Enter] key.
TEL FAX ID
1:HSET 01 _ 5:DATA 21
2:TEL1 02 _ 6:TELEX 31 343199710
3:TEL2 03 _ 7:HSD(64k) 42 HSET
4:TEL3 _ 11 (54k) 41
7. Type OID/DID, followed by [Enter] key.

Note)
1. TEL1 to TEL3 lines are used for either telephone or fax.
2. TELEX OID/DID must be entered together with the telex number.
3. To use the handset on the fax machine for voice communication,
a) Enter TEL and FAX OID/DIDs on the same line. For example, the
PFX-50 is connected to the TEL3 line, enter 02 and 11 on the TEL3 line.
Now the handset on the fax machine can be used as telephone.
b) Change the receive mode to TEL.
c) Prefix dialing is unnecessary.
4. In item number seven, a phone port may be selected to initiate a manually
dialed HSD call. For example, if TEL2 is selected, TEL2 may then be used
to DIAL an HSD call.
8. Press [Esc] to close the menu.
H3-14
FELCOM 82
2.7.2 Programming OID/DID from handset
To preprogram the OID/DID,

1. Press [FUNC] [5] [9] to call “59 OID/DID” menu.
If the password is requested, press [FUNC] [6] [3], type 5963 as a password,
and press [Enter]. Then, press [5] [9].
63 Change Mode
User-!Administrator
Enter Passwd:
- - - -
Enter: [Enter]
2. Select the desired line. For example, to enter TEL OID/DID onto the TEL1 line,
select TELFAX1.
59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID

TEL FAX1 NUM
1 TELFAX1 5 TELEX [1] OID DID
2 TELFAX2 6 MSD TEL: _ _ / _ _
3 TELFAX3 7 HSD IMN:__________
4 HANDSET 8 PBX FAX: _ _ / _ _
Select:[Ent] Select:[Ent] IMN:
Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit]
H3-15
FELCOM 82
3. Enter OID/DID and INM. For example, to enter TEL OID/DID of 02 on the
TELFAX1 line, press 0202. Press the down arrow key to move the cursor onto
the INM line. Type IMN number followed by [Ent] key.
a) [Mode] key alternates between numeric and alphabetic entries.
b) Wrong entry can be corrected by moving the cursor over it and type new
number.
c) Press [Ent] key to enter the procedure.
59OID/DID 59OID/DID 59OID/DID

TEL FAX1 NUM HANDSET NUM TELEX NUM
OID DID OID DID OID DID
TEL: _ _ / _ _ TEL: _ _ / _ _ TLX: _ _ / _ _
IMN: __________ IMN: __________ IMN: __________
FAX: _ _ / _ _
IMN: ___________
Enter:[Ent] Enter:[Ent] Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit] Quit:[Quit] Quit:[Quit]
TELFAX OID/DID HANDSET OID/DID TELX OID/DID
59OID/DID 59OID/DID
MSD NUM HSD NUM
OID DID OID DID
TEL: _ _ / _ _ 64k: _ _ / _ _
IMN: __________ IMN: __________
56k: _ _ / _ _
IMN: __________
Enter:[Ent] Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit] Quit:[Quit]
MDS(9.6k) OID/DID HSD OID/DID
4. Press [FUNC] key.
5. Set the password if it is not set yet.
H3-16
FELCOM 82
2.7.3 When IB-782 (PBX) is installed:

The IB-782 is connected to TEL 3 port and their OIDs/DIDs are set as below.
IB-782
Multi communication unit
MJ-2S
No.3-1 MJ-2S
TEL3-1
Tel or FAX No.1 Tel TEL1
MJ-2S or FAX
No.3-2 JUNCTION
Tel or FAX TEL3-2 MJ-2S
No.2 Tel TEL2
MJ-2S or FAX
No.3-3
TEL3-3
Tel or FAX
LINE TEL3
MJ-2S IB-282
No.3-4 Communication
TEL3-4
Tel or FAX
IB-313 unit
MJ-2S Junction
No.3-5 BOX
TEL3-5
Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
No.3-6
TEL3-6
Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
No.3-7
TEL3-7
Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
No.3-8
TEL3-8
Tel or FAX
100/220VAC AC IN
1. Press [FUNC] [5] [9] in this order to call “59 OID/DID”.
59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID
1 TELFAX1 5 TELEX
2 TELFAX2 6 MSD
3 TELFAX3 7 HSD
4 HANDSET 8 PBX
Select:[Ent] Select:[Ent]
2. Press [8] to select PBX Mode ON/OFF.
59 OID/DID
PBX Mode:OFF
ON/OFF
Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit]
3. Press [8] to select PBX Mode ON/OFF.
59 OID/DID
PBX Mode:OFF
ON/OFF
Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit]
H3-17
FELCOM 82
4. Press the left arrow key to turn ON the PBX Mode.

DID (Direct in dial) should be OFF. Press [ENT] to return to Main menu.
59 OID/DID Main Menu
PBX Mode:ON 1
ON/OFF 2
DID Mode:OFF [Ent] 3
ON/OFF 4 Display
Enter:[Ent] Select:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit]
5. Press [5] [9] to call “59 OID/DID”.
59 OID/DID 59 OID/DID
5 TELEX
1 TELFAX1 6 MSD
2 TELFAX2 7 HSD
3 TELFAX3-PBX 8 PBX
4 HANDSET
Select:[Ent] Select:[Ent]
6. Press [3] to open “3 TELFAX3-PBX” menu.
59 OID/DID
EXT:01 NUM
OID DID
TEL: _ _ /
IMN: ___________
FAX: _ _ /
IMN: ___________
Enter:[Ent]
Quit:[Quit]
7. Enter the port number of the PBX to which the telephone is connected: 01 to 08.
Enter OID/DID and IMN.
H3-18
FELCOM 82
2.8 HSD set up
This procedure is done from the Administration mode. See “2.8 About password” for
how to choose the Administration mode.
Press [FUNC Quit] and [8] to select the HSD menu. The HSD menu appears as follows.
1. Dest. No 6. Cammand
2. Call TEL 7. Character
3. Data Rate 8. Ignore DTR
4. Dial Method 9. Print HSD
5. Auto Rate
Destination no.
For a direct call key in subscriber’s complete ISDN number, beginning with LES
number. Maximum 20 digits may be used. Prefix dialing cannot be used.
Call TEL (TEL-1, 2, 3, HANDSET)

Chooses the handset or telephone to use for HSD calling. The default setting is Handset.
Data Rate (64 k / 56 k)

Choose the data rate from 64k and 56k. The default setting is 64k. Confirm data rate of
subscriber before setting.
Dial Method (Direct / Address)

Choose the dial method from Direct (DTR) and Address (V.25bis). The default setting is
Direct.
-Direct means direct call. When the HSD Terminal turns on communications
begins with party registered on the HSD menu. This call is also referred to
“Hot Dial.”
-Address means address call. Calling begins after specifying subscriber (CRN
command) at the HSD Terminal. This call is also referred to “V.25bis Dial.”
Auto Rate (ON / OFF)

Auto Rate determines whether or not to receive an HSD call whose data rate is different
from that set on the HSD menu. The default is OFF which prevents receiving. Use the
OFF setting for an HSD Terminal which cannot automatically adjust its synchro clock
to match data rate.
Command Format (HDLC / BSC)

Set the V.25bis command format for address calls sent from the HSD Terminal to the
FELCOM 82. Select HDLC (default setting) or BSC depending on specifications of the
HSD Terminal.
H3-19
FELCOM 82
Character Format (8 bit None / 7 bit Odd)

Choose the character format for address calls sent from the HSD Terminal to the
FELCOM 82. Select 8bit (default setting) or 7bit depending on specifications of the
HSD Terminal.
Ignore DTR (Normal / Ignore)

When an HSD call is received, the FELCOM 82 responds to the call without checking
“DTR” signal from the terminal units. When “Norma” is selected, the FELCOM 82
check the DTR signal before the response.
2.9 About password

The system provides two handset menus: User and Administrator. The administrator
menu needs a 4-digit password. The system is delivered with the password set to 0000.
When the password is 0000, it has no effect and all menus can be called by anyone.
See Chapter 8 menu tree for the difference between the user and administrator menus.
2.9.1 Setting password.

To set a password;
1. Press [FUNC] [6] [7] to call “67 Password” menu on the handset.
67 Password
Old : - - - -
New: - - - -
Conf: - - - -
Enter:[Ent]
2. Type 0000 on the “Old” line. Asterisks appear in place of the

password.
3. Move the cursor onto the “New” line by using the down arrow key.
4. Type the new 4 digit password.
5. Move the cursor onto the “Conf” line by using a down arrow key.
6. Type new password again and press [Enter] key.
7. The message “Password is changed.” is displayed and the Main menu
appears 3 seconds later.
H3-20
FELCOM 82
2.9.2 5963
When servicing, you will not use the user password. A special number 5963 unlocks the
handset menu.
1. Press [FUNC] [6] [3] to call “63 Change Mode” menu.
63 Change Mode
User-!Admin
Enter Passwd:
- - - -
Enter: [Enter]
2. Enter 5963 as a password, and press [Enter]. Now you can enter the administrator
menu through the displayed main menu. Once you escape from the main menu, the
next main menu is of the user mode.
2.9.3 Factory reset of password menu

If the user forgets the password, complete the following procedure and the password
will return to 0000. Other menu settings will remain unchanged.
1. Press [FUNC] [6] [3] in this order, using the handset.
63 Change Mode
User-!Admin
Enter Passwd:
- - - -
Enter: [Enter]
2. Enter 5963, followed by [Enter] key.

3. While the main menu is on the screen, press [6] [7] to call “67 Password” menu.
67Password
Old : - - - -
New: - - - -
Conf: - - - -
Enter:[Ent]
4. Enter 5963 onto the “Old” line. ([Enter] key not pressed)
5. Move the cursor to the “New” line and enter 0000.
6. Move the cursor to the “Conf” line and enter 0000.
7. Press [Enter] key. After "password is changed" is shown, the main menu
appears 3 seconds later.
8. Make sure that the user enters a new password. If the menu remains unlocked, all
menus are accessible and system settings may be inadvertently changed.
H3-21
FELCOM 82
2.10 Returning settings to factory defaults

Clear the RAM to set the menu to factory-defaults.
2.10.1 By using terminal unit

To clear RAM contents;
1. Press [F4] [6] to call Communication Setup menu.
2. Type CLR (space) RAM on the “Enter JOB No.” line and press [Enter] key.
3. Type DENPA4 on the “Password” line and press [Enter] key.
4. Wait for a while so that the status display is redrawn.
2.10.2 By using handset

1. Press [FUNC], [6], and [9] in this order to call “Initialize” menu.
69 Initialize
All data & logs

Are cleared.
ARE YOU SURE?
Clear:[82]
Quit:[Quit]
If you cannot get into “Initialize,” press [FUNC] [6] and [3] to call “Change
Mode” menu. Type the password or 5963 followed by [Enter] key if you cannot
find the password. The menu changes to Main Menu when you enter password
or 5963. While the Main Menu on the screen, type [6] [9] to call “Initialize”
menu.
63 Change Mode
User-!Admin
Enter Passwd:
- - - -
Enter: [Enter]
2. Press [8] and [2] in this order to clear the memory and wait until “Now
Initializing” disappears.
H3-22
FELCOM 82
3. Self-test
3.1 Using handset

You can get into the test menu only while in the administration mode. If the system is
locked, enter the password 5963 to change the mode, and follow the steps below to
access the test menu.
1. Press [FUNC] [6] [8] in this order to show the Test menu.
68 Test
1 Version
2 Memory
3 Distress
Select:[Ent]
2. Press [2] to carry out memory test.

3. Press [Enter] to begin the test. During the test, “Testing ….” appears. The test result
appears as follows. To change the page, press up or down arrow key.
68 Test 68 Test
!! !"
Memory Test !→ Memory Test
MAIN OK ←" SYNC OK
TERM OK DECODE OK
DEMOD OK HANDSET OK
Quit: [Quit] Quit: [Quit]
4. If necessary, press [HOLD Print] key to print out the test result. The following
message is printed.
------------------ 68 Memory Test <2001-01-10 00:00(UTC) ---------------------------

----- TEST TESULT -----
MAIN OK DEMOD OK
TERM OK SYNC OK
HANDSET OK DECODE OK
ANTENNA OK
H3-23
FELCOM 82
The table below lists RAMs and ROMs that are tested during the memory test. The SYS
CPU sends read and write commands to each memory location.
Item Circuit ROM RAM

MAIN System CPU U95, Flash U130, U134, U136, U139
DECODE Decoder DSP U16, Flash Built into DSP
TERM Terminal DSP U46, Flash Built into DSP
SYNC Synchronous DSP U9, Flash Built into DSP
DEMOD Demodulator DSP U3, Flash Built into DSP
HANDSET If communication between Handset CPU and SYS CPU is normal, the
test result is OK.
ANTENNA PCU CPU checks ROM/RAM in PCU.
3.2 Using terminal unit

The same self-test as the one carried out from the handset can be made from the
terminal unit. To test the unit;
1. Press [F4] [6] [4] and [Enter] in this order.
2. Press [Y] key followed by [Enter] key. The test result appears on the screen as
follows.
… Now executing Test (cannot abort) …

----- TEST RESULT -----
MAIN OK DEMOD OK
TERM OK SYNC OK
HANDSET OK DECODE OK
ANTENNA OK
The table below lists RAMs and ROMs to be tested during the memory test. The SYS
CPU sends read and write commands to each memory location.
Item Circuit ROM RAM

MAIN System CPU U95, Flash U130, U134, U136, U139
DECODE Decoder DSP U16, Flash Built into DSP
TERM Terminal DSP U46, Flash Built into DSP
SYNC Synchronous DSP U9, Flash Built into DSP
DEMOD Demodulator DSP U3, Flash Built into DSP
HANDSET If communication between Handset CPU and SYS CPU is normal, the
test result is OK.
ANTENNA PCU CPU checks ROM/RAM in PCU.
H3-24
FELCOM 82
3.3 Reading program number
3.3.1 Using handset

To display program numbers press [1] key while the test menu (68) is on the screen. The
program numbers are listed on two pages. To change the page, press up or down arrow
key.
68 Test 68 Test
!! !"
Version List !→ Version List
MAIN XX ←" SYNC XX
TERM XX CECODE XX
DEMOD XX HANDSET XX
Quit: [Quit]
To printout the program list, press [HOLD Print] key.
------------------ 68 Version List <2001-01-10 00:00(UTC) ---------------------------

MAIN 165-0145-0xx DEMOD 165-0142-0xx
TERM 165-0146-0xx SYNC 165-0143-0xx
HANDSET 165-0152-0xx DECODE 165-0144-0xx
3.3.2 Using terminal unit

To display program numbers, press [F4] [6] [4] and [Enter] in this order.
<<Program No.>>
DEMOD 165-0142-0xx SYNC 165-0143-0xx
DECODER 165-0144-0xx TERM 165-0146-0xx
HANDSET 165-0152-0xx CPU 165-0145-0xx
ANTENNA 165-0102-0xx
H3-25
FELCOM 82
3.4 Distress alert test (FUNC683)

Very Important!
Carry out the test within 30 seconds, or actual distress alert is

transmitted.
Distress alert test mode lasts only for 30 seconds.
3.4.1 Telephone
To test the telephone distress button;
1. On the handset, press [FUNC] [6] [8] to call Test menu.
2. Press [3] key, followed by [Enter] key. DISTRESS TEST MODE appears on the
handset screen, and printed out is “DISTRESS TEST Mode entered.”
2001-01-10
00:00UTC
DISTRESS
TEST MODE
#III POR Ready
3. Within 30 seconds, press “DISTRESS” button on the handset or IB-362 for

more than 6 seconds.
“Telephone Distress Button Pressed.” and
“Telephone Distress Button Activated” are printed out.
4. Press off-hook key.
5. Type LES code in three digits and press [#] key. You can hear the replay from the
LES, recorded on the tape.
6. Press on-hook key to terminate the test.
“DISTRESS TEST Mode exited.” is printed out.
H3-26
FELCOM 82
3.4.2 Telex (for class-1)

Before the test, confirm that the DMG ([FUNC] [5] [8]) is setup correctly. During the
test, data in the Distress Message Generator (DMG) is sent to the LES selected by
[FUNC] [5] [7].
To test the telex distress button;

1. On the handset, press [FUNC] [6] [8] to call Test menu.
2. Press [3] key, followed by [Enter] key. DISTRESS TEST MODE appears on the
handset screen, and printed out is “DISTRESS TEST Mode entered.”
2001-01-10
00:00UTC
DISTRESS
TEST MODE
#III POR Ready
3. Within 30 seconds, press “DISTRESS” button on the IB-352 for more than 6
seconds.
“Telex Distress Button Pressed.” and
“Telex Distress Button Activated” are printed out.
The test alert message is transmitted automatically and the reply from the LES
should be received. Yamaguchi replays the following messages, for example.
4. Press [F10] key to terminate the test.
--------------TELEX DISTRESS ALERT MESSAGE-------------------------------------

01-01-30 05:26 YMI 003
343199710 FRTS X
THIS IS INMARSAT RECORDED MESSAGE.
TO
343199710 FRTS X
MARITIME
LAT 34 45 N , LONG 135 21 E
05 26 UTC , 30 JAN
10
215
00
UR TEST DISTRESS CALL HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY RECEVED.

PLEASE REMENBER TO RE-SET 04894856 59 ‘ROUTINE’.
END OF MESSAGE.
CECI EST UN ACCUSE DE RECEPTION PRE-ENREGISTRE D’INMARSAT.

VOTRE ESSAI D’APPEL DE DETRESSE A REUSSI.
VEUILLEZ RETABLIR L’INDICATEUR DE PRIORITE EN MODE ‘ROUTINE’.
FIN DU MESSAGE.
---- +END OF CALL+ -------------------------------------------------------------------------
H3-27
FELCOM 82
3.5 Status monitor

The SYS CPU handles the status monitor.
3.5.1 Display on handset

To show the monitor screen on the handset;
1. Press [FUNC] [4] [1] in this order.
2. Press an arrow key to change the page.
41 Monitor 41 Monitor
Heading 270 Tx EIRP 000

Az 119 Tx RF 000
El 30 Rx C/N 053
LAT 34:00.00 N Rx IF AGC 154
LON 135:00.00 E
41 Monitor 41 Monitor
Rx Synth OK ANT REMOTE

Tx Synth OK El Axis OK
Rx Ch 11292 Az Axis OK
Tx Ch 10000 Cross El OK
3. Press [HOLD Print] key to print out the status if necessary.

------- 41 Monitor <2000-06-20 00:00(UTC)> -------------------------------
Current Satellite POR Tx EIRP Level 000
a Channel Status SYNC Tx RF Level 000
e
MES Status Ready Rx C/N 053
Rx IF AGC Level 154
Heading 270 DEG
Antenna Bearing 209 DEG Rx Synthesizer OK
b f
Antenna Azimuth 119 DEG Tx Synthesizer OK
Antenna Elevation 30 DEG
Antenna Status REMOTE
c Position LAT 34:00.00N El AXIS OK
g
LON 135:00.00E Az AXIS OK
NAV DATA NMEA Cross El AXIS OK
d
GYRO DATA OK Rx Channel 11292
h Tx Channel 10000
4. Press [FUNC Quit] key several times to close the menu.

Refer to 7.4.3.
H3-28
FELCOM 82
3.5.2 Display on terminal unit

The same items are monitored on both the terminal unit and the handset, with the
exception of the data and time indication. In addition to the system time, the terminal
unit has own time which is displayed at the upper right-hand corner of the terminal
screen. The time is set by using the following its procedure.
System time:
The Real Time Clock (RTC) on the CPU board generates date and time. When time
between RTC and ZDA from a navaid differs more than 30 seconds for 30 seconds or
more, the RTC is reset by using ZDA data. If ZDA is not available, RMC is used. Time
and date displayed on the handset are system time. Furthermore, the communication log
also uses system time.
Terminal unit time:

The file created on the terminal unit is labeled by this time. To preset time and date,
press [F4] [3] [1] and [F4] [3] [2] respectively.
System time Terminal unit time
(01-01-10 00:00:00)
Date 2001-01-10 e Tx EIRP Level 000

Time 00:00:00(UTC) Tx RF Level 000
Rx C/N 053
a Current Satellite POR Rx IF AGC Level 154
Channel Status SYNC
MES Status Ready f Rx SYN OK
Tx OFF Tx SYN OK
b Heading 270 DEG

Antenna Bearing 209 DEG
Antenna Azimuth 119 DEG g Antenna Status REMOTE
Antenna Elevation 30 DEG El AXIS OK
AZ AXIS OK
c Position LAT 34:00.00N Cross El AXIS OK
LOG 135:00.00E
d NAV DATA NMEA h Rx Channel 11292

GYRO OK Tx Channnel 10000
H3-29
FELCOM 82
3.5.3 Details of status monitor
MES status
- Current Satellite (POR/IOR/AOR-E/AOR-W/Stat 5 to 8)
Indicates satellite (Ocean Region) acquired by SYS CPU. Stat 5 to 8 are not
used.
- Channel Status (SYNC/UNSYNC)

Indicates that the system is synchronizes with the receiving channel or not. The
synchronization is made when SYNC DSP acquires frame sync signal three to
four times.
- MES Status (Wait/Ready/Busy)

*Wait: Appears when the channel status is UNSYNC.
*Ready: Appears when the channel status is SYNC and Ocean region has been
registered.
*Busy: Appears during communication.
- Tx: (ON/OFF)
The SYS CPU generates TX ON/OFF signal.
Antenna status
- Heading
Ship’s heading from a gyrocompass or one entered manually. SYS CPU receives
heading data.
- Antenna Bearing
The Bearing is horizontal direction angle between ship’s heading and the
satellite.
- Antenna Azimuth
The azimuth angle is the angle between North and the horizontal satellite
direction.
- Antenna Elevation
The elevation angle is the satellite height above the horizon as seen from the
ship.
Ship Heading
Heading
True North Satellite

Antenna
Bearing
Antenna
Azimuth
AZ=Heading + Bearing
H3-30
FELCOM 82
Position
Own ship’s position received from the navaid; Acceptable NMEA sentences:
GGA (V.02), RMC, GLL, RMA, and ZDA; Priority: GGA>RMC>GLL>RMA;
Invalid data is not received.
Input data
- NAV DATA (NMEA/NONE)
On the terminal unit, NMEA or NONE appears. On the handset, NAV blinks
when no NAV data or manual position data is input and nothing appears when
data is input correctly.
- GYRO (OK/NONE/HOLD)
On the terminal unit, OK or NONE appears. On the handset, GYRO blinks
when no gyro data is input and nothing appears when data is input correctly.
During the HOLD, GYRO appears on the handset.
TX/RX level
- Tx EIRP Level (33/29/25)
Indicates Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) from the antenna. The
output of the HPA is sent to the SYS CPU via the PCU to calculate EIRP level.
The NCS (LES in case of TLX) assigns the EIRP according to the spot beam to
be used. Each call from the ship includes azimuth and elevation data of the
antenna.
HPA Antenna
LNA Chassis
Tx RF U1 Q5 Duplexer
EIRP
DET
LAN 33dBW
Power 29dBw
CONT 25dBW
Power Control EIRP MON

FSK
PCU
- Tx RF Level (12 to 38)

The output of the RF CON board, +7 dBm to +11 dBm is picked up and sent to
the SYS CPU. The figure below shows TX RF level (dBm) versus TX RF level
indication. The reading is 12 to 38 normally. The error messages #0160 and
#0162 are related to the RF CONV circuit.
H3-31
FELCOM 82
RF CON
U44
Tx RF
Tx IF Q12
56MHz +9dBm
DET
Tx Local
Tx RF Level
40
30
TX RF LEVEL
Indcation
20
10
0 5 10 15 20dBm
TX RF output level (dBm)
Reference level: 9+2dBm
- Rx C/N (40 or more)

The input signal to the SYNC DSP is picked up and sent to the SYS CPU for the
calculation of Carrier per Noise (C/N). When the receiver circuit is normal, C/N
is 40 or more.
U49 U29(AD6620AS) U30 U34 U39

Rx IF BPSK/QPSK DEMOD SYNC DECODE
RF CON U51 A/D
10.7MHz Demodulator DSP DSP DSP
C/N data
CPU
H3-32
FELCOM 82
On the handset, three vertical bars (short, medium, and long) right to the antenna
symbol indicate the C/N data or signal quality. The number of the bar versus C/N value
is;
CESH (HSD) CESD/CESV (FIU/Data/Voice) NCSC

(Telex)
59 or more: 3 bars 53 or more: 3 bars 48 or
more: 3 bars
56 or more: 2 bars 50 or more: 2 bars 44 or more: 2 bars
53 or more: 1 bar 47 or more: 1 bar 40 or more: 1 bar
52 or less: no bar 46 or less: no bar 39 or less: no bar
The following figures show the change of C/N when the azimuth and elevation angles
are changed from the antenna position where the strongest signal is detected.
C/N LEVEL C/N LEVEL

Indcation Indcation
60 60
40 40
NG NG NG NG
20 20
-20 -10 0 +10 +20 -20 -10 0 +10 +20

AZ Degree EL Degree
- Rx IF AGC Level (150 or more)

AGC level used in the receiver circuit on the RF CON board is detected and sent
to the SYS CPU. If it is 150 or more, the circuit is normal.
Rx HSD Circuit
Rx IF
U3 U8 U13 U16 U20
10.7MHz
(10.7MHz)
Rx Non HSD Circuit
U21 U21 U17

2/2 1/2 AGC ADJ
R33
AGC Level
RF CON
H3-33
FELCOM 82
Synthesizer
- Rx SYN (OK/NG)
The local oscillator for the receiver consists of VCOs of 730 MHz and 815 MHz
bands and PLL ICs. When either PLL unlocks, the SYS CPU generates NG
signal.
RF CON
DATA
Rx RF
CONT FL5
VCO-1 1525-1545MHz
CR8 U23 815M
PLL IC band
1535.7
Rx UNLOCK -1555.7MHz
Ref. 21.12MHz
U4,11
DATA
CONT FL7
CR9 VCO-2
U15
PLL IC 730M
band Rx IF
10.7MHz
Ref. 21.12MHz
- Tx SYN (OK/NG)
TX local oscillator, consisting of PLL and VCO oscillates between 1682.4 MHz
to 1702.56 MHz. When the PLL unlocks, the SYS CPU generates NG signal.
RF CON 1682.4
-1702.56MHz Tx IF
56MHz+120kHz
DATA
CONT
U35
CR7 U30
VCO
Tx UNLOCK PLL IC U44
Ref. 21.12MHz Tx RF
1626.5-1646.5MHz
Antenna controls
- Antenna Status (REMOTE/FAULT)
When the SYS CPU communicates with the PCU in the antenna unit normally,
REMOTE is indicated. If not, FAULT comes on. At power-up, FAULT appears
until the antenna initialization is complete.
H3-34
FELCOM 82
- El AXIS (OK/NG)
When the elevation axis control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on.
- AZ AXIS (OK/NG)
When the azimuth control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on.
- Cross El AXIS (OK/NG)

When the cross-elevation axis control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on.
TX/RX channels
- Rx Channel
Receiving channel in use is displayed. Inmarsat B system uses CH6000 (1525
MHz) to CH14000 (1545 MHz). Default setting is CH06000 (1525 MHz).
At power up, when the elevation angle is changed, and when the ocean region is
changed,
1) MES searches the strongest spot beam in signal level.
2) After the completion of the channel scanning, the registration of the ocean
region is made on the NCS common channel. Thus the NCS knows the area
where MES locates.
- Tx Channel
Transmission channel in use is displayed. Inmarsat B system uses CH6000
(1626.5 MHz) to CH14000 (1646.5 MHz). Default setting is CH10000 (1636.5
MHz).
At every call request, MES sends AZ and EL data to NCS. The spot-beam
identities are advised to SES via the NCSC Bulletin Board to allow identification
of the appropriate spot-beam for signaling purposes. If appropriate spot-beam
signaling chancels are not available, the SES will select a global-beam channel.
H3-35
FELCOM 82
3.6 Using two-digit code service (Loopback test)

Some LESs in the Inmarsat networks support automatic line test service for telephone
and telex. The following describes how to use this function.
3.6.1 Telephone test

Using two-digit code telephone service (Code 91), the telephone communication of the
system can be tested.
1. Dial the LES followed by the service code of 91. For example, to call Goonhilly,
press [0][0][2][9][1][Enter].
2. You should obtain the tone signal from the LES for 15 seconds. (Tone signal)
3. Wait for 15 seconds after stopping the tone signal. (Silence)
4. Talk into the handset microphone. Your voice will be heard from the handset
receiver with a delay. The test will automatically terminate after 30 seconds.
(Loop back test)
3.6.2 Telex test

Using two-digit code telex service (Code 91), the telex communication of the system
can be tested.
1. Call the LES with the service code of 91. ([F3][2], enter LES and service code)
The system should receive the following message transmitted from the LES.
01-03-03:10 YMP 003

3413xxxxx ABCD X
GA+
91+
THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890
H3-36
FELCOM 82
3.7 9.6k Data test

This section describes how to test 9.6k data (MSD) function. The COM port on the PC
is connected to the MSD port on the FELCOM 82 communication unit.
3.7.1 Using AT command

To check communication between the PC and the communication unit;
1. Double click on the Modem icon in the Control panel window.
2. Select “standard 9600 bps modem.”
3. Select communications port, or COM port to be used for 9.6k data
communication.
4. Start HyperTerminal from the Windows 95/98 start menu.
5. In the HyperTerminal window, type AT, followed by the [Return] key. The
FELCOM should reply with “OK.” If it does not, check the cable and try again.
If there is still no response, check the COM Properties window.
Bits per second: 9600

Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware
6. Type AT&H, followed by [Enter] key. The command list should be displayed.
3.7.2 Connection to Internet provider

If a number of the Internet Service Provider is available, try to access to an Internet web
site. To do so,
1. Complete the Dial-up Networking setting; Standard 9600bps modem and
TCP/IC protocol.
2. Make sure that FELCOM 82 is in stand-by condition.
3. Call Service Provider
H3-37
FELCOM 82
3.8 HSD test

This section describes how to test HSD function.
3.8.1 How to use HSD checker

Using MES loop back service, the function of HSD can be checked by following the
steps below. This test requires the HSD checker (no code number) which operates from
110 Vac and 220 Vac power sources without modification.
1. Connect the RS-449 connector of the HSD checker to the HSD port.
2. Set the DIP switches on the checker for RS-422 signal: set the RTS and DTR
switches to OFF position, and S1 to S5 to ON position.
CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18 CR9 CR10 CR8 CR7 CR6 CR5 CR4 CR3 CR2 CR1
Received Data Pattern RTS DTR TxD RI DCD DSR CTS RxD RxCLK TxCLK
OFF ON RS422
ON
ON S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 OFF OFF RS232C

Sending Data Pattern RTS DTR S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
S7 S6
Front panel of HSD checker
3. Turn on the FELCOM 82 and wait until the system acquires NCS common
channel.
4. Using the handset, make settings in HSD menu as below. To call HSD menu,
press [FUNC] [8].
1) Dest. No.: Parth : 222 0061 29 3334699# or

Burum : 012 0031 10 2947020#
2) Call TEL: HANDSET
3) Data Rate: 64k
4) Dial Method: DIRECT
5) Auto Rate: OFF
6) Command: HDLC
7) Character: 8 bit/None
8) Ignore DTR Normal
H3-38
FELCOM 82
5. Set S6 on the checker to the upper position to commence the call.

OFF ON RS422
ON
ON S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 OFF OFF RS232C

Sending Data Pattern RTS DTR S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
S7 S6
6. Wait for about 10 seconds until on/off pattern of LEDs CR11 to CR18 becomes
steady.
7. Change the sending data pattern switch setting, S8 to S15.
OFF ON RS422
ON
ON OFF OFF RS232C

S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 RTS DTR S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Sending Data Pattern S7 S6
If the on/off pattern of the LEDs CR11 to CR18 changes according to the
sending data pattern switch setting, the HSD works normal. The sending data
pattern switches S15 to S8 do not correspond to the LEDs CR11 to CR18
respectively. The synchronization of both patterns depends on the timing.
In the example below;
Sending data pattern : ON /ON /OFF /ON /ON /OFF/ON /ON
Receiving data pattern:
Left figure : OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/ON
(normal)
Right figure : ON /OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/OFF
(abnormal)
CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18 CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18
Received Data Pattern Received Data Pattern
OFF OFF
ON S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 ON S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8
Sending Data Pattern Sending Data Pattern
Correct receiving pattern Wrong receiving pattern

Sending data pattern and receiving data pattern
8. Set the DTR switch (S6) to OFF position to terminate the call.
9. Change HSD settings for the HSD terminal onboard a ship.
H3-39
FELCOM 82
3.8.2 Connection to Internet service

If a number of the Internet service provider is available, access to an Internet web site.
1. Complete the Dial-up Networking setting; HSD modem and TCP/IC protocol.
2. Make sure that FELCOM 82 is in stand-by condition.
3. Call Service Provider
3.9 LED status

The LED status is tabulated in this section.
3.9.1 RF CON Board (16P0181)
Parts No. Color Status Item Remarks

CR5 GRN Blink FSK RX This LES is used to check the
(Looks Monitor communication between the antenna
like ON) and the comm. units. The brightness of
the LED depends on FSK data from the
antenna unit.
CR6 GRN On TX ON This LED is on during TX and off during
RX.
CR7 RED Off TX PLL unlock This LED is on for a while at power up.
After the CPU board assigns the
channel to be use, LED goes off. The
LED should not be on continuously.
CR8 RED Off RX PLL1 This LED is on for a while at power up.
unlock After the CPU board assigns the
(815 MHz) channel to be use, LED goes off. The
CR9 RED Off RX PLL2 This LED is on for a while at power up.
unlock After the CPU board assigns the
(730 MHz) channel to be use, LED goes off. The
SNY UNLOCK IND

CR7: TX CR5: FSK Rx Motor
CR8: RX1
CR9: RX2
CR6: TX ON
H3-40
FELCOM 82
3.9.2 SW REG Board (16P0180)

CR22 RED Off Input error When input voltage is out of tolerance,
the LED illuminates.
1) 100 V spec.: 70 to 80 V or less and
140 to 145 V or above.
2) 220 V spec.: 142 to 165 V or less
and 280 to 290 V or above.
CR33 RED Off Over current The LED lights when input over current
circuits activates.
CR22: INPUT ER CR33: Over CUR

* Current through primary winding
of main-inverter
* Current through primary winding
of sub-inverter
* +12V line
H3-41
FELCOM 82
3.9.3 CPU Board (16P0182)
LED
DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE,
SYS, TERM
SYS F-ROM
165-0145-xxx
FPGA
SYS CPU
BATT
JP6
S6:DECODE Reset
J32 S5:SYNC Reset
S7:FPGA Reset S4:DEMOD Reset
S8:TERM Reset
TERM F-ROM DECODE SYNC
165-0146-xxx DEMOD
DSP DSP
DSP
SYNC F-ROM
TERM DECODE F-ROM 165-0143-xxx DEMOD F-ROM
DSP 165-0144-xxx 165-0142-xxx
CR21
CR19
CR17
CR15
CR13
S3 S2(SYS dip SW) SYNC S1
J26
J1
CR41
CR40
CR39
CR38
CR37
CR36
CR35
CR34
CR33
CR32
CR31
CR30
CR29
CR28
CR27
CR26
CR24
CR23
CR22
CR20
CR18
CR16
CR14
CR12
CR11
CR10
CR9
CR8
CR7
CR6
CR5
CR4
CR3
CR2
CR1
TERM SYS DECODE DEMOD

SYNC
H3-42
FELCOM 82
DEMOD
Parts No. Check Item Remarks
CR1 Input level of AD When the AD converter U49 is in saturation or when TP54
converter is 2 Vpp or more, the LED comes on.
CR2 Status of DEMOD On/off: Waiting signal; off/on: Fast Fourier Transforming;
CR3 DSP on/on: Tracking signal
CR4 Communication On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU; and
CR5 mode assigned by off/off/on: HSD
CR6 SYS CPU to
DEMOD DSP
CR7 DEMOD DSP status When DEMOD DSP runs, CR7 blinks.
CR8 Not used
CR9 Selection of input On: At communication other than HSD
signal to AD Off: At HSD communication (Input to AD converter is 1.5
converter times higher in level than other communications.)
SYNC
Parts No. Item Remarks
CR10 Status of SYNC DSP On/off: Waiting Frame Bit and Unique Word
CR11 Off/on: Acquiring FB twice or losing FB twice
On/on: Synchronized
CR13 Communication On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU;
CR15 mode assigned by and off/off/on: HSD
CR17 SYS CPU to SYNC
DSP
CR19 DEMOD DSP status When SYNC DSP runs, CR7 blinks.
CR21 Frame sync signal After frame synchronization, CR21 toggles on and off
every time frame bit signal is received.
DECODE
CR12 Communication On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU;
CR14 mode assigned by and off/off/on: HSD
CR16 SYS CPU to SYNC
DSP
CR18 DECODE reset Every time DECODE DSP is reset, CR18 toggles on and
off.
H3-43
FELCOM 82
CR20 Frame reception CR20 toggles on and off when one frame is received and
the data is decoded.
CR22 Decoding CR22 turns on during data decoding.
CR23 Not used
CR24 Not used
SYS
CR26 Alarm When the SYS CPU detects an alarm, CR26 lights.
CR27 Status of SYS CPU Blinking every second
CR28 Sys CPU idling Blinking
CR29 System status On; During communication
CR30 Sync of RX sig. On: When the system synchronizes with the signal.
Off: When the system does not synchronize.
CR31 Not used
CR32 Not used
CR33 Not used
TERM
CR34 Not used
CR35 TERM Status Off/off: idling; off/on: Codec is in operation;
CR36 on/off: Ship-to-shore fax; on/off: shore-to-ship fax
CR37 CODEC Status During voice communication;
CR38 With the coder activating, CR37 is on.
CR39 With the decoder activating, CR38 is on.
With the echo canceller activating, CR39 is on.
CR40 Not used
CR41 TERM DSP When the TERM DSP runs, CR41 blinks.
H3-44
FELCOM 82
3.9.4 PCU Board

CR25 RED On FSK RX Monitor This LES is used to check the
communication between the antenna and
the comm. units. The brightness of the LED
depends on FSK data from the comm. unit.
Table
7.8.8
D25
FSK
Use this hole to check

LED status.
3.10 How to check angular rate sensor

Flip the angular rate sensor while the antenna unit is turned on, if the antenna changes
the angle by a large amount, the sensor may be defective.
3.11 How to check rotary joint

To check the rotary joint, carry out forced transmission, and then rotate the antenna by a
hand slowly. If the EIRP reading drops during the rotation, the rotary joint may be
defective.
H3-45
FELCOM 82
3.12 Error Messages at the Terminal Unit

The tables which follow show the error messages which may appear on the terminal
unit.
3.12.1 Call failure error messages
Call failure error messages

Error Messages Reason Remedy
Call failed, request data invalid. (4561)
Call failed, insufficient digits in service address. (4562) • Wrong LES or subscriber
Call failed, invalid service address. (4563) number. Check
Call failed, invalid credit card data. (4564) • Wrong card number in Redial.
Call failed, credit card type not acceptable at this LES. (5522) case of credit card.
Call failed, credit card not accepted. (5539)
Unstable reception (MES not
Call failed, long interruption in reception at MES. (4962)
synchronized with satellite.)
Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment). (5569)
Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment). (5585)
Call failed, LES time-out (no service address). (5570)
Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector). (5571)
Call failed, LES time-out (no credit card data). (5573)
Unstable communications
Call failed, LES time-out (no return carrier identifier). (5574)
(LES cannot receive reply
Call failed, LES time-out (no MES connect). (5575)
from ship.)
Call failed, LES time-out (no answer). (7969) Change satellite
Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES. (5729) or LES.
Call failed, LES time-out (no MES SCPC carrier). (5826)
Call failed, LES time-out (no MES telex carrier). (5825)
Call failed, LES time-out (no telex answerback). (5576)
Call failed, MES time-out (no scrambling vector ack). (4801)
Call failed, MES time-out (no credit card accepted message).
Unstable communications
(4802)
(MES cannot receive reply
Call failed, no service and no scrambling vector. (5572)
from LES.)
Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer). (4803)
Call failed, MES time-out (no ship terminal answer). (4129)
Call failed, service not authorised at this LES. (5538)
Call failed, service not provided at this LES. (5505)
LES does not offer requested
Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES. (5521) Change LES.
service.
Call failed, no distress service avail. in this OR. (0040)
Call failed, call request failure by LES. (0052)
(Continued on next page)
H3-46
FELCOM 82
Call failure error message (con’t)

Error Message Reason Remedy
Call failed, LES congested (no channel unit). (5713)
Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested. (5201)
Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit). (5202)
Call failed, LES congested (no channel). (5457)
Call failed, LES congested (no time-slot). (5458)
• Line is busy. Try again a little
Call failed, terrestrial party busy. (7953)
• Line trouble. while later.
Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure. (8033)
Call failed, terrestrial party cleared before MES
connection.(8034)
Call failed, set-up between LES and terrestrial circuits failed.
(7265)
Ship’s answerback code not Checking
Call failed, MES not authorised at this LES. (5537)
properly entered. OID/DID
Call of higher priority in Try again a little
Call failed, Distress call in progress. (0062)
progress. while later.
MES not ready for Try again a little
Call failed, MES busy. (0060)
communications. while later.
MES not ready for Setting: Incoming
Call failed, MES terminal not enabled. (0061)
communications. only OFF
Call failed, antenna circuit abnormality. (0032)
Call failed, no channel assignment received from LES. (0033)
Call failed, invalid power level assignment. (0034)
Call failed, RX DEMOD circuit abnormality. (0035)
Call failed, TX MOD circuit abnormality. (0036) Equipment trouble*
Call failed, TX-RF circuit abnormality. (0038)
Call failed, Selectively cleared by LES. (0039)
Call failed, MES unable to sync. to NCSA in time. (0041)
Call failed. (0042)
* = Another error message accompanies these messages and is printed

out. Trouble can be determined from the printout.
Note 1: Number in parentheses is error message number.

Note 2: Wait 30 seconds before calling again.
H3-47
FELCOM 82
3.12.2 Antenna trouble error message
Antenna trouble error message
Error Message Meaning Cause Remedy

• Select correct
Satellite selected from Satellite Satellite is tracked based
OR Change failed. (0100) satellite.
menu not acquired. on ship’s position.
• Check navigator.
Satellite not found although all Check to RF connectors
Sky Scan failed. (0108) Equipment trouble or
areas searched. in Antenna unit.
object in transmission
OR Search failed. (0103) Couldn’t search for satellite. path of satellite
LNA defective.
During the satellite search,
SCAN function is set to
OR Search disabled.
OFF by a SCAN command
(0105)
and the search operation is
terminated.
During the sky-scan,
SCAN function is set to
Sky Scan disabled.(0110)
OFF by the command and
the scan is terminated.
During the step-tracking,
the step-track function is
Step-track halted. (0113) set to OFF by the
command and the tracking
is terminated.
In auto ocean region
selection mode, this
message appears at the
boundary between two • Select correct
Step-track out of bounds.
ocean regions, when the satellite.
(0114)
elevation angle decreases • Check navigator.
5 degrees or less and a
satellite higher elevation
angle is selected.
Printer trouble
Printer trouble error message
Error Message Cause Remedy
Check
CAUTION: Main Unit Printer error: off-line. (0169)
Printer error connection,
CAUTION: Main Unit Printer error: out of paper. (0170)
paper, etc.
H3-48
FELCOM 82
3.12.3 Communication unit trouble (internal)
Communication unit trouble error messages

Error Message Cause Defective parts
PCU detects EIRP
ALARM: ADE Non-carrier EIRP abnormality. (0139)
abnormality.
HPA output at Tx is below
ALARM: ADE EIRP power too low. (0140)
ratings. HPA chassis
ALARM: ADE EIRP power too high. (0141) Output power too high at Tx.
PCU detects abnormal Tx
ALARM: ADE EIRP burst too long. (0142)
burst width.
PCU cannot detect HPA HPA chassis
ALARM: ADE RF abnormality - No TX power detected. (0143)
output power. RF CON
ALARM: TX Synthesizer unlock. (0145)
Unlock signal detected. RF CON
ALARM: RX Synthesizer unlock. (0146)
ALARM: Cross EL axis control error. (0147) Cross EL axis control trouble PCU, Sensors,
ALARM: Az axis control error. (0148) AZ axis control trouble motors,
ALARM: El axis control error. (0149) EL axis control trouble belts
ALARM: 28V power abnormality. (0154) +28 V not output. SW REG
RF CONV Board trouble,
ALARM: RF-CONV circuit abnormality, TX-RF level
Low TX level is found during
insufficient.(0160)
the Tx. CPU
RF CONV Board trouble, RF CON
ALARM: RF-CONV circuit abnormality, Unexpected TX-RF level
High TX level is found when
detected. (0162)
not Tx.
EIRP is lower than one
ALARM: TX-RF circuit abnormality, TX power insufficient. (0164) HPA chassis
specified by the LES.
RF CON
EIRP is higher than one
ALARM: TX-RF circuit abnormality, TX power too strong. (0165) CPU
specified by the LES.
EIRP trouble detected for
ALARM: TX circuit abnormality, unexpected TX power detected.
period more than 3 sec. at HPA chassis
Please power off the FELCOM82!! (0166)
standby.
Cable for telephone distress
ALARM: Telephone Distress Box Cable abnormality. (0167) button may be damaged or
disconnected. Cable
Cable for telex distress connection
ALARM: Telex Distress Alert Box Cable abnormality. (0168) button may be damaged or
disconnected.
Trouble with fan for power
ALARM: FAN FAILURE (0174) SW REG
supply
(Continued on next page)
H3-49
FELCOM 82
Communication unit trouble error messages (con’t)
Error Cause Defective parts

ALARM: SYSCPU error detected. (0176)
ALARM: HANDSET error detected. (0177)
ALARM: DEMOD-CPU error detected. (0178)
CPU error CPU
ALARM: SYNCCPU-CPU error detected. (0179)
ALARM: DECODER-CPU error detected. (0180)
ALARM: TERM-CPU error detected. (0181)
ALARM: ANTENNA error detected. (0182) Antenna Error PCU
H3-50
FELCOM 82
4. Program Update
The table below lists programs for FELCOM 82 and its update commands.
Note that RAM clear must be made after the program for SYSTEM is
upgraded.
Program Program No. Command Parts No. storing program

DEMOD 165-0142-xxx UPDEM Flash ROM U3 on CPU board
SYNC 165-0143-xxx UPSYNC Flash ROM U9 on CPU board
DECODE 165-0144-xxx UPDEC Flash ROM U16 on CPU board
SYSTEM 165-0145-xxx UPSYS Flash ROM U95 on CPU board
TERM 165-0146-xxx UPTERM Flash ROM U46 on CPU board
HANDSET 165-0152-xxx UPHAND CPU U2 on HS CONT board
TERMINAL 165-0150-xxx INSTALL U12 on CPU board

(IB-582)
The program number can be read by using the following keystrokes.

IB-582: [F4] [6] [4]
Handset: [FUNC] [6] [8] [1]
The terminal program number can be read by pressing [F1] white pressing and holding
down [Alt] and [Fn].
The command to select the drive is as below.
Terminal Unit Drive Designators Disk Drive

A Flash ROM
IB-581
B Floppy Disk
A Floppy Disk
IB-582
C Flash ROM
Table 4.1.2
To terminate FELCOM 82 system program and get into DOS system, press [Fn], [Alt],
and [F2] simultaneously. This procedure is the same as one for FELCOM 12, FELCOM
81, and DP-6.
H3-51
FELCOM 82
4.1 Connection
If the system does not have the terminal unit or the system is class-2, connect COM1
port of the terminal unit (IB-581 or IB-582), or RS-232C port of a PC to the
communication unit IB-282 as illustrated. Either VDU port or J1 port is used for
updating the program. When the VDU port is hard of access, remove the front panel and
use the J1. Communication speed is 57.6 kbps with VDU and 38.4 kbps with J1.
The type of the interconnection cable is 16S0068 with a connector fitted to both ends.
57.6kbp
VDU
RS-232C
9P D-sub connect
COM 1
or
or
J1 RS232C
38.4kbps
•IB-581/582:COM1 Port
•PC:RS-232C Port
J1 on CPU board
Front view, front cover removed
H3-52
FELCOM 82
4.2 Upgrading SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM

programs
4.2.1 Using IB-581 or IB-582

To upgrade SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM programs;
1. For example, using IB-582
Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM 82 system
program.
“OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to “Yes” and press [Enter] key.
Prompt
C:¥> appears.
2. Inset the floppy disk having new software into the drive.
3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>.
4. Type update command. For example, to upgrade SYSTEM program, type UPSYS
and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.
A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1

Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K)
uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5
p4:ID number.
p5:Port number.(1,2...)
Erase Wait:0sec
Wait:o
Wait counter=200
Port no.=1
TARGET POWER ON.
5. Turn on the IB-282, if it is off. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication
“xxx percent completed” on the terminal unit.
6. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears.
7. Turn off the IB-282.
8. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level.
9. After updating the SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents.
H3-53
FELCOM 82
4.2.2 Using PC
To upgrade the system program by using a PC, follow the steps below.
1. Run the DOS on the PC.
2. Inset the floppy disk having new software into the drive.
4. Type update command. For example, to upgrade SYSTEM program, type
UPSYS and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.
p4:ID number.
Erase Wait:0sec
Wait:o
Wait counter=200
Port no.=1
TARGET POWER ON.
5. Turn on the IB-282, if it is off. The program upgrading proceeds while the
indication “xxx percent completed” on the terminal unit.
7. Turn off the IB-282.
9. After updating the SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents.
4.2.3 After upgrading SYSTEM (RAM clear)

After upgrading SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents by using the terminal unit or
the handset.
The contents in the memory are listed in chapter 1.
1) By using terminal unit

1. Press [F4] [6] to call Communication Setup menu.
2. Type CLR (space) RAM on the “Enter JOB No.” line and press [Enter] key.
3. Type DENPA4 on the “Password” line and press [Enter] key.
4. Wait for a while so that the status display is redrawn.
H3-54
FELCOM 82
2) By using handset

1. Press [FUNC], [6], and [9] in this order to call “Initialize” menu.
69 Initialize
All data & logs

Are cleared.
ARE YOU SURE?
Clear:[82]
Quit:[Quit]
If you cannot get into “Initialize,” press [FUNC] [6] and [3] to call “Change
Mode” menu. Type the password or 5963 followed by [Enter] key if you cannot
find the password. The menu changes to Main Menu when you enter password
or 5963. While the Main Menu on the screen, type [6] [9] to call “Initialize”
menu.
63 Change Mode
User-!Admin
Enter Passwd:
- - - -
Enter: [Enter]
2. Press [8] and [2] in this order to clear the memory and wait until “Now
Initializing” disappears.
4.3 Upgrading handset program
4.3.1 Using IB-581 or IB-582

To upgrade the handset program;
1. Unplug the handset.
2. For example, using IB-582
Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM 82 system
program.“OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to Yes and press
[Enter] key. Prompt C:¥> appears.
3. Inset the floppy disk having new handset program, 165-0152-xxx into the drive.
5. Type UPHAND and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.
H3-55
FELCOM 82

p4:ID number.
Erase Wait:0sec
Wait:o
Wait counter=200
Port no.=1
TARGET POWER ON.
6. Plug the handset when “TARGET POWER ON” appears on the IB-582 (581).
7. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed”
on the screen. If upgrading does not commence, press [C] key while holding
down [Ctrl] key for the prompt of A:¥>, and then proceed from step 1.
9. Turn off the IB-282 and IB-582 (581).
4.3.2 Using PC
To upgrade the program by using a PC, follow the steps below.

1. Unplug the handset.
2. Run the DOS on the PC.
3. Inset the floppy disk having new handset program into the drive.
5. Type UPHAND and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.

p4:ID number.
H3-56
FELCOM 82
Erase Wait:0sec
Wait:o
Wait counter=200
Port no.=1
TARGET POWER ON.
6. Plug the handset when “TARGET POWER ON” appears.

7. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed”
on the screen. If not, press [C] key while holding down [Ctrl] key for the prompt
of A:¥>, and then proceed from step 1.
9. Turn off the IB-282 and a PC.
4.4 Upgrading terminal program

To upgrade terminal program;
1. Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM B system
program.
“OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to Yes and press [Enter] key.
Prompt C:¥> sappears.
2. Inset the floppy disk having new terminal software into the drive.
4. Type INSTALL and press [Enter] key.
5. The program upgrading proceeds and DOS prompt display comes after upgrading
is completed.
6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again. to
7. Press [F1] while pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn] to read the program
version level.
H3-57
FELCOM 82
5. Menu tree
5.1 Menu on handset

The italic letters show items in the user menu, and the underlines show factory
defaults.
FUNC Quit Key 1
2 User Menu
3
4 Display 1 Monitor
2 Comm. Log
3 Time&Charge 1 List by LES
2 List by PID
3 Data Clear
4 System Log
5 Print All
6 Print Setup
7 Print MES
8 Print TELFAX
9 Print MSD*
0 Print HSD*
*: Needs OID/DID
5 Setup 1 Satellite 1 AOR-E

2 POR
3 IOR
4 AOR-W
5 Sat5
6 Sat6
7 Sat7
8 Sat8
0 AUTO
2 Gyro Gyro [000~359]
Hold [ON/OFF]
3 Antenna Azimuth [000~359]
Elevation [00~90]
Heading [000~359]
AutoTrack [ON/OFF]
4 Position LAT [00.00 N]
LON [000.00 E]
5 Area 1 WMO*
2 IMO*
3 ICAO*
4 NAVAREA [No.1, No.2]
6 Backup NCS* *: For future use
7 Distress LES 1 AORE
2 POR
3 IOR
4 AORW
5 Sat5 (Not Used)
6 Sat6 (Not Used)
7 Sat7 (Not Used)
8 Sat8 (Not Used)
(To next page)
H3-58
FELCOM 82
(From Previous Page)
8 DMG 1 Name
2 Maritime [Yes, No]
3 Nature
1 Fire/Explos
2 Flooding
3 Collision
4 Grounding
5 Listing
6 Sinking
7 Disable & Adr
8 Undesignate
9 Abandoning
4 Course (000~359)
5 Speed (00~99)
9 OID/DID
0 RcvAlarm 1 Disable
2 Enable
6 MES 1 Handset 1 BackLight [0~3, 3 ]
2 IdleLight [0, 1 ]
3 LCDBright [0~9, 5 ]
4 BuzzerVol [0~9, 7 ]
5 KeyClick [OFF, ON ]
2 Menu Style 1 Simple

2 Detailed
3 Change Mode
4 Date&Time 1 Date&Time
2 Date Form 1 YYYY-MM-DD
2 MMM-DD-YYYY
3 DD-MMM-YYYY
3 Time Zone [-13:30~+13:30, +00:00 ]
5 Charge Info
6 Personal ID 1 PID [Disable, Enable]
2 PID Entry
3 List/Edit
7 Password
8 Test 1 Version
2 Memory
3 Distress Test
9 Initialize
0 ForcedClear
(To Next Page)
H3-59
FELCOM 82
(From Previous Page)
7 TELFAX 1 Time Limit 1 TEL1 1 OFF

2 TEL2 2 Limit Time [01~99]
3 TEL3 3 Answer Only
2 Credit Call 1 TELFAX1 [OFF, ON]

2 TELFAX2 [OFF, ON]
3 TELFAX3 [OFF, ON]
3 Prefix Code
4 Echo Cancel 1 TEL1 [OFF, ON]
2 TEL2 [OFF, ON]

3 TEL3 [OFF, ON]
4 HANDSET [OFF, ON]
5 Print TELFAX
8 HSD 1 Dest. No
2 Call TEL 1 TEL1

2 TEL2
3 TEL3
4 HANDSET
3 Data Rate 1 64k (64Kbps)
2 56k (56Kbps)
4 Dial Method 1 DIRECT
2 ADDRESS
5 Auto Rate 1 OFF
2 ON
6 Command 1 HDLC
2 BSC
7 Character 1 8bit/None
2 7bit/Odd
8 Ignore DTR 1 Normal

2 Ignore
9 Print HSD
ABBR Find * Key 1 Entry

* : Not displayed when no
2 Edit* abbreviated dialing numbers are
registered.
3 Remove* ** : Not displayed unless HSD
OID/DID is registered and
4 HSD Call** HANDSET is selected in the
Call TEL menu.
H3-60
FELCOM 82
5.2 Menu on terminal unit (Class1)
F1 Key (File)
1. New Text [ALT + N]
2. Open Text [ALT +O] Load
Merge
3. Close Text [ALT + Q]
4. Save Text [ALT + S]
5. Delete File [ALT + D]
6. Rename File
7. Print File [ALT + P]
8. Clear Comm Memory
9. Format Disk
F2 Key (Edit)
1. Undo [ALT + X]
2. Cut [DEL]
3. Copy [ALT + C]
4. Paste [INS]
5. Select All [ALT + A]
6. Search [ALT + F] Forward
Backward
7. Replace [ALT + R] Forward Query
Backward All
8. Goto Top [HOME]
9. Goto Bottom [END]
A. Goto Line [ALT + L]
B. Change Text [ALT + V]
H3-61
FELCOM 82
F3 Key(Telex)
1. Auto Telex [ALT + T] 1. Station Name SEND
2. LES Access Code CANCEL
3. File to Send
2. Call LES 1. LES Access Code SEND
2. Priority 1. Routine CANCEL
2. Safety
3. Urgent
3. Service Code
3. Call Station
4. Transmit File
5. Program Telex 1. Station Name ENTRY
2. LES Access Code DELETE
3. File to Send
4. Program Mode 1. One Time
2. Interval
3. Schedule
6. Confidential Msg
7. Communication Log
8. Change Window [ALT + W]
F4 Key (Setup)
1. Station List 1. Stn. Name
2. Telex No.
3. Answerback
4. Remarks
2. LES List 1. LES Access Code
2. LES Name
3. Remarks
3. Terminal Setup 1. Date
2. Time
3. Date Display Form 1. YY-MM-DD
2. MMM-DD-YY
3. DD-MMM-YY
4. Screen Saver 1. Mode ON
2. Mode OFF
5. Comm Time Display 1. Display ON
2. Display OFF
6. Incoming Call Alarm 1. Alarm ON
2. Alarm OFF
7. Special Char 1. Default
2. Norway
3. Sweden
4. UK
5. Spare 1 (Not Used)
6. Spare 2 (Not Used)
8. Answerback Code
(To Next Page)
H3-62
Section I1. Remote Station
1. Over view
Connection of Remote Unit
A radiotelephone is connected to a remote unit, such as remote terminal, DSC, and NBDP
in Furuno MIF format of which TX/RX data lines are heard-wear selectable for current
loop or RS-232C signal.
REMOTE REMOTE
TX/RX Control data
REM-A DSC/NBDP
RS-232C RS-232C
FS-xxxx
Maximum four remote units can be connected by using a distributor DB-500 as shown in
Figure below.
FS-1562
REM-A
RS-232C
[REM1]
DB-500 REM-A
REM-A REM-B REM-B REM-A
[REM2] [REM3] [REM4] [REM5]
RS-232C C.Loop C.Loop RS-232C
DSC-6/60 RB-500 RB-500 DP-5/6
Each port on the DB-500 can support Current loop and RS-232C signals according to the
type of the REMOTE board fitted in the DB-500: REMOTE A board for RS-232C and
REMOTE B board for Current loop. Each port has own REMOTE board.
The remote unit ports on the DB-500 have priority;
REM-2 > REM 3 > REM-4 > REM 5
There are two types of the DB-500.

DB-500: Standard type
REMOTE-1 (IN) ----- C.Loop (REM B)
REMOTE-2 (OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B)
REMOTE-3 (OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B)
DB-500-RS type
REMOTE-1(IN) ----- RS-232C(REM A)
REMOTE-2(OUT) ----- RS-232C (REM A)
REMOTE-3(OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B)
REMOTE-4(OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B)
REMOTE-5(OUT) ----- RS-232C (REM A)
I1-1
REMOTE
Note) Option
Parts Name Type Code Number Remarks
REMOTE A (05P0457) OP05-39 005-920-310 For RS-232C signal
REMOTE B (05P0458) OP05-40 005-920-320 For Current loop signal
TB board 05P0496 005-840-750
-Two REMOTE B,
Additional Port Kit OP05-44 000-056-823 - One TB
- Two cable glands
There are two types of the remote terminal: RB-500 for SSB and RB-700 for VHF.
The ROM in the RB-500 must be 05501-60-100 (option) for RC-808 and 05501-47-103
(standard) for SSB.
The VHF remote terminal having the highest priority must be installed where a ship is
normally operated. The FM-8500 and FM-8700 itself has the highest priority because of
having a built-in DSC.
I1-2
REMOTE
1.1 Remote port specifications
Specification
Equipment Port Option Note
(Default)
Select to the REMOTE-A or B
board.
FS-75/2550 Remote RS-232C C.Loop
-RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457)
-C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)
Select to the REMOTE-A or B
board.
FS-1562 Remote RS-232C C.Loop
-RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457)
-C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)
REM-1 RS-232C None
RS-232C Connect to TB3
Connect to TB4
REM-2 Select to Jumper setting in AF
RS-232C C.Loop
board (AF Board suffix number-
FS-5000/8000
33 and after)
REM-3 RS-232C None
Select to Jumper setting in AF
CIF/NMEA CIF(C.Loop) None board and System setting
(9933:MIF/TBUS/CIF/NMEA)
RV-117G REMOTE RS-232C None
RV-118G RS-232C No RS-232C Install to I/F Board:05P0261
RV-128G RS-232C RS-232C None
FT-253/803 XMIT RS-232C None
(Controllr:CU-
RCVER RS-232C None
5521)
Select to Jumper setting on CONT
CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF board and System setting
(COMM)
DMC(REM-A) C.Loop None
VHF(REM-B) C.Loop None
NBDP(REM-C) RS-232C None
DSC-5/5A/5R
MF/HF
RS-232C None
RT(REM-D)
MF/HF
RS-232C None
RX(REM-E)
Complies with Centronics
PRINTER Centronics None
interface
PP-500 Printer Centronics None
interface
PP-510 Printer Centronics None
interface
PP-505 IN/OUT (J2) RS-232C C.Loop C.Loop: Install to OP16-14.
I1-3
REMOTE
Specification
(Default)
Select to Jumper setting in CONT
(9:System)
DMC(REM-A) C.Loop None
NBDP(REM-C) RS-232C None
DSC-6/6A MF/HF
RS-232C None
RT(REM-D)
MF/HF
RS-232C None
RX(REM-E)
interface
Select to Jumper setting in CONT
(9:System)
DSC-8V/8VP DMC(REM-A) C.Loop None
VHF(REM-B) C.Loop None
interface
DSC RS-232C None
AA-50/50R
MF/HF TR RS-232C None
REMOTE 1 C.Loop None DSC port
FM-7000
REMOTE 2 C.Loop None RB-700 port
REMOTE C.Loop None RB-700 port
DMC C.Loop None
FM-7500 CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF
interface
REMOTE 1 C.Loop None DSC port
FM-8000
REMOTE 2 C.Loop None RB-700 port
DMC C.Loop None
FM-8500 NMEA NMEA None
MIF Serial data (Install to
PRINTER C.Loop None
IF-8500; Change to parallel)
DMC C.Loop None
FM-8700 NMEA NMEA None
MIF Serial data (Install to
PRINTER C.Loop None
IF-8500; Change to parallel)
I1-4
REMOTE
Specification
(Default)
Connected RT
REMOTE A RS-232C None
(Standard connection)
Connected DSC
REMOTE B RS-232C None
(Standard connection)
DP-5 Select to Jumper setting in CONT
CIF/NMEA NMEA None
board and Terminal setting.
interface
CONTROL RS-232C None Not use
REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected the Radiotelephone
REMOTE B RS-232C None Connected the DSC
IEC-1162
DP-6/10 IEC-1162 None
(NMEA)
PRINTER Complies with Centronics
Centronics None
(Connected IB-581) interface
MF.HF DSC C.Loop None
No.1 VHF C.Loop None
No.2 VHF C.Loop None
DMC-5 SES RS-410N None
EGC RS-410N None
NAVTEX RS-410N None Contact signal
2182kHz WR None AF signal
Select to NMEA or CIF
NMEA/CIF NMEA
(TB Board S1)
NX-500 ALM BZ RS-410N
Select to WIRE or ACT
ANT active
(TB Board S2)
RB-700 TB-1 C.Loop None
For RT(FS-xxxx) ROM No.
0550147103
RB-500 TB-1 C.Loop None
For XMIT(FT-503/803) ROM No.
0550160100
IN RS-232C None
DB-120 OUT RS-232C None
(05P0606) OUT RS-232C None
NMEA NMEA None
REMOTE 1(IN) C.Loop RS-232C
REMOTE 2(OUT) C.Loop RS-232C Select to the REMOTE-A or B
DB-500 REMOTE 3(OUT) C.Loop RS-232C board.
(Standard type)
C.Loop or - RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457)
Refer to page REMOTE 4(OUT) Option - C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)
I1-1. RS-232C
C.Loop or
REMOTE 5(OUT) Option
RS-232C
I1-5
REMOTE
Specification
(Default)
DTE 1 RS-232C None
DTE 2 RS-232C None
FELCOM 10 DMC RS-410N None
(IC-200) RP RS-410N None
Select to Jumper setting on CONT
NMEA/CIF NMEA CIF
board.
REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected IC-200.
PRINTER RS-232C None
interface
FELCOM 10
REMOTE B RS-232C None
(IC-500)
CONTROL RS-232C None
Not used
CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF
DTE 1 RS-232C None
DTE 2 RS-232C None
FELCOM 11 DATA RS-232C None
(IC-211) DMC RS-410N None
BUZZER RS-410N None
NMEA NMEA None
REMOTE A RS-232C None Connected IC-211.
FELCOM 11 interface
(IC-511) REMOTE B RS-232C None
CONTROL RS-232C None Not used
CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF
COM 1 RS-232C None Connected IC-211.
FELCOM 11 COM 2 RS-232C None Not used
(IB-581) Complies with Centronics
interface
DTE 1 RS-232C None
DTE 2 RS-232C None
FELCOM 12 DATA RS-232C None
(IC-212) DMC 1 RS-410N None
DMC 2 RS-410N None
BUZZER RS-410N None
COM 1 RS-232C None Connected IC-212.
FELCOM 12 COM 2 RS-232C None Not used
(IB-581) Complies with Centronics
interface
Printer RS-232C None
interface
EGC-5 232C RS-232C None
ALARM RS-410N None
CIF/NMEA NMEA CIF Select to system setting.
I1-6
REMOTE
Specification
(Default)
DTE 1 RS-232C None
DTE 2 RS-232C None
PC DATA RS-232C None
interface
FELCOM 80 ANT CONT RS-422 None
NMEA NMEA or CIF None Automatic change NMEA or CIF.
GYRO GYRO None
TEL DISTRESS RS-410N None IB-360
TLX DISTRESS RS-410N None IB-350
RX BUZZER RS-410N None IC-301
VDU RS-232C None
DATA RS-232C None
CARD READER RS-232C None
RF
FSK None
(Antenna control)
FELCOM 81
NAV NMEA None
AD CON None For AD-100
TEL DISTRESS RS-410N None For IB-360
TLX DISTRESS RS-410N None For IB-350
RX BUZZER RS-410N None For IC-301
HSD DATA 1 RS-232C None
Selected SW2 setting
IB-681 HSD DATA 2 RS-422 None
HSD CTRL RS-232C None
HSD DATA 1 RS-232C None
Selected SW2 setting
IB-680 HSD DATA 2 RS-422 None
HSD CTRL RS-232C None
I1-7
REMOTE
2. RB-700 : C.Loop
2.1 Priority settings
1. Priority setting on FM-7000/7500

Determine priority of the RB-700 according to mounting location and vessel regulations.
PANEL board on VHF radiotelephone FM-7000/FM-7500
1. Priority setting on FM-8500 and FM-8700

Priority cannot be set on FM-8500 and FM-8700.
2. Priority setting on FM-8000

Priority order for FM-8000 is set on the system setting.
System Channel 12 ---- Setting No. 1 (ON)
I1-8
REMOTE
2.2 Jumper settings

Jumper settings shown below should be made at installation.
Note) Do not change the Jumper settings of JP2 and JP3.
Parts location of JP4 and JP5

on Main board (Parts side)

on MAIN board (Soldering side)
I1-9
REMOTE
2.3 Confirmation of jumper settings
To confirm jumper settings of JP1 and JP6, turn on the power while pressing and holding
down the [ENT] key.
To confirm the jumper settings of JP4 and JP5, turn on the power while pressing and
holding down the [SHIFT] key.
2.4 Speaker and handset volume

Speaker
Adjust R18 with the VOLUME control on the front panel set at maximum for desired
speaker volume.
Handset
Adjust R9 to select desired handset speaker volume.
I1-10
REMOTE
3. RB-500 : C.Loop
3.1 Jumper settings
Jumper settings shown below should be made at installation.
Note) Do not change the Jumper settings of JP2 and JP3.

on Main board (Parts side)

on MAIN board (Soldering side)
I1-11
REMOTE
3.2 Confirmation of jumper settings
down the [ENT] key.
down the [HOOK] key.
3.3 Speaker and handset volume

Speaker
Adjust R18 with the VOLUME control on the front panel set at maximum for desired
speaker volume.
Handset
Adjust R9 to select desired handset speaker volume.
I1-12
REMOTE
3.4 Connection
1. Connection to FS-5000/8000
The different modification is required depending on the suffix number of AF board.
For suffix No.-22 and before

The FS-5000/8000 radiotelephone outputs +18V for the RB-500 which operates on +12V.
Therefore, reduce +18V to +12V by adding a resistor as shown below.
Note that this modification is not required if the RB-500 is connected to the
FS-5000/8000 via the DB-500.
Modification
Remove L4 on the MAIN board (05P0483) and install a resistor at the same place.
Change system setting 9933 to “0”(MIF) on the FS-5000/8000.
[STO] 9933 [ENT] “0”(MIF) [ENT]
MAIN Board
Breaker
L4
For suffix No.-33 and after

The AF board having suffix No.-33 and after is delivered from August 1993.
Note that when FS-5000/8000 is connected to DB-500 in RS-232C format, this
modification is not required.
C.Loop or RS-232C format can be selected by changing a jumper wire setting on the AF
board having suffix No. –33 and after.
Jumper wire Signal format

short C.Loop
open RS-232C
AF Board (05P0356-33)
I1-13
REMOTE
2. Connection to FS-1562, FS-1552, FS-1502 and FS-1503
For the FS-1562;

The REMOTE-A (RS-232C) board on the TX/RX board is replaced with the
REMOTE-B(C.Loop) board (05P0458: 005-517-500).
REMOTE A (RS-232C) board: 05P0457 005517480
REMOTE B (C.Loop) board : 05P0458 005517500
For the FS-1552 and FS-1502;

Install the optional board: REMOTE-B (C.Loop).
The REMOTE-B kit, consists of the REMOTE-B board and the connector assembly.
REMOTE A (RS-232C) Kit : OP05-39 005920310
REMOTE B (C.Loop) Kit : OP05-40 005920320
For the FS-1503;

Install the optional board: REMOTE-B (C.Loop).
The REMOTE-B kit, consists of the REMOTE-B board and the connector assembly.
REMOTE A (RS-232C) Kit : OP05-82 005939810
REMOTE B (C.Loop) Kit : OP05-83 005939820
Note)
If more than two RB-500s are installed, connect them via the Distributor DB-500.
I1-14
REMOTE
4. DB-500
4.1 Connection
There are two types of connections: MF/HF and VHF.
MF/HF connection
VHF connection
Block diagram
I1-15
REMOTE
4.2 FS-5000/8000
I1-16
REMOTE
I1-17
REMOTE
4.3 RB-500/700 Connection
Connect Remote Station RB-500 (RB-700) to the DB-500 as shown below.
1. When connecting two remote stations (Standard)
I1-18
REMOTE
2. When connecting three or four remote stations (Option)
I1-19
REMOTE
4.4 FS-1562 and DSC/DP Connection
I1-20
REMOTE
4.5 Interconnection diagrams
1. FS-5000/8000+DB-500+RB-500
When using current loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500.
For AF board having suffix number-33 and after.

2.
I1-21
REMOTE
FS-1562+DB-500+RB-500
I1-22
REMOTE
3. FM-xxxx+DB-500+RB-700
I1-23
REMOTE
5. Jumper settings on MAIN Board
I1-24
Section J1. NX-500
1. Connection
Whip Antenna
(1 m or 2.6 m)
PRE-AMP Unit
(NX-5)
ANT
NMEA/CIF
10.8-40 VDC
NX-500 AF IN
AF OUT Jumper wire
Remove the jumper wire
ALM BZ
SAR MSG.
when an external unit (AF signal)
ALM BZ is connected.
External Connector kit

(Option)
[EXT] Connector Plug pin number

1. NAV data in (R-H)
2. NAV data in (R-C)
3. 4. 5 NC
6. ALARM 1
7. ALARM 2
8. NAV RCV SIG OUT
9. NAV SIG IN (NAV COM)
10. 0V
J1-1
NX-500
2. Slide switch settings
Name of PCB Symbol Factory Setting Function

[Data Format Selection]
S1 NMEA Format of input data should be selected;
NMEA or CIF
TB
[Preamp Selection]
S2 ACT WIRE: Preamp Unit not installed
ACT: Preamp Unit installed
TB Board
J1-2
NX-500
3. System settings
Note)
Categories A: Navigational warnings, B: Meteorological warnings, D: Search and
note)
Rescue Information and L: Navigational warning additional to letter A cannot be
rejected from printout, in accordance with international regulations.
Note) Main CPU Ver 4.00 and after :from 2000/12.
J1-3
NX-500
FQ5-93-006 (93/02)
The service menu functions to change the specifications of the NX-500 to comply it
with the regulations of vessel’s country of registration. The settings should not be
changed without due reason.
J1-4
NX-500
J1-5
NX-500
5. Self test
Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ACCEPT] key.
J1-6
NX-500
J1-7
6. Station List
(Feb. 1999)
J1-8
NX-500
NX-500
J1-9
Section K1. IB-581
AR-B1374
CPU card
1. How to Quit Programs

When updating the program of each terminal unit, quit the program, and then switch to the
screen in which the PC-DOS prompt such as "A:¥-----" is displayed. The table below
summarizes how to quit the terminal program for each terminal.
How to confirm Installation

Changing to PCDOS Display
program version command
Terminal
[Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2] B:¥>install
unit A:¥DP10¥
DP-6 Note)With the version Ver-15 or earlier [F6]=>Self test
Main [Fn]+[F2] TERMINAL> B:¥>nbdpinst
unit [F1]=>nbdp.exe
A:¥ Confirm at
FELCOM 11 [F1] =>[8] B:¥>ibinst
FELCOM11> program starting
A:¥ Ver03:
FELCOM 12 [Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]=>YES=>[Enter] B:¥>ibinst
FELCOM12> [Alt]+[Fn]=[F1]
FELCOM 81 [Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]=>YES=>[Enter] A:¥> [Alt]+[Fn]=[F1] B:¥>ibinst
For example, to quit the terminal program of FELCOM-12:

- A message, "OK to quit system Yes/No", will appear. Then, move the cursor to "Y",
and press [Enter] key.
- Then, the prompt, "A:¥FELCOM12>", will appear on the screen.
To update the terminal program, B-drive (B:¥>) is used. To change from A-drive to B
drive,
- press [B],[:], and [Enter] keys successively.
Then, the prompt, "B:¥>", will appear on the screen.
Type “installation command”, then press [Enter] key. (See above table; installation
command.)
Note) Drives of IB-581 are:

A drive : Flash ROMs of IB-581
B drive : Floppy disk
K1-1
IB-581
2. Changing the Terminal Software
2.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to change the terminal software to use the IB-581 for other
models. When changing IB-581 of DP-6 to the terminal of FELCOM-12, for example, you
need to replace the terminal program. To replace the software, delete all the files except the
system files of PC-DOS: IBMDOS.COM *, IBMBIO.COM *, COMMAND.COM, and
FORMAT.COM, and install the program to be.
2.2 A method to change the terminal program by

formatting A-drive
Command “FORMAT A: /S” or A-drive format and copy of system files is used to format
the A-drive.
- Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[A],[: ],[Space],[/], and [S] keys
successively.
If you do not type “/S”, A: drive will be formatted all, this mean PC-DOS will be
disappeared, never forget type “/S”. If you made format A: drive all or lost PC-DOS, see
“chapter 3 Install PC-DOS”.
For example)
1. Quit the terminal program of FELCOM-81.
- Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. Select “Yes” and press
[Enter] key.
When the program has been quitted, the prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen.
2. To format the A-drive and copy the system files at the same time.
- Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[A],[:],[Space],[/],[S] and [Enter] keys
successively.
Be sure to type a switch function "/S". This switch is a command to format the A-drive
and copy the system files at the same time.
3. Check the root directory of A-drive.

COMMAND.COM
Note) You cannot find "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM", because these are
hidden files.
4. Change to the B-drive by pressing keys,

- Press [B], [:], and [Enter], successively.
The prompt "B:¥>" will appear on the screen.
K1-2
IB-581
5. Install the terminal program by using "INSTALL.BAT" file contained in the program.
Press the keys successively according to the terminal to be changed to as follows:
FELCOM-11
- [I],[B],[I],[N],[S],[T] and [Enter]
FELCOM-12
- [I],[B],[I],[N],[S],[T] and [Enter]
FELCOM-81
- [I],[N],[S],[T],[A],[L],[L] and [Enter]
DP-6
- [I],[N],[S],[T],[A],[L],[L] and [Enter]
Programs will be installed automatically. With some terminal programs, follow the
installation instructions that will be shown on the display.
6. When the program has been installed, the prompt "B:¥>" will appear. Then turn off
power.
K1-3
IB-581
3. Installing PC-DOS
3.1 Overview
The system files and terminal program of PC-DOS 6.3 is installed in A-drive: flash ROMs
(MEM-1, 2) on the CPU Card (AR-B1374) of IB-581.
If the A-drive has been formatted or the system files have been destructed in an operational
error, and PC-DOS, therefore, does not start, reinstall the PC-DOS system files, and then
install the terminal program.
3.2 Outline of the Procedure
Refer to page K1-7.

Backup PC-DOS
Installing PC-DOS
Refer to page K1-8.

Backup system files of another IB-581.
FD drive-A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2
A:\>FORMAT B: /S Change BIOS settings.
FD drive-B: not installed
Refer to page K1-10.

Copy "FORMAT. COM" file. Change FDD flat cable: A-drive.
A:\>COPY FORMAT.COM B: Change DIP SW of CPU Card: SW1- # 5, 6 on.
Refer to page K1-11. Note) System Files:

IBMDOS.COM
Set FD with System Files and FORMAT.COM in FDD. IBMBIO.COM
COMMAND.COM
and
FORMAT.COM
Start up PC-DOS from FD. Power ON
Format C-drive and copy System Files. A:\>FORMAT C: /S
C-drive: Flash ROMs
FD drive-A: Not install

Restore BIOS settings.
FD drive-B: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2
Restore:
Change FDD flat cable: B-drive.
Change DIP SW of CPU Card: SW1- # 5, 6 off.
Note) You cannot find "IBMDOS.COM" Install Terminal Program.

and "IBMBIO.COM of the system files Refer to page K1-1.
by "DIR" command, because they
are hidden files.
End
K1-4
IB-581
3.3 Until PC-DOS Starts

Major displays that appear until PC-DOS starts up are shown below. The displays depend
on the version of CPU Card. The following displays are for Ver. 3.0 of CPU card.
Power ON
CHIPS 65535 VGA 32kB BIOS

Version 2.0.2
DECOMPILATION OR DISASSEMBLY PROHIBITED
Copyright (c)1994 Chips and Technologes Inc,. All Rights Reserved
American
Megatrends AMIBIOS (c) 1995 American Megatrends Inc,.
(Ver 3.2 set-2)
Hit <DEL> , If you want to run SETUP CPU Cared Ver2.2 will appear.
1024kB OK
WAIT...
AR-B1374 SSD BIOS Version 3.1 (c)1997 Acrosser Technology Co,. LTD
ROM Drive Unit A =Drive :A ROM Disk Maximum =1536k

RAM Drive Unit B =None RAM Disk Space =0000k
ROM Memory Type =29C040A(512k ~8) Firmware Segment =C800H
SRAM Memory Type =None Base Port Address =0210H
SYSTEM Boot Drive =ROM/Flash Disk
Hit <F1> ,if you want to setup FLASH Disk Call to setup FLASH Disk menu.
CPU Card Ver-3.0 . (See next page)
AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1995,American Megatrends Inc.,
Main Processor :i386SX Base Memory Size :640kB

Math Processor :None Ext.Memory Size :128kB
Floppy Drive A: :None Display Type :VGA/EGA
Floppy Drive B: :1.44 MB 31/2 h Serial Port(s) :3F8,2F8
AMIBIOS Date :07/15/95 Parallel Port(s) :378
Processor Clock :33MHz
OR
CPU Card Ver-2.2 .
AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1992,American Megatrends Inc.,
Main Processor :80386SX Base Memory Size :640kB

Numeric Processor :None Ext.Memory Size :128kB
Floppy Drive A: :None Hard Disk C:Type :None
Floppy Drive B: :1.44 MB,31/2 h Hard Disk D:Type :None
Display Type :VGA/PGA/EGA Serial Port(s) :3F8,2F8
AMIBIOS Date :11/11/92 Parallel Port(s) :378
Starting PC DOS...
Starting terminal program
K1-5
IB-581
Note) Rewriting the memory

If you press [F1] key when a message "Hit <F1>, if you want to setup FLASH Disk."
appears before PC-DOS starts up after power-on, a memory settings display will appear. If
you "Save" the settings by pressing [F4] key, the terminal program will be deleted and will
not start. Then, a message "Boot Failure Insert BOOT diskette in A: Press any key when
ready" will appear. In this case, it is necessary to PC-DOS system files and terminal
program in A-drive.
Explain to customer that you do not touch keyboard after the power switch ON until
terminal software starting up completed.
Power ON
"Hit <F1>, if you want to setup FLASH Disk"
If press [F1] key, apper as follow.
note)
FLASH type=29C040A(512k x 8) Total chip(s)=02 Disk size=1024 kbyte(s)
ESC:Exit F4:Save :Select PgUp/PgDn:Modify
If press [ESC] key, If press [F4] key,
"Write to FLASH disk(Y/N)" will appear on the screen.
Press [N],[Enter] keys. If you press [Y],[Enter] key :
AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1995, American Megatrends Inc,.

"Starting PC DOS..."
Main Processor :i386SX Base Memory Size :640kB
Math Processor :None Ext.Memory Size :128kB
Floppy Drive A: ::None Display Type :VGA/EGA
Floppy Drive B: :1.44MB 31/2 Serial Port(s) :3F8.2F8
AMIBIOS Date :07/15/95 Parallele Port(s) :378
Processor Clock :33MH
Starting terminal program
The displays depend upon CPU Card Version.
(The above is for Ver. 3.0.)
PC DOS will not starting.
If power is turned on, PC-DOS will not start

keeping the display below.
Note) This is the memory configuration of IB-581. "Boot Failure Insert BOOT diskette in A:
Do not change this. Press any key when ready."
K1-6
IB-581
3.4 Backup the System Files (PC-DOS: Ver. 6.3)

If A-drive (Flash ROMs) has been formatted or the system files have been destructed in an
operational error, and PC-DOS, therefore, does not start, start the PC-DOS with the floppy
disk that contains the system files. The necessary system files are as follows:
IBMDOS.COM IBMBIO.COM
COMMAND.COM FORMAT.COM (a file to be added)
Note) "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM" are hidden files which you cannot find
by using "DIR" command.
The following procedure shows how to copy the system files and "FORMAT.COM" file
from normally operating IB-581 to FD.
Procedure
1. Quit the terminal program. For example, with NBDP terminal,
- press [F2] key while pressing [Fn] and [Alt] keys.
For how to quit each the terminal program, refer to "page K1-1".
2. Change to the root directory of A-drive.

The prompt “A:¥>” will appear on the screen. If this prompt does not appear,
- press keys, [C], [D], [Space], [¥], and [Enter], successively.
Or,
- press [C], [D], [.], [.] keys until the display "A:¥>" appears.
3. Insert the FD to write the system files into the FD drive.
4. To format the FD and copy the system files at the same time,
- successively press keys [F], [O], [R], [M], [A], [T], [Space], [B], [:], [Space], [/],
[S], and [Enter].
5. Press keys according to the displayed operational instructions.

“Insert new diskette for drive B: and press ENTER when ready..”
- Press [Enter] key.
“Checking existing disk format. Saving ---- Volume label (11characters,ENTER for none)?”
“Volume Serial Number is 3C53-16D5 Format another(Y/N)?”
- Press [N] and [Enter] keys successively.
6. After a prompt “A:¥>” appears on the screen, change to B-drive by pressing keys,
- [B],[:], and [Enter], successively.
And check the contents of the FD.
The "COMMAND.COM" file must be shown.
K1-7
IB-581
7. Change to A-drive by pressing keys,

- [A],[:],and [Enter], successively.
The "A:¥>" prompt will appear on the screen.
8. Next, to copy "FORMAT.COM" file,

- successively press keys [C], [O], [P], [Y], [Space], [F], [O], [R], [M], [A], [T],
[.], [C], [O],[M], [Space], [B], [:], and [Enter].
9. Change to B-drive by pressing keys,

- [B],[:], and [Enter], successively.
The prompt "B:¥>" will appear on the screen.
10. By pressing keys

- [D], [I], [R], and [Enter],
confirm that the two files, "COMMAND.COM" and "FORMAT.COM", are shown in
the contents of the FD.
3.5 Changing BIOS (Basic Input Output System) settings

To start PC-DOS from FD, change BIOS settings as follows:
Procedure
1. - Turn on power, and continue to press [DEL] key until a display in step 2 appears.
Note) Or, with CPU Card Ver. 2.2, turn on power, and when a display "Hit <DEL>, If
you want to run SETUP." appears, press [DEL] key.
2. The following display "AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES" will
appear. The display depends upon the CPU Card Version.
AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES AMIBIOS SETUP - BIOS SETUP UTILITIES
(c)1992 American Megatrends Inc.,All Rights Reserved (c)1995 American Megatrends, Inc.All Rights Reserved
STANDARD CMOS SETUPP Standard CMOS SetupP

ADVANCED CMOS SETUP Advanced CMOS Setup
AUTO CONGIGURATION WITH BIOS DEFAULTS Advanced Chipset Setup
AUTO CONFIGURATION WITH POWER-ON DEFAULTS Change User Password
CHANGE PASSWORD Change Supervisor Password
AUTO DETECT HARD DISK Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings
HARD DISK UTILITY (Version 2.2) Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings
WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT Save Settings and Exit (Version 3.0)
DO NOT WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT Exit Without Saving
3. Confirm that the cursor is on "STANDARD CMOS SETUP",

- and press [Enter] key once or twice.
(The cursor position can be shifted with [up] and [down] keys.)
K1-8
IB-581
4. The following "STANDARD CMOS SETUP" menu will be displayed. The display
depends upon the CPU Card Version.
AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM-BIOS SET UTILITIES AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES
(c)1992 American Megatrends Inc.,AllRites Reserved (c)1995 American Megatrends, Inc.All Rights Reserved
Date(mn/date/year) :Mon,Sep,21 1998 Base Memory :640kB Date(mm/dd/yyyy) :Thu Sep 24,1998
Time(hour/min/sec) :09:41:10 Ext.Memory :128kB Time(hh/mm/ss) :13:20:20
Cyln Herd WPcom LZone Sect Size
Hard Disk C:Type :Not Installed Floppy Drive A :Not Installed
Hard Disk D:Type :Not Installed Floppy Drive B :1.44 MB 31/2
Floppy Drive A: :Not Installed LBA Blk PIO 32Bit
Floppy Drive B: :1.44MB,31/2 calender Type Size Cyln Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode
Primary Display :VGA/PGA/EGA Pri Master :Not Installed
Keyboard :Installed
(Version 2.2) Pri Slave :Not Installed
(Version 3.0)
Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled
5. Put the cursor on "Floppy Drive A:" with [up] and [down] keys, and change the contents
from "Not Installed" to "1.44 MB, 3 1/2" by pressing [up] or [down] key while pressing
[Fn] key.
6. Similarly, put the cursor on "Floppy Drive B:" with [up] and [down] keys, and change
the contents from "1.44 MB, 3 1/2" to "Not Installed" by pressing [up] or [down] key
while pressing [Fn] key.
7. Save the changed BIOS settings as follows:

- With CPU Ver. 2.2,
- press [Esc] and [F10] keys successively.
Then, a display "Write to CMOS and Exit (Y/N)? N" will appear.
- So, press [Y] and [Enter] keys successively.
- With CPU Ver. 3.0,

A display "Save Current settings and exit (Y/N)? Y" will appear.
- So, press [Enter] key.
8. After a display "AMIBIOS System Configuration" has appeared, PC-DOS will start.
A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time.
"Current date is XX",
- pressing key [Enter].
"Current Time is XX" ,
- pressing key [Enter].
9. After turning off power, the BIOS settings have been changed.
K1-9
IB-581
3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector

Change DIP SW of CPU Card and connector wiring for FD drive in the IB-581.
Changing DIP SW of CPU Card

Remove the casing of IB-581, and turn on DIP SW "#5" and "#6" of CPU Card.
DIP SW "#8" is already on.
DIP SW FIL
FD DRIVE
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER PACK
VGA CARD
# 5, # 6 ON
note)
DIP SW "8" is already on.
CPU CARD
SIMM
Changing Internal Connector

Change the connection of the flat cable connected between the CPU Card and the FD drive
at FD side.
This connector change switches the FD drive from B-drive to A-drive.
Connect this connector to FD drive.

5inch FDD A Drive
Note) Be cautions about the
connector inserting direction. 3.5inch FDD
FIL
FD DRIVE 5inch FDD B Drive
3.5inch FDD
VGA CARD
POWER PACK
Originally connected connector

CPU CARD
SIMM
K1-10
IB-581
3.7 Installing System Files

After preparing the FD that contains the system files backuped in page K1-7 (including
"FORMAT.COM" file), changing BIOS settings, DIP SW of CPU Card, and the internal
connector, write the system files in the Flash ROMs as follows.
1. Set the FD containing the system files (including "FORMAT.COM" file) in the FD
drive.
2. - Turn on power, and continue to press [ESC] key.

Continue to press [ESC] key until a display "Starting PC DOS..." appears. Then, PC-
DOS will start from the FD system files.
3. Continue to operate according to the displayed operational instructions.

A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time.
- Pressing key [Enter].
4. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen.
5. To format the C-drive(Flash ROMs) and copy the system files at the same time.
(See note)
- Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[C],[:],[Space],[/],[S],[Enter] keys
succssively.
Note) The drive name of the Flash ROMs disk depends upon whether PC-DOS is
installed in the
Flash ROMs disk, or not. The name is "A-drive" if PC-DOS is installed, and "C-drive"
if not.
6. A display "Insert new diskette for C-drive and press ENTER when ready..." will appear.
- Then, press [Enter] key.
7. Continue to operate according to the displayed operational instructions.

“Proceed with Format(Y/N) ?”
- Press [Y],[Enter] keys.
“Volume label (11 characters, ENTER for none)?”
“Format another (Y/N) ?”
- Press [N],[Enter] keys.
K1-11
IB-581
9. Check to be sure that the system file have been written in the Flash ROMs(C-drive).
- Change to the C-drive by pressing keys [C],[:], and [Enter], successively.
The prompt "C:¥>" will appear on the screen.
10. Press keys [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] successively to confirm that "COMMAND.COM"
files are included in C-drive.
11. Once turn off power, and restore the changed items to their original settings, referring
to the procedures described in "page K1-8 3.5 Changing BIOS settings" and "page K1-10
3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector".
BIOS settings
- Floppy Drive A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 Restore to "Not installed".
- Floppy Drive B: Not installed Restore to "1.44 MB, 3 1/2".
Changing DIP SW settings and the connector connection
- # 5, # 6 ON Restore to "# 5, # 6 OFF".
Restore the connection of FD drive connector.
- A Drive Restore to "B-drive".
12. Turn on power, and continue to operate according to the operational instructions
displayed. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date
and time.
14. Press keys [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] successively to confirm that "COMMAND.COM"
files are included in A-drive.
15. Install the terminal software according to "page K1-1".
K1-12
IB-581
4. How to erase password

In BIOS setting, entry of a password may be requested. (The password is set through
“Change User Password” and/or “Change Supervisor Password.” If so, erase the password
by following the steps below.
1. Remove the CPU card with all connectors connected.
2. Turn on the unit. Be careful not to short on the CPU card.
3. Short between leads of C17 at the soldering side of the CPU card.
(Any change is observed on the screen.)
[C17] Land
IC
IC
IC IC
IC
4. Turn off the unit.
5. Fix the CPU card.
6. Turn on the unit and confirm the BIOS Settings.
K1-13
IB-581
AR-B1378-F2 (New type CPU card)
CPU card
5. AR-B1378-F2
The CPU card AR-B1374 used in the terminal unit IB-581, HSD Modem IB-680/681,
and NBDP DP-6 is no longer produced.
The new card is compatible with old one when it is used for IB-680/681 and DP-6.
For IB-581, replace the old card and T. BOARD with new ones at a time. The code
number and type of new T. BOARD are;
Type:16P0167
Code No.: 004-444-100
The type of new CPU card is listed below.

New CPU Compatibility
Model Code No. Specification
Card with old card
IB-581 AR-B1378 F2 004444070 With VGA No
IB-680 AR-B1378 FH 004442980 Without VGA Yes
IB-681 AR-B1378 FH 004442980 Without VGA Yes
DP-6 AR-B1378 FC 005939230 Without VGA Yes
Factory-modified sets (approximately)

Model Serial No. Production
FELCOM 12 7976 and after
In April 1999
IB-581 DP-6 7658 and after
FELCOM 81 Not decided yet
The differences between new and old CPU cards used for the IB-581 are;
Old New
Type Identification Type Identification
CPU Card AR-B1374 With VGA board AR-B1378 F2 Single board
piggyback-mounted
T. BOARD 16P0141 Less parts 16P0167 More parts
K1-14
IB-581
5.1 How to install PC-DOS
K1-15
IB-581
5.2 Changing BIOS settings
K1-16
IB-581
K1-17
Section K2. IB-582
This chapter mainly describes about the CPU card in the terminal unit IB-582. The CPU card is
NOVA-300-M2-FO/DOS embedded 386SX SBC of which CPU is ALI6117 (includes 386SX
CPU).
1. DOS installation
When the message “Non-system disk or disk error Press a key to reboot” appears, DOS must be
installed by using the procedure below.
Note: 1) On IB-582, drive A is floppy disk and drive C is flash ROM.

2) Use DOS program being copied from other IB-582 only.
1.1 How to copy DOS program

To copy DOS program from the IB-582 which works normally;
1. Press [F2] while pressing and holding down [Fn] and [Alt] simultaneously to terminate the
Inmarsat-B system program.
2. Select drive C. (Make sure that prompt C:\ on the screen.)
3. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.
4. Type FORMART A:/S, followed by [Enter] key. The disk is formatted and system file is
copied onto the disk.
5. Type COPY FORMAT.COM A:, followed by [Enter] key. The FORMAT.COM file is
copied onto the disk.
6. Type A: and press [Enter] key to change the drive from C to A.
7. Type DIR, followed by [Enter] key. The following file names are displayed.
COMMAND.COM
FORMAT.COM
K2-1
IB-582
1.2 DOS installation

To install DOS;
1. Turn on the unit while pressing and holding down [DEL] key.
When the prompt “Enter CURRENT Password:” appears, refer to 2. Erasing password.
2. Keep [DEL] key holding down until the AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY menu is
displayed.
AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY – VERSION 1.16

(C)1996 American Megatrends, Inc. All Right Reserved
Standard CMOS Setup

Advanced CMOS Setup
Advanced Chipset Setup
Power Management Setup
Peripheral Setup
Auto-Detect Hard Disks
Change User Password
Change Supervisor Password
Change Language Setting
Auto Configuration with Optional Settings
Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings
Save Settings and Exit
Exit Without Saving
Standard CMOS setup for Changing time, date, harddisk type, etc
ESC: Exit ||: Sel F2/F3:Color F10:Save & Exit
3. Select “Advanced CMOS Setup” and press [Enter] key.

4. Press the up or down arrow key while pressing and holding down [Fn] key to change the
setting as below.
1. Quick Boot: from Enabled to Disabled.
2. Boot UP Sequence: from C:, A:, CDROM to A:, C:, CDROM.
5. To save the procedure, press [Esc] and [F10] in this order. “Save Current setting and exit
(Y/N)? Y” is displayed.
7. Make sure that “Non-System disk or disk error Press a key to reboot” is displayed.
8. Insert the floppy disk which stores DOS program into the drive.
K2-2
IB-582
9. Follow the instruction message on the screen until A:\> appears. If you accept the displayed
data, press [Enter] key.
Current data is Sat x –xx-xxxx

Enter new data (mm-dd-yyyy):
Current time is xx:xx:xx.xx

Enter new time:
Datalight ROM^DOS Version 6.22

Copyright © 1989-1999 Datalight, Inc.
A:\>
10. To copy files on the floppy disk (drive A) to the flash ROM (drive C), type FORMAT C:/S,
followed by [Enter] key.
11. Press [Y], followed by [Enter] key while the message below is on the screen.
Warning ! All data on hard disk drive C: will be lost !!

Are you SURE you want to format this drive (Y/N) ? Y
12. Wait until the format is completed.

13. Change the drive from A to C. (Type C:, followed by [Enter].)
14. Type DIR, followed by [Enter] key to make sure that COMMAND.COM file exists in the
flash ROM.
15. Change the drive from C to A.
16. Type COPY FORMAT.COM C:, followed by [Enter] key to copy the file to the flash
ROM.
17. Change the drive from A to C and type DIR, followed by [Enter] key to make sure that the
flash ROM has COMMAND.COM and FORMAT.COM files.
18. Remove the floppy disk and insert the floppy disk having FELCOM 82 terminal software.
19. Change the drive to A.
20. Type INSTALL, followed by [Enter] key.
21. After the program is installed, turn off the unit and remove the disk.
22. Follow steps 1 to 3 above and change the settings as below.
(1) Quick Boot: from Disabled to Enabled
(2) Boot UP Sequence: from A:, C:, CDROM to C:, A:, CDROM.
K2-3
IB-582
2. Erasing password
If someone sets Supervisor Password and forgot it, AMI BIOS setup program cannot run.
(Supervisor Password setting is unnecessary for IB-582.) In this case, clearing CMOS setup must
be carried out. To do so;
Note; After clearing CMOS setup, BIOS setup must be made.
1. Turn off the unit.

2. Change jumper setting JP31 from #2-#3 to #3-#4.
3. Wait for 5 seconds.
4. Change jumper setting JP31 from #3-#4 to #2-#3.
5. Turn on the unit while pressing and holding down [DEL] key.
6. Release [DEL] key when the following message comes on.
CMOS Checksum Bad
RUN SETUP
Press F1 to Resume
7. Press [F1] key to call AMI BIOS setup menu.
8. Referring to 3. BIOS default, change settings on the following setup menus.
- Standard CMOS Setup
- Advanced COMS Setup
- Advanced Chipset Setup
- Power Management Setup
- Peripheral Setup
9. Select “Save Settings and Exit” in the AMI BIOS setup menu.
K2-4
IB-582
3. BIOS default
BIOS defaults of the CPU card are;
Standard CMOS Setup
Advanced CMOS Setup
K2-5
IB-582
Advanced Chipset Setup
Power Management Setup
IRQ 03 Event (CM2) Disable

| |
IRQ 15 Event (Reserved) Disable
Monitor HDD Disable
Monitor VGA Disable
K2-6
IB-582
Peripheral Setup
K2-7
IB-582
IB-582
4. Layout and hardware settings

The figure below shows the location of the major parts on the CPU card and the location of
the jumper blocks.
POWER LED Always on
-12V +12V +5V

NOVA-300 V1.1
JP8
CN1 CN2 CN4(IDE Port)
(External Power)
CN20(LCD)
(Serial Port) (Serial Port)
CN11
JP9 JP16 CN5(FDD) (LED1)
CN21
JP29 (IDE LED)
JP10 CN6
JP20
JP21
FDC37C669 JP24
(IrDA Port)
(Serial Port)
JP1/2
JP25
JP26
W83877TF
CN12(Parallel Port)
AMIBIOS
CN14
386SX HM86508 IQ
CN15
LCD/CRT
Controller
SIMM
JP18
M6117C
(Mouse)
Includes
CN8
CN16
386SX CPU RAM(1M) (Power LED & keylock)
424260-60 CN7 JP19
(Reset button) JP23
(Serial Port)
JP31 (RAM Clear) Disk on chip
1 4 RAM(1M) (F-ROM)
JP3 424260-60
CN17
C Drive
(Speaker)
CR1/2AA
CN9
CN3
BATT
CN10 (Keyboard)
CN18
BZ
K2-8
K2-8
Appendix
AP1. Cable specifications

1.1 Cable Specifications
AP1-1
Appendix
AP1-2
Appendix
AP1-3
Appendix
AP1-4
Appendix
AP1-5
Appendix
1.2 How to calculate voltage drop in power cable
The unit is designed to work from specified power supply voltage +/-10 %. The
resistance at power supply connector and terminal can not be neglected in the
equipment. The power cable must be selected properly so that voltage drop is 3 to 5 %.
The maximum current in the power cable must be used for the calculation. In the
following examples, how to select the cable gauge is explained.
* Voltage drop in cable e=(K x I x r x L) / 1000

* Cable length L=(1000 x e ) / (K x I x r)
K=coefficient (single phase and DC: 2 three phases : / 3 )
I=current (A)
r=resistance : ohm/km
L=cable length (m)
Example)
* FM-8500
I=Tx current : 7 A e=0.72 V Cable drop : 3 %
r=DPYC-5.5sq : 3.36 ohm/km K=2
L=(1000 x 0.72) / (2 x 7 x 3.36)
=15.3 m
* Battery cable
I=Current : 50 A e=1.2 V Cable drop : 5 %
r=DPYC-38sq : 0.483 ohm/km K=2
L=(1000 x 1.2) / (2 x 50 x 0.483)
=24.8 m
* PR-850A AC cable (AC 220 V single phase line)

I=Current : 7 A e=11 V Cable drop : 5 %
r=DPYC-8 sq : 2.33 ohm/km K=2
L=(1000 x 11) / (2 x 7 x 2.33)
=337 m
AP1-6
Appendix
K=2 (single phase and DC)

Cable length 5.5sq = 3.36 ohm/km
40 m
30
5A 10A 15A 20A

20
10
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

Voltage drop in cable
Cable length 14 sq = 1.31 ohm/km
40 m
5A 10A 15A 20A 30A 40A
30
20
10
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

AP1-7
Appendix
40 m
10A 20A
5A 15A
30A
40A
30
60A
20
10
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

40 m
10A 20A 30A
40A 50A 60A
120A
30
20
10
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 V

AP1-8
Appendix
1.3 Coaxial Cable Specifications
AP1-9
Appendix
Type of Coaxial cable and loss in 1600 MHz
Loss (dB)
Type
10m 20m 30m 40m 50m 60m 70m 80m 90m 100m
3D-2V 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80
5D-2V 4.4 8.8 13.2 17.6 22 26.4 30.8 35.2 39.6 44
8D-2V 3.3 6.6 9.9 13.2 16.5 19.8 23.1 26.4 29.7 33
10D-2V 2.7 5.4 8.1 10.8 13.5 16.2 18.9 21.6 24.3 27
5D-FB 2.6 5.2 7.8 10.5 13 15.6 18.2 20.8 23.4 26
8D-FB 1.8 3.6 5.4 7.2 9 10.8 12.6 14.4 16.2 18
10D-FB 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5 15
RG-174/U 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
RG-58A/U 7.9 15.8 23.7 31.6 39.5 47.4 55.3 63.2 71.1 79
RG-213/U 3.9 7.8 11.7 15.6 19.5 23.4 27.3 31.2 35.1 39
RG-55A/U 6.1 12.2 18.3 24.4 30.5 36.6 42.7 48.8 54.9 61
RG-5B/U 4.4 8.8 13.2 17.6 22 26.4 30.8 35.2 39.6 44
RG-214/U 3.7 7.4 11.1 14.8 18.5 22.2 25.9 29.6 33.3 37
RG-217/U 2.9 5.8 8.7 11.6 14.5 17.4 20.3 23.2 26.1 29
RG-222/U 19 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190
AP1-10
Appendix
1.4 How to attach the antenna cable connector

1. N-P 5DFB/8DFB
AP1-11
Appendix
2. N-P 12DSFA
AP1-12
Appendix
1.5 Installation of Pre-amp unit and coaxial cable
1. Mounting of Antenna (FAX-5, 2.6 m whip antenna)

Fix the FAX-5 (pre-amp unit) to the mounting mast (35-90 mm) with hose clamps.
Screw the whip antenna into the FAX-5. Coat connection point with putty to
waterproof.
2. Switching to coaxial cable with armor

To switch to coaxial cable with armor (RG-10/UY);
1. Attach a coaxial connector (MP-3) about 40-60 cm from the bottom of the FAX-5.
2. Remove 15-25 cm of the sheath of the cable RG-l0/UY and attach connector MP-7 to
the cable.
3. Attach relay connector M-A-JJ between connectors MP-3 and MP-7.
4. Cover connectors with self-vulcanizing tape followed by vinyl tape to waterproof.
AP1-13
Appendix
AP2. Power consumption

2.1 Power consumption list
Power
Current Drain
Equipment Model consumption Note
Tx (W) Rx (W) Tx (A) Rx (A)
AC:4.8kVA 120A 3A 24V DC
DC:2.8kW Max. (SSB peak)
FS-8000
24V DC
36A 3A
(AC fail)
DC1.4kW Max. (SSB peak)
FS-5000
24V DC
26A 3A
(AC fail)
DC:1.1kW Max. (SSB peak)
MF/HF RT FS-2500
24V DC
26A 3A
(AC fail)
FS-1562-15 20A 2A 24V DC
40A 2A 24V DC
FS-1562-25 24V DC
25A 2A
(AC fail)
FS-75 20A 2A 24V DC
40A 2A 24V DC
FS-2550 24V DC
25A 2A
(AC fail)
FM-7000 6.0A 0.5A 12V DC
FM-7500 10A 2.1A 24V DC
FM-8000
VHF RT 5.5A 0.9A 24V DC
+DSC-8V
FM-8500 150W 10W 6.3A 0.4A 24V DC
FM-8700 170W 25W 7.1A 1.0A 24V DC
DSC-5 15W 0.6A 24V DC
DSC-5A 15W 0.6A 24V DC
MF/HF DSC DSC-6 15W 0.6A 24V DC
DSC-6A 15W 0.6A 24V DC
DSC-60 24W 1.0A 24V DC
DSC-5 15W 0.6A 24V DC
DSC-5V 15W 0.6A 24V DC
VHF DSC
DSC-8V Connected with FM-800 15V DC
DSC-8VP 15W 0.6A 24V DC
DMC DMC-5 10W 0.4A 24V DC
Remote RB-500 12W 1A
12V DC
station RB-700 12W 1A
Distributor DB-500 3A 24V DC
MF/HF WR AA-50 10W 0.4A 24V DC
AP2-1
Appendix
Power
Current Drain
Equipment Model consumption Note
Tx (W) Rx (W) Tx (A) Rx (A)
DP-5 40W 1.7A 24V DC
24V DC
20W 0.8A
NBDP (DP-6)
DP-6
24V DC
18W 0.8A
(IB-581)
24V DC
144W 24W 6A 1A
(IC-100/200)
FELCOM 10
24V DC
41W 1.7A
(IC-500)
24V DC
200W 30W 8.3A 1.2A
(IC-111/211)
24V DC
INMARSAT C FELCOM 11 41W Max. 1.7A Max.
(IC-511)
24V DC
18W 0.7A
(IB-518)
24V DC
120W 25W 5A 1A
(IC-112/212)
FELCOM 12
24V DC
18W 0.7A
(IB-581)
PP-500 33VA 100/220V AC
Printer
PP-510 36W 1.5A 24V DC
FELCOM 80 400VA Max. 100/220V AC
100VAC:0.3
IB-680 100/220V AC
220VAC:0.2
24V DC
270W Max. 11.2A Max.
INMARSAT B (Class 1)
FELCOM 81
24V DC
254W Max. 10.6A
(Class 2)
100VAC:0.3
IB-681 100/220V AC
220VAC:0.2
FAX PFX-50 50W 100V AC
NAVTEX NX-500 15W 0.6A 24V DC
EGC EGC-5 2.1A 24V DC
EGC Printer PP-505 15W 0.6A 24V DC
FT-1208 20A 3A
FT-808 20A 3A 24V DC
Transmitter FT-508 20A 3A (Output power
FT-258 20A 3A more than 60W)
FT-158 20A 3A
RV-
3A 24V DC
Receiver 118G/128G
RV-117G 1.3A 24V DC
24V 20W
EMG lamp 0.8A 24V DC
lamp
AP2-2
Appendix
2.2 Reserve Sources of Energy (By class NK)
1. The capacity of the reserve source of energy is to be determined in accordance with

the following formula with specified load conditions to the required radio
installations fed from the reserve sources.
C=K x I
where C: Required capacity (AH)
K: Capacity conversion factor (H)
(corresponding to ambient temperature of +50C and end voltage of 1.8 V)
I : Total consumption current (A)
2. The capacity conversion factor K is to be determined in accordance with the

following:
(1) For lead accumulator batteries of a clud or pasted vent type, K = 3.2 in the
case of a 1 hour discharging rate and K = 7.2 in the case of a 6 hour
discharging rates, respectively. For lead accumulator batteries of a sealed
type, K= 2.0 and K= 7.1 in the case of 1 hour and 6 hour discharging
rates, respectively.
(2) For lead accumulator batteries of other types and alkali accumulator
batteries, K may be determined by referring to the value recommended by
the manufacturer.
AP2-3
Appendix
2.3 Sample of Battery calculation table
AP2-4
Appendix
2.4 Specifications of Rectifier and Battery charger
PR-850A
1. GENERAL
(1) Rated Input Voltage 100/110/120/200/220/240 VAC +/-10%
(2) Input Frequency 50/60 Hz
(3) Input Current 15A or less (Input :100V AC / Output 30A)
30A or less (Input :100V AC / Output 60A)
(4) Rated Output Voltage 24VDC +/-10%
(with rated Output Current 30 to 60A)
(5) Rated Output Current 30A continuous
(6) Peak Output Current 60A output within 1mim. (Input AC)
40A output within 1mim. (Input DC)
(7) Ripple Voltage 200 m Vp-p or less (Load :0 to 30A)
(8) Insulation Resistance 500VDC 10M ohms or more between AC
input and chassis
2. Environmental Condition
(1) Ambient Temperature -20 OC to +55 OC
(2) Relative Humidity 95 % max.
PR-300
1. GENERAL
(1) Rated Input Voltage 100/110/200/220 VAC +/-10%
(2) Input Frequency 47 to 63 Hz
(3) Input Current 4.1A or less (Input 100V AC / Output 7.5A)
(4) Rush Current 80A or less
(5) Rated Output Voltage 24VDC +/- 3%
(with rated output current 7.5A)
(6) Rated Output Current 7.5A
(7) Peak Output Current 20A
(with rated output current :15A
250msec, duty 50%)
AP2-5
Appendix
(8) Ripple Voltage 100 mVp-p or less

(9) Insulation Resistance 500VDC 50M ohms or more between AC
input and chassis
2. Environmental Condition
(1) Ambient Temperature -20 OC to +55 OC
(2) Relative Humidity 95 % max.
BC-6158 : Battery charger

1. Applicable Battery 200AH Normal Ship Battery
2. Power Supply 100/110/200/220VAC, single phase,
50/60Hz, l.5kVA max.
3. Output for battery 28VDC, 30A (full charging)
4. Charge/discharge Meter Provided on the radio console panel
5. Control Panel Provided on the radio console panel
6. Environmental Conditions
Ambient Temperature -20 OC to +55 OC
Relative Humidity 95% max. at +40 OC
AP2-6
Appendix
AP3. NMEA
3.1 List of NMEA sentences
Equipment Model Receiving sentences Note

FS-5000
MF/HF RT GLL RMA RMC ZDA GGA(Ver21) CIF or NMEA
FS-8000
FM-7500 GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA
GLL RMA RMC ZDA(Ver03)
FM-8500 NMEA
VHF RT GGA(Ver10)
GLL RMC ZDA RMA(Ver04)
FM-8700 NMEA
GGA(Ver04)
DSC-5/5A GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA
MF/HF DSC DSC-6/6A GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA
DSC-60 GGA RMA RMC GLL ZDA NMEA
DSC-5/5V GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA
VHF DSC
DSC-8V/8VP GLL RMA RMC CIF or NMEA
GLL RMA RMC VTG DBT
DP-5 CIF or NMEA
MTW VHW TRF
NBDP
GLL RMA RMC VTG DBT
DP-6 NMEA
MTW VHW TRF ZDA(Ver17)
FELCOM 10 GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL CIF or NMEA
GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL
NMEA
FELCOM 11 MTW DBT VDR
GLL GGA VTG RMC ZDA OUT:GB-92
INMARSAT C GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG WPL
MTW DBT VDR BWC(Ver06) NMEA
FELCOM 12 BWR(Ver06)
OUT:GN-74/77/
GGA ZDA GLL VTG RMC GSV
78
FELCOM 80 CIF or NMEA
ZDA
INMARSAT B
FELCOM 81 NMEA
ZDA
EGC EGC-5 GLL WPL RMA RMB RMC CIF or NMEA
ZZU ZLZ ZDA GLL VTG MTW
NAVTEX NX-500 HDP DBS DBT DBK VWT VWR CIF or NMEA
VCD VDR
Priority of talkers) GP>LC>DE>LA>TR>II

Priority of sentences)
Position GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
Speed VTG>RMC>RMA
HDG (Magnetic) HDG (>HDM>HCC)
HDG (True) HDT>RMC>RMA>VTG
Depth of water DPT>DBT
AP3-1
Appendix
EX) NMEA data connection
NMEA OUT
RC-1500 DSC-60
GPS NMEA NMEA Distributor

MD-500 DP-6
Reciver (05P0606)
FELCOM-12
FM-8500
FM-8500
Case-1
NMEA OUT
RC-1500 DSC-60
NMEA Distributor
MD-500 DP-6
(05P0606)
FELCOM-12
NMEA (GPS Reciver)
FM-8500
FM-8500
Case-2
AP3-2
Appendix
3.2 Sentences formatters

1. NMEA-0183-Ver2.0
Ver2.0:+UTC
Ver1.5
AP3-3
Appendix
AP3-4
Appendix
AP3-5
Appendix
2. IEC 1162-1
AP3-6
Appendix
AP3-7
Appendix
AP4. Program ROM

4.1 Communication Equipment ROM List
Model PCB type ROM Version No. ROM type Note

AA- 05P0514 U4 05-501-45-1xx M27C256B-10F1 CONTROL
50/50R (CONTROL)
05-501-48-140 For Old type
05P0407A M27C4001-10F1 LCD(yellow)
(CONTROL) 05-501-48-141
Note) Full parts
DMC-5 U8
For new LCD
05P0407E 05-501-48-143
M27C4001-10F1 type (green)
(CONTROL) and after
Reject parts
05P0407 For Old type
-none 05-501-39-141 M27C4001-10F1 LCD(yellow)
Note)
(CONTROL) U8 Full parts
DSC- For new LCD
05P0407D 05-501-39-142
5/5A/5R M27C4001-10F1 type (green)
(CONTROL) and after
5AR/5V Reject parts
U2 05-501-40-1xx
05P0370A WS57C49C-45D MODEM
(MODEM) U3 05-501-40-2xx
05-501-68-102 For Old type
05P0407C M27C4001-10F1 LCD(yellow)
(CONTROL) 05-501-68-103
Full parts
U8
Note) For new LCD
DSC-6/6A 05P0407G 05-501-68-105
M27C4001-10F1 type (green)
(CONTROL) and after
Reject parts
05P0370A U2 05-501-40-1xx
WS57C49C-45D MODEM
(MODEM) U3 05-501-40-2xx
05-501-67-102 For Old type
05P0407B M27C4001-10F1 LCD(yellow)
05-501-67-103
Full parts
Note) U8
DSC- For new LCD
05-501-67-104
8V/8VP 05P0407F M27C4001-10F1 type (green)
and after
Reject parts
05P0370A U2 05-501-40-1xx
WS57C49C-45D MODEM
(MODEM) U3 05-501-40-2xx
FD MAIN
DSC-60 U4 05-502-01-1xx U4:MBM29F800TA-70PFTN
05P0702 (Flash ROM) (Update from FD)
(FD:both for
DSC (CONTRL) FD MODEM
and MODEM) U11 05-502-02-1xx U11:MBM29F400BC-
90PFTNFK (Flash ROM) (Update from FD)
Note) Refer to section “4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board,

and LCD module changed”.
AP4-1
Appendix

U41 05-501-38-1xx
05P0386 U42 05-501-38-2xx M5M27C100k-15 Terminal
(CONTROL)
DP-5 U43 05-501-38-3xx
05P0370 U2 05-501-33-1xx
WS57C49C-45D MODEM
(MODEM) U3 05-501-33-2xx
U2 05-501-33-1xx MODEM
(DP-5/6:Ver14 and
U3 05-501-33-2xx
05P0370 before)
WS57C49C-45D
(MODEM) U2 05-501-96-1xx MODEM
(DP-6:Ver17 and
U3 05-501-96-2xx
DP-6 after)
AR-
B1378FC F- MAIN
or ROM 05-501-87-1xx FD (both for terminal
(DP-6/10)
AR-B1374 and main unit)
(CPU)
IB-581 --- 05-501-89-1xx Terminal
05P0370 U2 05-501-96-1xx MODEM
WS57C49C-45D
(MODEM) U3 05-501-96-2xx (DP-6/10)
AR-
DP-10 B1378FC F- MAIN
or ROM 05-501-87-1xx
FD (DP-6/10)
AR-B1374
(CPU)
PC --- 05-501-88-1xx Terminal
AP4-2
Appendix

05P0373 HD63B01Y0RDS7P Main CPU
U1 05-501-29-1xx
(PANEL) (Mask ROM) (05S9131-0)
FM-7000
05P0377 HD63B01Y0RDS8P Sub CPU
U1 05-501-30-1xx
(SUB-CPU) (Mask ROM) (05S9132-0)
05P0373 HD63B01Y0RDS7P Main CPU
U1 05-501-29-1xx
(PANEL) (Mask ROM) (05S9131-0)
05P0377 HD63B01Y0RDS8P Sub CPU
U1 05-501-30-1xx
(SUB-CPU) (Mask ROM) (05S9132-0)
DSC CONTROL
05P0407 For Old type
-none 05-501-39-141 M27C4001-10F1
Note)
(CONTROL)
LCD(yellow)
FM-7500 Full parts
U8
DSC CONTROL
05P0407D 05-501-39-142 For new LCD
M27C4001-10F1
(CONTROL) and after type (green)
Reject parts
05P0370A U2 05-501-40-1xx
WS57C49C-45D DSC MODEM
(MODEM) U3 05-501-40-2xx
FM-8000 05P0575 U6 05-501-66-1xx HD6475328CP-10 Control
(CPU)
05P0616 U2 05-501-83-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT
FM-8500
(CONTROL) U4 05-501-82-1xx M27C4001-10F1 DSC
05P0616A U2 05-501-93-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT
FM-8700 (CONTROL) U4 05-501-92-1xx M27C4001-10F1 DSC
05P0714 U2 05-502-03-1xx AT28C64B-15TC RT
FM-2721 (CONT)
(FD:both for
05P0716 HS-2721
RT and HS) U2 05-502-04-1xx HD64F3067RF20
(HS C0NT) (Hand set)
Note) Refer to section “4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board,

and LCD module changed”.
AP4-3
Appendix

05P0355 U9 05-501-31-1xx M5M27C100k-15
(CPU:5000C) Controller &
05P0347 U10 05-501-31-1xx M5M27C100k-15 Transceiver CPU
(CPU:5000T)
FS-2500/ 05P0358-33
5000/8000 and U3 05-501-32-1xx M27C256B-10F1
before
AT-5000
05P0358-44
and U1 05-501-54-1xx HD6475328CP
after
05-501-57-1xx
RT
RT: for
05P0456A U6 HD6475328CP-10 maintenance ROM,
FS-1562- (CPU) PCB Ver
15/25 05-501-57-106A
05P0526-33 (T/Rx
PCB) and
before
05P0528 U1 05-501-61-1xx HD6475328CP-10 AT-1560-15/25
(COUP)
05-501-58-1xx
RT
RT: for
05P0456B U6 HD6475328CP–10 maintenance ROM,
(CPU) PCB Ver
FS-75 05-501-58-106A
05P0526-33 (T/Rx
PCB) and
before
05P0528 U1 05-501-61-1xx HD6475328CP-10 AT-1560-15/25
(COUP)
FT-158 05P0425 U9 05-501-41-1xx M5M27C100k-15 CONTROL

(CPU)
FT- 05P0418 FX-3058
U9 05-501-41-1xx M5M27C100k-15
208/508/808 (CPU) Exciter unit
RC- 05P0442 CU-5521
U2 05-501-43-1xx M5M27C100-k-15
208/508/808 (CPU) controller unit
05P0665 U6 05-501-91-1xx HD6475328F10 RT
(CPU)
FS-1503 AT-1503
05P0669 U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P
(COUP) (05S0522-0)
05P456 U6 05-501-44-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT
(CPU)
FS-1502 AT-1502
05P0278B U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P
(COUP) (05S0522-0)
05P0271 HD63B01YORCQ1P RT
U1 05-501-25-1xx
(CPU) (Mask) (05S0955-0)
FS-1550
05P0278 AT-1500
U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P
(COUP) (05S0522-0)
05P0456D U6 05-501-69-1xx HD6475328CP-10 RT
(CPU)
FS-1552 AT-1500
05P0278 U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P
(COUP) (05S0522-0)
AP4-4
Appendix

05P0271 HD637B01YOP
U1 05-501-20-1xx RT
(CPU) (Mask)
FS-1501
05P0278 AT-1500
U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P
(COUP) (05S0522-0)
05P0271 HD637B01YOP
U1 05-501-20-1xx RT
(CPU) (Mask)
FS-1500
05P0278 AT-1500
U8 05-501-21-1xx HD63B01Y0E76P
(COUP) (05S0522-0)
CONTROL
05-501-47-1xx For FS
05P0483 series SSB RT
RB-500 U2 M5M27C100K-15
(MAIN) CONTROL
05-501-60-1xx For RC-508
series console
RB-700 05P0483A U2 05-501-46-1xx M5M27C100K-15 CONTROL
(MAIN)
IF-8500 05P0640 U1 05-501-86-1xx HD647180X0FS8L CONTROL

(CPU)
08P3151 Mask ROM
U8 08-501-50-1xx HD63B01YOREBOP
(MAIN) (08S0247-1)
NX-500
08P3119A Mask ROM
U2 08-501-51-1xx HD63B01YOREJ4P
(NAVTEX) (08S0248-1)
05P0258 U8 05-501-18-1xx M27C512-10F1 CONTROL
RV- (CONT)
128G/118G 05P0261 U3 05-501-19-1xx MBM27C64-30 I/F
(I/F)
AP4-5
Appendix

16P0049 U37 16-500-50-1xx CPU 1
(MAIN CPU) U41 16-500-51-1xx MBM27C1000-15Z-G CPU 2
EGC-5 16P0052 U5 16-500-52-1xx PANEL CPU
(PANEL CPU)
16P0034 U18 16-500-49-1xx
27CX321-45 DEMOD
(DEMOD) U21 16-500-49-2xx
16P0043-33 U52 16-500-40-1xx MBM27C1000-15Z-G CPU 1
and after CPU 2
U1 16-500-41-1xx M5M27C401AK-15
(CPU) (4M ROM)
16P0043 CPU2
U1 16-500-41-1xx MBM27C1000-15Z-G
(CPU) (1M ROM)
FELCOM
16P0034 U18 16-500-42-1xx
10 27CX321-45 DEMOD
(DEMOD) U27 16-500-42-2xx
U41 16-500-39-1xx
05P0386 Terminal
U42 16-500-39-2xx MBM27C1000-20/25
(CONTROL) (For IC-500)
U43 16-500-39-3xx
Soft for PC --- 16-500-38-0xx FD Terminal
U6 16-500-86-1xx MBM27C1000A-15Z CPU 1
U18 16-500-87-1xx M5M27C401AK CPU 2
16P0108 U41 16-500-42-1xx
(CONTROL) AT27HC641R-45DC DEMOD
U43 16-500-42-2xx
FELCOM
U21 --- AT28C64 FW/RT ID
11
U41 16-500-90-1xx
05P0386 Terminal
U42 16-500-90-2xx MBM27C1000A-15Z
(CONTROL) (For IC-511)
U43 16-500-90-3xx
IB-581 16-500-91-0xx FD Terminal
U39 16-501-12-1xx M27C1001-10F1 CPU 1
U44 16-501-14-1xx HN27C1024HG-85 DEMOD
16P0148 MBM29F400TA- CPU 2
FELCOM U26 16-501-18-1xx
(CPU) 12PFTN (Update from FD)
12
M6M80041P
U11 --- FW/RT ID
(EEPROM)
IB-581 --- 16-501-16-1xx FD Terminal
AP4-6
Appendix

TX CPU
U69 16-500-68-1xx
*9.6k data:Ver104--
16P0080 MBM27C1000A-15Z
RX CPU
(CPU 1) U38 16-500-69-1xx
*9.6k data:Ver106--
U21 16-500-70-1xx TC57H1024AD SYNCCPU
SYS CPU
16P0081 U5 16-500-74-1xx µPD27C4096DZ-12 *9.6k data:Ver114--
(CPU 2) *HSD:Ver116--
U65 16-500-75-1xx HD647180X0FS8L NAV CPU
16P0081-66 IO CPU (4M)
(C) 16-501-08-1xx M27C4001-10F1 *9.6k data:Ver102--
and after *HSD:Ver103--
(CPU 2) U89
16P0081
(A) 16-500-83-1xx MBM27C1000A-15Z IO CPU (1M)
FELCOM (CPU 2)
80
16P0079 U34 16-500-77-1xx TC57H1024AD-85 DEMOD
(DEMOD)
16P0078 U46
16-500-76-1xx MBM27C256A-25 TX IF MOD
(TX/RX IF) U48
U21 16-500-96-1xx
U22 16-500-96-2xx 4 pcs./set
16P0082 M27C256B CODEC
U13 16-500-96-3xx
(V CODEC) (Old type pcb:16S0121)
U14 16-500-96-4xx
16P0064 U2 16-500-81-1xx TC57256AD-15 AZ CPU
(AZ CPU)
16P0065 U4 16-500-82-1xx TC57256AD-15 EL CPU
(EL CPU)
PC --- 16-500-84-0xx FD Terminal
16P0084 U1 --- M6M80041P FW/RT ID
(MOTHER)
SYS CPU
U5 16-501-05-1xx M27C4002-12F1 *9.6k data:Ver105--
*HSD:Ver110--
16P0133 IO CPU
(CPU 2)
U67 16-501-06-1xx M27C4001-10F1 *9.6k data:Ver103--
*HSD:Ver106--
U37 16-500-75-0xx HD647180X0FS8L NAV CPU
16P0131 U34 16-501-07-1xx TC57H1024AD-85 DEMOD
(DEMOD)
U26 16-501-96-1xx
FELCOM U27 16-501-96-2xx 4 pcs./set
16P0134 M27C256B
81 (V.CODEC) U32 16-501-96-3xx CODEC
U33 16-501-96-4xx
U38 16-501-03-1xx RX CPU
16P0132 M27C1001-10F1
(CPU 1)
U69 16-501-04-1xx TX CPU
U21 16-500-70-1xx HN27C1024HG-85 SYNC CPU
16P0130 U50
16-500-76-1xx M27C256B-10F1 TX IF MOD
(RF CON) U52
16P0135 U1 M6M80041P --- FW/RT ID
(MOTHER)
IB-581 -- 16-501-09-0xx FD Terminal
AP4-7
Appendix

AR- F
B1378FH ROM 16-501-33-0xx HSD CPU
(CPU)
IB-680/681 16P0160 U16 16-501-34-1xx DEMOD
M27C10024-12F1
(DEMOD) U3 16-501-35-1xx DECODE
16P0158 U35 16-501-37-1xx M27C256B-10F1 TX IF MODE
(TX/RX IF)
AP4-8
Appendix
4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed

(DSC-5/6/8 series and DMC-5 and FM-7500)
Production of LCD module, LCM-523-68HE-4, used in above mentioned models has

been discontinued. We are now using the different type, PC2402LR-AEA-E. (The
current LCD is green color, while the previous one is yellow) In addition, the
CONTROL board has been modified to be used for the LCD module of current type.
Note that no compatibility exists between two LCD modules; The new LCD module
cannot be used in combination with the previous CONTROL board, because of
different LCD supply voltage. Replace the LCD and the CONTROL board at the same
time. If a wrong combination is selected, the display becomes entirely black or white.
In DSC-6 and DSC-8 series, replace the PANEL board if the LCD is defective. The
LCD module is soldered to the PANEL board in these models.
Combination of boards and

05P0407 board suffix character
Program version Note 1)
Model A to C and
D to G type
None A B C D E F G none type
board
board
DSC-5 X X
DSC-5R X X
05-501-39-142
DSC-5A X X 05-501-39-141
and after
DSC-5AR X X
DSC-5V X X
DSC-6 X X 05-501-68-103
05-501-68-102
DSC-6A X X and after
DSC-8V X X 05-501-67-103
05-501-67-102
DSC-8VP X X and after
05-501-48-142
DMC-5 X X 05-501-48-141
and after
05-501-39-142
FM-7500 X X 05-501-39-141
and after
Type of
Old type: New type:
LCD
LMC-523-68HE-4 PC24021LR-AEA-E
module
Note 2) 05P0407-11, 22, 33 05P0407-33, 66
Combination
of Suffix DSC-5 series, DMC-5 and DSC-5 series, DMC-5 and
number and FM-7500 FM-7500
program ver. 05P0407-11, 22: Ver 12x 05P0407-33, 66: Ver 14x
Delete of
unnecessary X X X X
parts
AP4-9
Appendix
*** D type board: commonly used ***

Note 1)
Old and new LCDs are controlled by different programs.
Program of D to G boards can be used to A to C and none suffix board.
Program of A to C and none boards cannot be used to D to G suffix board.
Note 2)
Select adequate program version level for the board in DSC-5 series, DMC-5, and
FM-7500. Software was upgraded as hardware was changed.
Note 3)
*CONTROL pcb
05P0407D Code No.00551370000 (DSC-5/5A/5V, FM-7500)
05P0407E Code No.00551511000 (DMC-5)
05P0407F Code No.00560546000 (DSC-8V/8VP)
05P0407G Code No.00594569000 (DSC-6/6A)
*PANEL pcb
05P0577 Code No.00560545000
*LCD print
PC2402LR-AEA-E Code No.00593141000
AP4-10
Appendix
4.3 FURUNO Information

FQ5-1999-004 1/2
AP4-11
Appendix
2/2
AP4-12

Furuno - GMDSS-TCE-D PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Furuno - GMDSS-TCE-D PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TCE-59060-D

System settings list

Quit to application softwear. [Fn ]+ [F2] + [Alt] Ver 16 or later

A. MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone

Section A2. FS-75/2550

Section A3. FS-5000/8000

Section B2. DSC-6/6A

Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP

Section B4. DSC-60

C. MF/HF Watch Receiver

Section D2. DP-6

Section E2. FM-7500

Section E3. FM-8000

Section E4. FM-8500

Section E5. FM-8700

F. Distress Message Controller

Section G2. FELCOM 11

Section G3. FELCOM 12

Section H2. FELCOM 81

Section H3. FELCOM 82

Section K2. IB-582

AP2. Power consumption

AP4. Program ROM

2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder.

4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.

6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5.

2.2 System channel list (Ver-09)

Ver-09:Changed from Ver-09

Ver-07:Changed from Ver-07

2.3 System channel list (Ver-03)

: Different “setting” between Ver-3 and Ver-9.

2.4 System settings descriptions

2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation

2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key.

7. Select emission mode with the [MODE] key.

11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10.

To erase a user channel

To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.

4. Power Date Setting

[ENT] + [9] LOW Power

[ENT] + [7] TUNE Power

Power data appears

Power data setting table

Condition; 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset).

Output 150W 180 178 153 132 112 92 76 61 48 34 23 18 15 8 8

5.2 Antenna coupler unit

2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder.

4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder.

6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5.

2.2 System channel list (Ver-09)

Ver 07: Changed from Ver 07

System Setting Default

Conform the following system setting for GMDSS.

2.3 System settings descriptions

2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation

2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key.

ROM Version No.

9999 0-01 R 0-01 T ------ 25-20 R

9998 ------ 9900 25-20 T

7. Select the emission mode with the [MODE] key.

10. Enter a TX frequency as follows.

11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10.

To erase a user channel

Ready for filing